OWNER’S
MANUAL
Ibiza
6P0012720BD
Inglés
6P0012720BD (11.16)
Ibiza Inglés (11.16)
SEAT recommends
SEAT GENUINE OIL
SEAT recommends
Castrol EDGE Professional
SEAT S.A. is permanently concerned about continuous development of its types and models. For this reason we ask you to under-
stand, that at any given time, changes regarding shape, equipment and technique may take place on the car delivered. For this reason
no right at all may derive based on the data, drawings and descriptions in this current handbook.
All texts, illustrations and standards in this handbook are based on the status of information at the time of printing. Except for error
or omission, the information included in the current handbook is valid as of the date of closing print.
Re-printing, copying or translating, whether total or partial is not allowed unless SEAT allows it in written form.
SEAT reserves all rights in accordance with the “Copyright” Act.
All rights on changes are reserved.
❀
This paper has been manufactured using bleached non-chlorine cellulose.
© SEAT S.A. - Reprint: 15.11.16
About this manual
This manual contains a description of the
equipment supplied with the vehicle at the
time this manual was published. Some of the
units described herein will not be available
until a later date or are only available in cer-
tain markets.
Because this is a general manual for the IBIZA
range, some of the equipment and functions
that are described in this manual are not in-
cluded in all types or variants of the model;
they may vary or be modified depending on
the technical requirements and on the mar-
ket; this is in no way deceptive advertising.
The illustrations are intended as a general
guide and may vary from the equipment fitted
in your vehicle in some details.
The steering indications (left, right, forward,
reverse) appearing in this manual refer to the
normal driving movements of the vehicle ex-
cept when otherwise indicated.
The audiovisual material only is intended to
help users to understand certain car function-
alities better. It does not replace the instruc-
tion manual. Please use the instruction manu-
al to obtain more comprehensive information
and indications.
The equipment marked with an aster-
isk* is fitted as standard only in certain
versions, and is only supplied as op-
tional extras for some versions, or are
only offered in certain countries.
® All registered marks are indicated with
®. Although the copyright symbol does
not appear, it is a copyrighted mark.
>> The section is continued on the follow-
ing page.
Important warnings on a given page
Detailed contents on a given page
General information on a given page
Emergency information on a given page
Audiovisual material on a given page
WARNING
Texts preceded by this symbol contain infor-
mation on safety. They warn you about possi-
ble dangers of accident or injury.
CAUTION
Texts with this symbol draw your attention to
potential sources of damage to your vehicle.
For the sake of the environment
Texts preceded by this symbol contain rele-
vant information concerning environmental
protection.
Note
Texts preceded by this symbol contain additio-
nal information.
This manual is divided into six large parts,
which are:
1. The essentials
2. Safety
3. Emergencies
4. Operation
5. Tips
6. Technical data
At the end of this manual, there is a detailed
alphabetical index that will help you quickly
find the information you require.
Foreword
This Instruction Manual and its correspond-
in
g s
up
plements should be read carefully to
familiarise yourself with your vehicle.
Besides the regular care and maintenance of
the vehicle, its correct handling will help pre-
serve its value.
For safety reasons, always note the informa-
tion concerning accessories, modifications
and part replacements.
If selling the vehicle, give all of the on-board
documentation to the new owner, as it
should be kept with the vehicle.
You can access the information in this man-
ual using:
●
Thematic table of contents that follows the
manual’s general chapter structure.
●
Visual table of contents that uses graphics
to indicate the pages containing “essential”
information, which is detailed in the corre-
sponding chapters.
●
Alphabetical index with many terms and
synonyms to help you find information.
WARNING
Read and always observe safety informa-
tion concernin
g the passenger's front air-
bag ››› page 72, Important information
regarding the front passenger's airbag.
»
Table of Contents
Table of Contents
The e
s
senti
als . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
Exterior view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
Exterior view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Interior view (left-hand drive) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Interior view (right-hand drive) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
How it works . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Opening and closing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Before driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Child seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Starting the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Lights and visibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Easy Connect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Driver information system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Journey data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Cruise control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Warning lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Gearbox lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Air conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Fluid Level control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
Emergencies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Action in the event of a puncture . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Changing a wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Snow chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Emergency towing of the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . 51
How to jump start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
Changing the windscreen wiper blades . . . . . . 54
Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Safe driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Safety first! . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Advice about driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Correct position for passengers . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Pedal area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Why wear a seat belt? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
How to properly adjust your seatbelt . . . . . . . . 64
Belt pretensioners* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Airbag system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Brief introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Airbag safety instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
Deactivating airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
Transporting children safely . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
Safety for children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
Child seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
Emergencies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
Self-help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
Emergency equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
Tyre repair . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
Changing the windscreen wiper blades . . . . . . 78
Towing or tow-starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Fuses and bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
Changing bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Single headlight bulb change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
Double headlight bulb change . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
Changing the AFS headlight bulbs . . . . . . . . . . 87
Changing the fog light bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
Changing the tail light bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
Changing the side and interior bulbs . . . . . . . . 89
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
Controls and displays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
General instrument panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
Instruments and warning/control lamps . . . . . 94
Instruments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
Warning and control lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
Introduction to the Easy Connect system* . . . . 99
System settings (CAR)* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
Communications and multimedia . . . . . . . . . . . 101
Steering wheel controls* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
Multimedia . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
Opening and closing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
Central locking system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
Radio frequency remote control* . . . . . . . . . . . 110
Anti-theft alarm* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
Boot hatch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
Electric windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
Tilting panoramic roof* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
Lights and visibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
Interior lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
Visibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
Windscreen wiper and rear window wiper sys-
tems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
Rear view mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
Seats and head restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
Adjusting the seat and head restraints . . . . . . 127
Seat functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
Transport and practical equipment . . . . . . . . . 130
Practical equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
Luggage compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
Roof rack/roof luggage rack* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
Air conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
Heating, ventilation and cooling . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
Heating and fresh air . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
Air conditioning* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
Climatronic* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
Address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
Starting and stopping the engine . . . . . . . . . . . 147
Braking and parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
Braking and stability systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
Manual gearbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
Automatic gearbox* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
Run-in and economical driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
3
Table of Contents
Engine management and exhaust gas purifica-
tion sy
s
t
em . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
Driving tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
Driver assistance systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
Start-Stop System* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
Fatigue detection (break recommendation)* . . 171
Parking aid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
Rear Assist “Rear View Camera”* . . . . . . . . . . . 177
Cruise speed* (cruise control - GRA) . . . . . . . . . 180
“SEAT Drive Profile” system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
Towing bracket device and trailer . . . . . . . . . . . 183
Trailer mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
Retrofitting a towing bracket* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
Advice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
Care and maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
Accessories and modifications to the vehi-
cle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
Care and cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
Care of the vehicle exterior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
Caring for the vehicle interior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
Checking and refilling levels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
Refuelling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
Working in the engine compartment . . . . . . . . 198
Engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
Cooling system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
Brake fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
Windscreen washer reservoir . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
Vehicle battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
Wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210
Wheels and tyres . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210
Winter service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
Technical data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216
Technical specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216
Important information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216
Information on fuel consumption . . . . . . . . . . . 217
Trailer mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
Wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
Engine data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231
Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233
4
The essentials
Interior view (left-hand drive)
1
››› page 13
2
››› page 21
3
››› page 22
4
››› page 34
5
››› page 35
6
››› page 23
7
››› page 25
8
››› page 24
9
››› page 39
10
››› page 22
11
››› page 14
12
››› page 21
13
››› page 37
14
››› page 11
15
››› page 10
16
››› page 44
17
››› page 12
18
››› page 12
19
››› page 13
7
The essentials
Interior view (right-hand drive)
1
››› page 22
2
››› page 34
3
››› page 22
4
››› page 39
5
››› page 24
6
››› page 23
7
››› page 25
8
››› page 35
9
››› page 21
10
››› page 13
11
››› page 10
12
››› page 14
13
››› page 13
14
››› page 37
15
››› page 12
16
››› page 12
17
››› page 21
18
››› page 44
19
››› page 11
8
The essentials
How it works
Openin
g and c
lo
sing
Doors
Fig. 1 Remote control key: buttons.
Fig. 2 Centre console: Central lock buttons.
Locking and unlocking the vehicle using the
k
ey
●
L
oc
king: press the ››› Fig. 1 button.
●
Unlocking: press the ››› Fig. 1 button.
●
Unlocking the rear lid: press the
››› Fig. 1 button until all the turn signals on
the vehicle briefly light up.
Locking and unlocking with the central lock-
ing switch
●
Locking: press the ››› Fig. 2 button. None
of the doors can be opened from the outside.
The doors can be opened from the inside by
pulling the inside door handle.
●
Unlocking: press the ››› Fig. 2 button.
››› in Description on page 106
››› page 106
Rear lid
Fig. 3 Rear lid: opening from the outside.
The rear lid opening system operates electri-
c
al
ly
. It is activated by using the handle on
the boot lid.
This system may or may not be operative, de-
pending on the situation of the vehicle.
If the rear lid is locked then it cannot be
opened, however if it is unlocked then the
opening system is operative and the rear lid
may be opened.
To lock/unlock, press the button or button
››› Fig. 1 on the remote control key.
A warning appears on the instrument panel
display if the rear lid is open or not properly
closed.* An audible warning is also given if
the boot lid is opened while the vehicle is
moving faster than 6 km/h (4 mph)*.
»
9
The essentials
●
Openin
g the r
e
ar lid: Pull on the release
lever and lift it up ››› Fig. 3. The rear lid opens
automatically.
●
Closing the rear lid: Hold it by one of the
handles on the interior lining and close it by
pushing gently.
››› in Opening and closing on
page 114
››› page 10
Unlocking the rear lid manually
Fig. 4 Unlocking the rear lid manually.
This allows the vehicle to be opened if the
c
entr
al
locking does not work (for example, if
the battery is flat)
There is a groove in the luggage compart-
ment allowing access to the emergency
opening mechanism.
Opening the rear lid from inside the luggage
compartment
●
Insert the key in the groove and unlock the
locking system, turning the key from right to
left, as shown by the arrow ››› Fig. 4.
Bonnet
Fig. 5 Release lever in the driver's footwell
ar
e
a.
Fig. 6 Cam under the bonnet
●
Opening the bonnet: Pull the lever under
the d
a
shbo
ard ››› Fig. 5
1
.
●
Lifting up the bonnet: press the release
c
at
c
h under the bonnet upwards ››› Fig. 6
2
.
The arr
e
s
ter hook under the bonnet is re-
leased.
●
Release the bonnet stay and secure it in
the fixture designed for this in the bonnet.
››› in safety notes for work in the en-
gine compartment on page 198
››› page 198
10
The essentials
Electric windows*
Fig. 7 Detail of the driver door: controls for
the w
indo
w
s.
●
Opening the window: Press the b
utt
on.
●
C
losing the window: Pull the button.
Buttons on the driver door
Window on the front left door
Window on the front right door
Safety switch for deactivating the electric
window buttons on the rear doors (only 5-
door vehicles)
Window on the rear left door (only 5-door
vehicles)
Window on the right rear door (only 5-
door vehicles)
1
2
3
4
5
››› in Opening and closing of the elec-
tric windows* on page 114
››› page 114
Panoramic roof*
Fig. 8 On the interior roof lining: Panoramic
s
u
nr
oof controls
●
Opening: Press the ›
›
›
Fig. 8
A
button once
on
ly
. If
you keep it pressed down, it will open
to the desired position.
●
Closing: Press the ››› Fig. 8
B
button once
on
ly
. If
you keep it pressed down, it will close
to the desired position.
Restoring one-touch opening and closing
●
Close the sunroof manually until it is com-
plet
ely closed. Release the button.
●
Pres
s the closing button again, keeping it
pressed down, until a complete opening and
closing cycle has taken place.
››› in Opening or closing of the tilting
panoramic roof on page 116
››› page 116
››› page 11
Operation of the panoramic sunroof
Fig. 9 Emergency operation of the panoram-
ic/ti
ltin
g s
unroof.
In case of a breakdown, the sunroof may be
c
lo
sed m
anually.
●
Remove the plastic cover by inserting a
screwdriver into the rear section.
»
11
The essentials
●
In
ser
t
an Allen key (4 mm) into the opening
as far as possible and close the sunroof.
Before driving
Manually adjusting the front seats
Fig. 10 Front seats: manual seat adjustment.
Forward/back: pull the lever and move
the se
at
f
orwards or backwards.
Raising/lowering: pull/push the lever.
Tilting the backrest: turn the hand wheel.
1
2
3
Folding down the backrest (only 3-door
v
ehic
l
es): pull the lever and push the
backrest forward.
››› in Adjusting the front seats on
page 127
Adjusting the head restraints
Fig. 11 Front seat: adjustment of the head re-
s
tr
aint
.
●
Grab the sides of the head restraints with
both h
and
s
and push upwards to the desired
position. To lower it, repeat the same action,
pressing the
1
button on the side.
››› in Adjusting or disassembling the
head restraints on page 128
››› page 60, ››› page 128
4
Adjustment of the seat belt
Fig. 12 Positioning and removing the seat
belt
b
uc
kle.
12
The essentials
Fig. 13 Correct seat belt and head restraint
position
s, viewed from front and the side.
To adjust the seat belt around your should-
er
s, a
dju
st the height of the seats.
The shoulder part of the seat belt should be
well centred over it, never over the neck. The
seat belt lies flat and fits comfortably on the
upper part of the body.
The lap part of the seat belt lies across the
pelvis, never across the stomach. The seat
belt lies flat and fits comfortably on the pel-
vis.
››› page 63
››› page 64
Seat belt tensioners
During a collision, the seat belts on the front
seats ar
e retracted automatically.
The tensioner can be triggered only once.
››› in Service and disposal of belt ten-
sioners on page 66
››› page 65
Adjusting the exterior mirrors
Fig. 14 Detail of the driver door: control for
the e
xt
erior mirr
or.
Adjusting the exterior mirrors: Turn the knob
t
o the c
orr
esponding position:
Turning the knob to the desired posi-
tion, adjust the mirrors on the driver
L/R
side (L, left) and the passenger side (R,
right) to the direction desired.
Folding in mirrors.
››› in Electric exterior mirrors* on
page 126
››› page 126
Adjusting the steering wheel
Fig. 15 Lever in the lower left side of the
s
t
eerin
g column.
●
Adjusting the position of the steering
wheel: P
u
l
l the ››› Fig. 15
1
lever down,
mo
v
e the s
teering wheel to the desired posi-
tion and lift the lever back up until it locks.
››› in Adjusting the steering wheel po-
sition on page 58
13
The essentials
Airbags
fr
ont
airb
ags
Fig. 16 Driver airbag located in steering
wheel
.
Fig. 17 Front passenger airbag located in
d
a
sh p
anel.
The front airbag for the driver is located in
the s
t
eerin
g wheel ››› Fig. 16 and the airbag
for the front passenger is located in the dash
panel ››› Fig. 17. Airbags are identified by the
word “AIRBAG”.
When the driver and front passenger airbags
are deployed, the covers remain attached to
the steering wheel and dashboard, respec-
tively ››› Fig. 16 ››› Fig. 17.
In conjunction with the seat belts, the front
airbag system gives the driver and the front
passenger additional protection for the head
and chest in the event of a severe frontal col-
lision.
The special design of the airbag allows the
controlled escape of the propellant gas when
an occupant puts pressure on the bag. Thus,
the head and chest are surrounded and pro-
tected by the airbag. After the collision, the
airbag deflates sufficiently to allow visibility.
››› page 69
Deactivating the front passenger front
airb
ag
Fig. 18 Front passenger front airbag switch.
To deactivate the front passenger front air-
b
ag:
●
Open the glo
v
e compartment on the front
passenger side.
14
The essentials
●
In
ser
t
the key blade into the slot provided
in the deactivation switch.
●
Approximately ¾ of the length of the key
blade remains inserted (the maximum).
●
Turn the key blade, changing its position to
. Do not force it. If you have difficulty, en-
sure that you have inserted the key as far as
it will go.
●
Finally, check the control lamp on the in-
strument panel where it shows
the following should appear .
››› in Deactivation of front passenger
front airbag* on page 71
››› page 70
Side airbags*
Fig. 19 Side airbag in driver's seat.
Fig. 20 Illustration of completely inflated side
airbag on lef
t side of vehicle.
The side airbags are located in the driver's
se
at
and fr
ont passenger seat backrests
››› Fig. 19. The locations are identified by the
text “AIRBAG” in the upper region of the
backrests.
In conjunction with the seat belts, the side
airbag system provides additional protection
for the upper body in the event of a severe
side collision.
In a side collision, the side airbags reduce
the risk of injury to passengers to the areas
of the body facing the impact. In addition to
their normal function of protecting the occu-
pants in a collision, the front and rear outer
seat belts also hold the passengers in the
event of a side collision; this is how these air-
bags provide maximum protection.
››› in Side airbags* on page 69
Head-protection airbags*
Fig. 21 Location and deployment area of the
he
a
d-pr
otection airbag.
There is a head airbag on each side of the in-
t
erior abo
v
e the doors ››› Fig. 21. Airbags are
identified by the word “AIRBAG”.
The area framed in red is covered by the
head-protection airbag when it is deployed
››› Fig. 21 (deployment area). Therefore, ob-
jects should never be placed or mounted in
this area ›››
in Curtain airbags* on
p
ag
e 70
.
In the event of a side collision the curtain air-
bag is triggered on the impact side of the ve-
hicle.
The head-protection airbags reduce the risk
of injury to passengers in the front and rear
side seats facing the impact.
»
15
The essentials
››› in Curtain airbags* on page 70
Child seats
Important information regarding the
front passenger's airbag
Fig. 22 Passenger's side sun visor: airbag
s
tic
k
er.
Fig. 23 On the rear frame of the passenger
side door: airbag s
ticker.
A sticker with important information about
the p
a
s
senger airbag is located on the pas-
senger's sun visor and/or on the passenger
side door frame.
››› in Important information regarding
the front passenger's airbag on page 72
››› page 72
16
The essentials
Ways to secure a child seat
Fig. 24 On the rear seats: Possible installations
for the chi
ld seat.
Figure ›
›› Fig. 24
A
shows the basic child re-
s
tr
aint
system mounting using lower retain-
ing rings and the upper retaining strap. Fig-
ure ››› Fig. 24
B
shows the child restraint
sy
s
t
em mounting using the vehicle seat belt.
You can secure a child seat to the rear seat or
front passenger seat in the following ways:
●
Child seats in groups 0 to 3 can be secured
with a seat belt.
●
Child seats for groups 0, 0+ and 1 can be
fastened without seatbelts, using the “ISO-
FIX” system, using the “ISOFIX” ››› page 18
securing rings.
●
During installation of some models of
group I, II and III child seats in the rear seat,
difficulty may arise in mounting given that
the seat comes into contact with the head re-
straint. In this case, adjust the height of the
head restraint or remove it from the seat fol-
lowing the instructions in the corresponding
chapter ›››
page 128. Once you remove
the child seat, replace the head restraint in
its original position.
»
17
The essentials
Weight
group
Seating position
Front pas-
senger
seat
a)
Rear
side
seat
Rear
central
seat
Group 0
to 10 kg
U* U U
Group 0+
to 13 kg
U* U U
Group I
9 to 18 kg
U* U U
Group II
15 to 25 kg
U* U U
Group III
22 to 36 kg
U* U U
a)
Compliance with current national legislation and the manu-
facturer's instructions is required when using or installing child
seats.
Suitable for universal restraint systems
for use in this weight group.
Move the front passenger seat as far
back as possible, as high as possible
and always disable the airbag.
The systems include the child restraint sys-
tem mounting with an upper retaining strap
(Top Tether) and lower anchoring points on
the seat.
››› in Safety instructions on page 73
U:
*:
“ISOFIX” and Top Tether child seat mounting system*
Child seats can be secured quickly, easily
and s
af
ely
on the rear outer seats with the
“ISOFIX” and Top Tether* system.
Two “ISOFIX” retaining rings are fitted on
each rear seat. In some vehicles, the rings
are secured to the seat frame and, in others,
they are secured to the rear floor. The “ISO-
FIX” rings are located between the rear seat
backrest and the seat cushioning. The Top
Tether* rings are located at the rear of the
backrests of the rear seats (behind the seat
backrest or in the boot).
To understand the compatibility of the "ISO-
FIX" systems in the vehicle, consult the table
below.
The body weight permitted and information
regarding sizes A to F is indicated on the la-
bel on child seats with “universal” or “semi-
universal” certification.
18
The essentials
Weight group Size class Electrical equipment Mounting direction
Vehicle Isofix positions
Rear side seats
Baby carrier
F ISO/L1 Backward-facing X
G ISO/L2 Backward-facing X
Group 0 to 10 kg E ISO/R1 Backward-facing IU
Group 0+ to 13 kg
E ISO/R1 Backward-facing IU
D ISO/R2 Backward-facing IU
C ISO/R3 Backward-facing IU
Group I 9 to 18 kg
D ISO/R2 Backward-facing IU
C ISO/R3 Backward-facing IU
B ISO/F2 Forward-facing IU
B1 ISO/F2X Forward-facing IU
A ISO/F3 Forward-facing IU
Group II 15 to 25 kg --- --- Forward-facing ---
Group III 22 to 36 kg --- --- Forward-facing ---
Suitable for ISOFIX universal child re-
s
tr
aint
systems approved for use in this
weight group.
ISOFIX position not suitable for ISOFIX
child restraint systems for this weight
group or size class.
››› in Safety instructions on page 73
IU:
X:
19
The essentials
Mount the child seat with the “ISOFIX
sy
s
t
ems”
Fig. 25 ISOFIX securing rings.
When removing or fitting the child seat,
p
l
e
ase be sure to follow the manufacturer's
instructions.
●
Press the child seat onto the “ISOFIX” re-
taining rings until the child seat can be heard
to engage securely. If the child seat is fitted
with any other anti-rotation system, follow
the manufacturer instructions carefully.
●
Pull on both sides of the child seat to en-
sure that it is secure.
Child seats with the “ISOFIX” and Top Tether*
attachment system are available from Techni-
cal Services.
Top Tether* retainer straps
Fig. 26 Position of the Top Tether rings on the
b
ac
k
of the rear seat.
Child seats with the Top Tether system come
w
ith a s
tr
ap for securing the seat to the vehi-
cle anchor point, located at the back of the
rear seat backrest and provide greater re-
straint.
The objective of this strap is to reduce the
forward movement of the child seat in a
crash, to reduce the risk of injuries to the
head from hitting the inside of the vehicle.
Using the Top Tether in rear-facing mounted
seats
Currently, there are very few rear-facing child
safety seats that have Top Tether. Please
carefully read and follow the seat manufac-
turer instructions to learn the proper way to
install the Top Tether strap.
Securing the Top Tether* of the child
seat to the anchorage point
Fig. 27 Retainer strap: correct adjustment
and fittin
g.
Securing to the anchorage point located on
the r
e
ar of
the backrest
●
Follow the manufacturer's instructions to
deploy the child seat Top Tether retainer
strap.
●
Guide the strap under the rear seat head re-
straint ››› Fig. 27 (lift the head restraint where
necessary).
●
Slide the strap and secure it properly with
the anchorage of the backrest.
●
Firmly tighten the Top Tether belt following
the manufacturer's instructions.
Releasing the retaining strap
●
Loosen the strap following the manufactur-
er's instructions.
20
The essentials
●
P
u
sh the loc
k and release it from the an-
choring support.
››› in Safety instructions on page 73
Starting the vehicle
Ignition lock
Fig. 28 Ignition key positions.
Switch ignition on: Place the key in the igni-
tion and s
t
ar
t the engine.
Locking and unlocking the steering wheel
●
Engaging the steering wheel lock: Remove
the key from the ignition and turn the wheel
until it locks. In vehicles with an automatic
gearbox, the gear lever must be in the P posi-
tion in order to remove the key. If necessary,
press the locking key on the selector lever
and release it again.
●
Unlocking the steering wheel: Put the key
into the ignition and turn it at the same time
as the steering wheel in the direction indica-
ted by the arrow. If it is not possible to turn
the steering wheel, it may be because it is
locked.
Turning on/switching off the ignition, glow
plugs reheating
●
Switch ignition on: Turn the key to the
2
position.
●
Switch ignition off. Turn the key to the
1
position.
●
Diesel vehicles :
The glo
w p
lugs reheat
when the ignition is switched on
Starting the engine
●
Manual gearbox: press the clutch pedal all
the way down and move the gearbox lever in-
to neutral.
●
Automatic gearbox: Press the brake pedal
and move the selector lever to the P position
or into N.
●
Turn the key to the
3
position. The key au-
t
om
atic
ally returns to the
2
position. Do not
pr
e
s
s the accelerator.
Start-Stop System*
When you stop and release the clutch pedal,
the Start-Stop system* turns off the engine.
The ignition remains switched on.
››› in Ignition key positions on
page 147
››› page 147
Lights and visibility
He
a
dlight
switch
Fig. 29 Dash panel: light control.
●
Turn the switch to the required position
›
›
›
Fig. 29.
»
21
The essentials
Sym-
bol
Ignition switch-
ed off
Ignition is switch-
ed on
Fog lights, dipped
beam and side
lights off.
Light off or daytime
driving light on.
The “Coming home”
and “Leaving
home” guide lights
may be switched
on.
Automatic control of
dipped beam and day-
time running light.
Side light on.
Dipped beam head-
light off
Dipped beam switch-
ed on.
Front fog lights: mo
ve the switch to the
first position, from positions , or .
Rear fog light: move the switch completely
from positions , or .
Switching off fog lights: Push the switch or
turn it to the position.
››› in Switching lights on and off on
page 117
››› page 117
Turn signal and main beam lever
Fig. 30 Turn signal and main beam lever
More the lever to the required position:
Right
t
urn s
ignal: Right-hand parking
light (ignition switched off).
Left turn signal: Left-hand parking light
(ignition switched off).
Main beam switched on: Control lamp
lit up on the instrument panel.
Headlight flasher: lit up when the lever is
pushed. Control lamp lit up.
Lever all the way down to switch it off.
››› in Turn signal and main beam lever
on page 119
››› page 119
1
2
3
4
Hazard warning lights
Fig. 31 Dash panel: switch for hazard warn-
in
g lights.
Switched on, for example:
●
When approaching a traffic jam
●
In an emergency
●
The vehicle has broken down
●
When towing or being towed
››› in Hazard warning lights
on
page 122
››› page 121
22
The essentials
Interior lights
Fig. 32 Detail of headliner: front interior light-
in
g.
Knob Function
Switches interior lights off.
Switches interior lights on.
Switches door contact control on (central po-
sition).
The interior lights come on automatically
when the vehicle is unlocked, a door is
opened or the key is removed from the igni-
tion.
The lights go off a few seconds after all the
doors are closed, the vehicle is locked or the
ignition is switched on.
Knob Function
Turning the reading light on and off
››› page 122
Windscreen wipers and window wiper
bla
de
Fig. 33 Operating the windscreen wiper and
r
e
ar w
iper
More the lever to the required position:
0
Windscreen wiper off.
More the lever to the required position:
1
Windscreen wipers interval wipe.
Using the control ››› Fig. 33
A
adjust the
interval (vehicles without rain sensor), or
the sensitivity of the rain sensor.
2
Slow wipe.
3
Continuous wipe.
4
Short wipe. Brief press, short clean. Hold
the lever down for more time to increase
the wipe frequency.
5
Automatic wipe. The windscreen washer
function is activated by pushing the lever
forwards, and simultaneously the wind-
screen wipers start.
6
Interval wipe for rear window. The wiper
will wipe the window approximately every
six seconds.
7
The rear window wash function is activa-
ted by pressing the lever, and the rear wip-
er starts simultaneously.
››› in Windscreen wipers on page 123
››› page 123
››› page 54
23
The essentials
Easy Connect
CAR menu settin
g
s
(Setup)
Fig. 34 Easy Connect: Main menu
Fig. 35 Easy Connect: CAR menu
To select the settings menus, press the Easy
C
onnect
button and the
Set
up
function
b
utt
on.
The act
ual number of menus available and
the name of the various options will depend
on the vehicle’s electronics and equipment.
●
Switch the ignition on.
●
If the Infotainment System is off, switch it
on.
●
Press the system's
MENU
button and then
the sy
s
t
em's
›
›› Fig. 34
b
utton or
but-
t
on t
o g
o to the CAR menu ››› Fig. 35.
●
Press the function button
Setup
to open the
menu Vehicle settings ›
›
›
Fig. 35.
●
To select a function in the menu, press the
desired button.
When you press the menu button, the last se-
lected menu will always be displayed.
When the function button check box is activa-
ted , the function is active.
Any changes made using the settings menus
are automatically saved on closing the
BACK
menus.
Menu Submenu Possible setting Description
ESC system – Activation of the Electronic Stability Programme (ESC) ››› page 152
Tyres
Tyre pressure monitoring Tyre pressure storing (Calibration) ››› page 213
Winter tyres Activation and deactivation of the speed warning. Setting the speed warning value ››› page 214
24
The essentials
Menu Submenu Possible setting Description
Driver assistance Fatigue detection Activation/deactivation ››› page 171
Parking and manoeu-
vring
ParkPilot
Automatically activate, front volume, front sound settings, rear volume, rear sound set-
tings, adjust volume
››› page 173
Vehicle lights
Vehicle interior lighting Instrument and switch lighting, footrest lighting ››› page 122
Coming home/Leaving home func‐
tion
Start time for “Coming home” function, start time for “Leaving home” function ››› page 119
Windscreen wipers Windscreen wipers Automatic windscreen wipers, wipe when reversing ››› page 23
Opening and closing
Radio-operated remote control Convenience open function ››› page 116
Central locking system Unlocking doors, automatic locking/unlocking, audible confirmation ››› page 106
Multifunction display
–
Current consumption, average consumption, volume to fill up, convenience consum-
ers, ECOAdvice, travelling time, distance travelled, digital speed display, average
speed, speeding warning, oil temperature, coolant temperature, restore data “from
start”, restore data “total calculation”
››› page 25
Date and time –
Time source, set the time, automatic summer time (DST) setting, select time zone,
time format, set the date, date format
–
Measurement units – Distance, speed, temperature, volume, consumption –
Service – Chassis number, date of next SEAT service inspection, date of next oil change service ››› page 33
Factory settings –
All settings can be reset: driver assistance, parking and manoeuvring, lights, rear view
mirrors, opening and closing, multi-function display
–
››› in CAR menu (Setup) on page 100
››› page 99
Driver information system
Intr
oduction
With the ignition switched on, it is possible
to re
ad the different functions of the display
by scrolling through the menus.
In vehicles with multifunction steering wheel,
the multifu
nction display can only be operat-
ed with the steering wheel buttons.
The number of menus displayed on the in-
strument panel will vary according to the ve-
hicle electronics and equipment.
»
25
The essentials
A specialised workshop will be able to pro-
gr
amme or modif
y
additional functions, ac-
cording to the vehicle equipment. SEAT rec-
ommends visiting a SEAT Official Service.
Some menu options can only be read when
the vehicle is at a standstill.
As long as a priority 1 warning is displayed, it
will not be possible to read the menus. Some
warning messages can be confirmed and
made to disappear with the windscreen wiper
lever button or the multifunction steering
wheel button.
The information system also provides the fol-
lowing information and displays (depending
on the vehicle's equipment):
Driving data ››› page 29
■
Vehicle status
■
MFD from departure
■
MFD from refuelling
■
MFD total calculation
Assist systems ››› table on page 27
■
Reverse (optional)
Navigation ››› Booklet Navigation system
Audio ››› Booklet Radio or ››› Booklet Naviga-
tion system
Telephone ››› Booklet Radio or ››› Book-
let Navigation system
Vehicle ››› table on page 27
WARNING
Any distraction may lead to an accident, with
the risk of
injury.
●
Do not operate the instrument panel con-
trols when driving.
Operating the instrument panel me-
nus
Fig. 36 Windscreen wiper lever: control but-
t
on
s.
Fig. 37 Right side of multifunction steering
wheel: contro
l buttons.
The driver information system is controlled
w
ith the mu
ltif
unction steering wheel buttons
››› Fig. 37 or with the windscreen wiper lever
››› Fig. 36 (if the vehicle is not equipped with
multifunction steering wheel).
Enabling the main menu
●
Switch the ignition on.
●
If a message or vehicle pictogram appears,
press button ››› Fig. 36
1
on the windscreen
w
iper l
ev
er or button
on the multifunction
s
t
eerin
g wheel ››› Fig. 37.
●
If managed from the windscreen wiper lev-
er: to display the main screen ››› page 27 or
to return to the main menu from another
menu hold down the rocker button ››› Fig. 36
2
.
●
If managed from the multifunction steering
wheel:
the main menu list is not displayed.
To go from point to point in the main menu,
26
The essentials
press button
or
several times
›
›
›
Fig. 37.
Select a submenu
●
Press the rocker switch ››› Fig. 36
2
on the
w
ind
s
creen wiper lever up or down or turn
the thumbwheel of the multifunction steering
wheel ››› Fig. 37 until the desired option ap-
pears marked on the menu.
●
The selected option is displayed between
two horizontal lines. In addition, a triangle is
displayed on the right:
●
To consult the submenu option, press but-
ton ››› Fig. 36
1
on the windscreen wiper
l
ev
er or b
utton
on the multifunction steer-
in
g wheel
›
›› Fig. 37.
Making changes according to the menu
●
Make the desired changes with the rocker
switch on the windscreen wiper lever or the
thumbwheel of the multifunction steering
wheel. To increase or decrease the values
more quickly, turn the thumbwheel faster.
●
Mark or confirm the selection with button
››› Fig. 36
1
on the windscreen wiper lever
or b
utt
on
on the multifunction steering
wheel
›
›
› Fig. 37.
Menu
Menu Function
Driving
data
Information and possible configura-
tions of the multifunction display (MFD)
››› page 29, ››› page 99.
Assist
systems
Information and possible configura-
tions of the driver assistance systems
››› page 99.
Navigation
Information instructions from the acti-
vated navigation system: when a route
guidance is activated, the turning ar-
rows and proximity bars are displayed.
The appearance is similar to the Easy
Connect system.
If route guidance is not activated, the
direction of travel (compass) and the
name of the street along which you are
driving are shown ››› Booklet Naviga-
tion system.
Audio
Station display on the radio.
Track name on the CD.
Track name in Media mode ››› Book-
let Radio or ››› Booklet Navigation sys-
tem.
Telephone
Information and possible configura-
tions of the mobile phone preinstalla-
tion ››› Booklet Radio or ››› Booklet Nav-
igation system.
Lap timer*
In a racing circuit, measurement and
memorisation of lap times by the vehi-
cle and comparison with previously
measured best times ››› page 31.
Menu Function
Vehicle
status
Display of the current warning or infor-
mation texts and other system compo-
nents, depending on the equipment
››› page 99.
Outside temperature display
When the outside temperature is below +4°C
(+39°F), the “ice cr
ystal” symbol (warning of
risk of freezing) is also displayed. At first, this
symbol flashes and then it remains lit until
the outside temperature rises above +6°C
(+43°F)
›››
in Indications on the display on
p
ag
e 96
.
When the vehicle is at a standstill or when
travelling at very low speeds, the tempera-
ture displayed may be higher than the true
outside temperature as a result of the heat
produced by the engine.
The temperatures measured range from
-40°C to +50°C (-40°F to +122°F).
27
The essentials
Gear-change indicator
Fig. 38 Instrument panel: gear-change indica-
t
or (m
anual
gearbox).
A gear change will be recommended if the
g
e
ar
you are in is not the most economical
choice. If no gear-change is recommended, it
means that you are already in the most eco-
nomical gear.
Vehicles with a manual gearbox
The following display symbols ››› Fig. 38
mean:
●
Change to a higher gear: the suggested
g
ear appears to the right of the current gear
when a higher gear is recommended.
●
Change to a lower gear: the suggested
gear appears to the left of the current gear
when a lower gear is recommended.
The gear recommendation may occasionally
skip a gear (2nd 4th).
Vehicles with an automatic gearbox*
The disp
lay is only visible in tiptronic mode
›››
page 161.
The following display symbols mean:
●
Shifting up a gear
●
Shifting down a gear
CAUTION
The gear-change indicator is intended to help
save f
uel, but it is not intended to recom-
mend the right gear for all driving situations.
In certain situations, only the driver can
choose the correct gear (for instance when
overtaking, driving up a steep gradient or
towing a trailer).
Note
The display disappears from the instrument
panel when
you press the clutch pedal.
Bonnet, rear lid and doors open
Fig. 39 A: bonnet open; B: rear lid open; C:
fr
ont
l
eft door open; D: rear right door open
(5-door vehicles only).
When the ignition is switched on or when
driv
in
g, the bonnet, r
ear lid or doors that are
open will be indicated on the instrument pan-
el display, and, as applicable, this will be in-
dicated audibly. The display may vary accord-
ing to the type of instrument panel fitted.
28
The essentials
Illustra-
tion
Key to ››› Fig. 39
A
Do not continue driving!
The bonnet is open or is not properly
closed ››› page 198.
B
Do not continue driving!
The rear lid is open or is not properly
closed ››› page 9.
C, D
Do not continue driving!
A vehicle door is open or is not properly
closed ››› page 106.
Warning and information messages
The system runs a check on certain compo-
nents
and f
u
nctions when the ignition is
switched on and while the vehicle is moving.
Faults in the operation are displayed on the
screen using red and yellow symbols and
messages on the instrument panel display
(›››
page 98, ››› page 35) and, in
some cases, with audible warnings. The dis-
play may vary according to the type of instru-
ment panel fitted.
Priority 1 warning (red symbols)
Symbol flashing or lit; partly combined with audible
warnings.
Stop the vehicle! It is dangerous ››› in Warning
symbols on page 99!
Check the function that is faulty and repair it. If necessa-
ry, request assistance from specialised personnel.
Priority 2 warning (yellow symbols)
Symbol flashing or lit; partly combined with audible
warnings.
A faulty function, or fluids which are below the correct
levels may cause damage to the vehicle! ›››
in Warn-
ing symbols on page 99
Check the faulty function as soon as possible. If neces-
sary, request assistance from specialised personnel.
Informative text
Information relating to different vehicle processes.
Assist systems submenu
Assist
systems
menu
Function
Fatigue de-
tection*
Switching the fatigue detection on
or off (pause recommendation)
››› page 171.
Journey data
M
emor
y
The MFD (multifunction display) shows differ-
ent
v
alues for the journey and the consump-
tion.
Changing between display modes on the
MFD
●
In vehicles without multifunction steering
wheel: Press the rocker switch
on the
w
ind
s
creen wiper lever ››› Fig. 36.
●
Vehicles with a multifunction steering
wheel: turn the thumbwheel ››› Fig. 37.
Multifunction display memory
The multifunction display is equipped with
three memories that work automatically: MFD
from departure, MFD from refuelling and MFD
total calculation. On the screen display, you
can read which memory is currently dis-
played.
Toggle between memories with the ignition
on and the memory displayed
Press the
button on the windscreen
w
iper l
ev
er or the
button of the multifunc-
tion s
t
eerin
g wheel.
»
29
The essentials
Menu Function
MFD from de-
parture
Display and storage of the values for
the journey and the consumption
from when the ignition is switched
on to when it is switched off.
If the journey is continued in less
than 2 hours after the ignition is
switched off, the new data is added
to the data already stored in the
memory. The memory will automati-
cally be deleted if the journey is in-
terrupted for more than 2 hours.
MFD from re-
fuelling
Display and storage of the values for
the journey and the consumption.
By refuelling, the memory will be
erased automatically.
MFD total
calculation
The memory records the values for a
specific number of partial trips, up
to a total of 19 hours and 59 mi-
nutes or 99 hours and 59 minutes,
or 1999.9 km or 9999 km, depend-
ing on the model of instrument pan-
el. On reaching either of these lim-
its
a)
, the memory is automatically
erased and starts to count from 0
again.
a)
It varies according to the instrument panel version.
Erasing a memory manually
●
Select the memory that you wish to erase.
●
Hold the
button of the multifunction
s
t
eerin
g wheel or the
button of the multi-
f
u
nction wheel
pressed down for about 2 sec-
onds.
Personalising the displays
In the Easy Connect system you can adjust
which of the possible displays of the MFD can
be shown on the instrument panel display
with the button
and the function button
Set
up
›
››
p
age 99.
Dat
a summary
Menu Function
Current fuel
consumption
The current fuel consumption dis-
play operates throughout the
journey, in litres/100 km; and
with the engine running and the
vehicle stopped, in litres/hour.
Average fuel
consumption
After turning on the ignition, aver-
age fuel consumption in li-
tres/100 km will be displayed af-
ter travelling about 100 metres.
Otherwise horizontal lines are
displayed. The value shown is up-
dated approximately every 5 sec-
onds.
ACT
®
*: Depending on the equip-
ment, number of active cylinders.
Operating
range
Approximate distance in km that
can still be travelled with the fuel
remaining in the tank, assuming
the same style of driving is main-
tained. This is calculated using
the current fuel consumption.
Menu Function
Travelling
time
This indicates the hours (h) and
minutes (min) since the ignition
was switched on.
Distance cov-
ered
Distance covered in km (m) after
switching on the ignition.
Average speed
The average speed will be shown
after a distance of about 100 me-
tres has been travelled. Otherwise
horizontal lines are displayed.
The value shown is updated ap-
proximately every 5 seconds.
Digital dis-
play of speed
Current speed displayed in digital
format.
Speed warning
at --- km/h or
Speed warning
at --- mph
If the stored speed is exceeded
(between 30 - 250 km/h, or 19 -
155 mph), an audible warning is
given together with a visual warn-
ing.
Oil tempera-
ture
Updated engine oil temperature
digital display
Coolant tem-
perature gauge
Digital display of the current tem-
perature of the liquid coolant.
Storing a speed with the speed warning
●
Select the display Speed warning at
---
km/h (---
mph)
●
Press the button
on the windscreen
w
iper l
ev
er or the button
on the multifunc-
tion s
t
eerin
g wheel to store the current speed
and activate the warning.
30
The essentials
●
T
o sw
it
ch system on: adjust to the desired
speed within 5 seconds using the rocker
switch
on the windscreen wiper lever or
b
y
t
urning the thumbwheel on the multifunc-
tion steering wheel. Next, press the button
or
again or wait several seconds.
The s
peed i
s
stored and the warning activa-
ted.
●
To switch system off: press the but-
ton
or
. The stored speed is de-
l
et
ed.
En
gine oil temperature display
The engine reaches its operating temperature
when in norm
al
driv
ing conditions, the oil
temperature is between 80°C (178°F) and
120°C (248°F). If the engine is required to
work hard and the outside temperature is
high, the engine oil temperature can in-
crease. This does not present any problem as
long as the warning lamps
›››
table on
page 36 or
›››
table on page 36 do not
appear on the display.
Vehicles without multifunction steering
wheel
●
Press the rocker switch
›››
Fig. 36
2
until
the m
ain menu ap
pe
ars. Enter into Driving
data. With the button
2
move to the oil
t
emper
at
ure gauge.
Vehicles with multifunction steering wheel
●
Enter the submenu Driving data and
turn the thumbwheel until the oil tempera-
ture display appears.
Additional electrical appliances
●
Operation with the windscreen wiper lever*:
Pres
s the rocker switch ››› Fig. 36
2
until the
main menu appe
ars. Enter into the section
Driving data. With the rocker switch,
move to the display Convenience con-
sumers.
●
Operation with the multi-function steering
wheel*:
Move with the buttons
1
or
2
to
Driving data and ent
er w
ith
OK. Turn the
thumbwheel to the right until the Conven-
ience consumers display appears.
In addition, a scale will inform you of the cur-
rent sum of all the additional appliances.
Saving tips
Tips on how to save fuel will be displayed in
c
ondition
s
that increase fuel consumption.
Follow them to reduce consumption. The indi-
cations appear automatically only with the ef-
ficiency programme. After a time, the tips will
disappear automatically.
If you wish to hide a saving tip immediately
after it appears, press any button on the
windscreen wiper lever*/multifunction steer-
ing wheel*.
Note
●
If y
ou hide a saving tip, it will reappear af-
ter you switch the ignition on again.
●
The saving tips do not appear in all situa-
tions, but rather with a large separation of
time.
Timer*
You can access the timer via the selection
menu
›
›
›
page 27.
It allows you to manually time lap times on a
racing circuit, memorise them and compare
them to the vehicle's previous best times.
The following menus can be displayed:
●
Stop
●
Lap
●
Pause
●
Partial time
●
Statistics
»
31
The essentials
Change from one menu to another
●
Vehicles without multifunction steering
whe
e
l:
press the rocker switch
in the
w
ind
s
creen wiper lever.
●
Vehicles with multifunction steering wheel:
press
or
.
Menu “Stop”
Start
The timer starts.
If there are existing laps and they are
included in the statistics, it will begin
with the number of laps in question.
It is only possible to begin with a new
first lap if the statistics have been re-
set first in the Statistics menu.
Since
start
The timer begins when the vehicle sets
off.
If the vehicle is already moving, the
timer begins once the vehicle has
stopped.
Statistics
The Statistics menu is displayed
on the screen.
Menu “Lap”
New lap
The timer of the current lap stops and a
new lap starts immediately. The time
for the lap you have just completed is
included in the statistics.
Partial
time
For about 5 seconds a partial time is
displayed. The timer continues in par-
allel.
Menu “Lap”
Stop
The current lap timer will be interrup-
ted. The lap does not end. The Pause
menu is displayed.
Menu “Pause”
Continue The interrupted timer continues.
New lap
A new timer starts. The halted lap ends
and is included in the statistics.
Interr.
lap
The timer of the current lap ends and is
cancelled. It is not included in the sta-
tistics.
End
The current timer ends. The lap is in-
cluded in the statistics.
Menu “Partial time”
Partial
time
For about 5 seconds a partial time is
displayed. The timer continues in par-
allel.
New lap
The timer of the current lap stops and a
new lap starts immediately. The time
for the lap you have just completed is
included in the statistics.
Stop
The current lap timer will be interrup-
ted. The lap does not end. The Pause
menu is displayed.
Menu “Long-term Statistics”
View of the latest lap times:
– total time
– best lap time
– worst lap time
– average lap duration
A maximum of 10 laps is possible, and
a total duration of 99 hours, 59 mi-
nutes and 59 seconds.
If one of the 2 limits is reached, you
will have to reset the statistics in order
to begin a new timer.
Back This returns to the previous menu.
Resetting
to zero
All the memorised statistical data are
reset.
WARNING
Do your best to avoid handling the timer
while driv
ing.
●
Only set the timer or consult statistics
when the vehicle is stationary.
●
While driving, do not handle the timer in
complicated driving situations.
Speed warning device
The speed warning device warns the driver
when they
h
av
e exceeded the pre-set speed
limit by 3 km/h (2 mph). An audible warning
signal sounds, and the warning lamp
and
the driver message
Speed limit excee-
ded!
will be displayed simultaneously on the
32
The essentials
instrument panel. The warning lamp
sw
it
c
hes off when reducing speed below the
stored maximum limit.
Speed warning programming is recommen-
ded if you wish to be reminded of a maxi-
mum speed, such as when travelling in a
country with different speed limits or for a
maximum speed for winter tyres.
Setting speed limit warning
You can use the radio or the Easy Connect* to
set, alter or cancel the speed limit warning.
●
Vehicles with radio: press the button
SETUP
> control button Driver Assistant >
Speed warning.
●
Vehicles with Easy Connect: pr
e
s
s the but-
ton Systems or else Vehicle systems >
Driver assistant > Speed warning.
The warning limit can be set from 30 to
240 km/h (20 to 149 mph). The adjustment
is made at 10 km/h (5 mph) intervals.
Note
●
Plea
se bear in mind that, even with the
speed warning function, it is still important
to keep an eye on the vehicle speed with the
speedometer and to observe the legal speed
limits.
●
The speed limit warning function in the ver-
sion for some countries warns you at a speed
of 120 km/h (75 mph). This is a factory-set
speed limit.
Service intervals
The service interval indication appears on the
instrument
panel display ›››
Fig. 113
3
.
SEAT di
stinguishes between services with en-
gine oil change (e.g. Oil change service) and
services without engine oil change (e.g. In-
spection).
In vehicles with Services established by time
or mileage, the service intervals are already
pre-defined.
In vehicles with LongLife Service, the inter-
vals are determined individually. Thanks to
technological progress, maintenance work
has been greatly reduced. Because of the
technology used by SEAT, with this service
you only need to change the oil when the ve-
hicle so requires. To calculate this change
(max. 2 years), the vehicle's conditions of
use and individual driving styles are consid-
ered. The advance warning first appears 20
days before the date established for the cor-
responding service. The kilometres (miles)
remaining until the next service are always
rounded up to the nearest 100 km (miles)
and the time is given in complete days. The
current service message cannot be viewed
until 500 km after the last service. Prior to
this, only
lines are visible on the display.
Inspection reminder
When the Service date is approaching, when
the ignition is switched on a Service remind-
er is displayed.
Vehicles without text messages: a span-
ner will be displayed on the instrument
panel plus an indication in km.
The kilometres indicated are the maximum
number of kilometres that can be travelled
until the next service. After a few seconds,
the display mode changes. A clock symbol
appears and the number of days until the
next service is due.
Vehicles with text messages: Service in
--- km or --- days will be shown on the
instrument panel display.
Service due
When the service date is due, an audible
warning is given when the ignition is switch-
ed on and the spanner displayed on the
screen flashes for a few seconds .
Vehicles with text messages: Service now
will be shown on the instrument panel dis-
play.
»
33
The essentials
Reading a service notification
W
ith the ignition sw
it
ched on, the engine off
and the vehicle at a standstill, the current
service notification can be read:
Press and hold the button
4
for more than 5
sec
ond
s
to consult the service message.
When the service date has passed, a minus
sign is displayed in front of the number of kil-
ometres or days.
Vehicles with text messages: the following
message is displayed: Service --- km
(miles) or --- days ago.
The time can also be set via the
key and
Set
up
function button in the Easy Connect
sy
s
t
em ›››
page 99.
Resetting service interval display
If the service was not carried out by a SEAT
dealership, the display can be reset as fol-
lows:
●
Switch off the ignition, press and hold but-
ton ›››
Fig. 113
4
.
●
Switch ignition back on.
●
Release the
4
›
›
›
Fig. 113
button and
press it again for the next 20 seconds.
Note
●
The servic
e message disappears after a few
seconds, when the engine is started or when
OK/RESET
is pressed on the windscreen wiper
lever
, or
OK
on the multifunction steering
wheel.
●
In v
ehicles with the LongLife system in
which the battery has been disconnected for
a long period of time, it is not possible to cal-
culate the date of the next service. Therefore
the service interval display may not be cor-
rect. In this case, bear in mind the maximum
service intervals permitted in the ››› Book-
let Maintenance Programme.
Cruise control
Oper
atin
g the c
ruise control system
(CCS)*
Fig. 40 Turn signal and main beam headlight
l
ev
er: sw
itches and controls for operating the
CCS
●
Sw
it
c
hing on the CCS: Move switch
››› Fig. 40
1
to .
The system is on. If no
s
peed h
as been programmed, the system will
not control it.
●
Activating the CCS: Press button ››› Fig. 40
2
in the ar
e
a.
The current speed is
memorised and controlled.
●
Temporarily switching off the CCS: Move
switch ››› Fig. 40
1
to
or push the
br
ak
e. The cruise control system is switched
off temporarily.
●
Reactivating the CCS: Press button
››› Fig. 40
2
in
. The memorised speed
i
s saved and controlled again.
●
Increasing stored speed during CCS regula-
tion: press button
2
in
. The vehicle ac-
c
elerates until the new stored speed.
●
Reducing stored speed during CCS regula-
tion: press button
2
in t
o lower the
s
peed b
y 1 km/h (1 mph). Speed is reduced
until reaching the new stored speed.
●
Switching off the CCS: Move switch
››› Fig. 40
1
to .
The system is disconnec-
t
ed and the memori
sed speed is deleted.
››› in Operation on page 181
››› page 180
34
The essentials
Warning lamps
On the in
s
trument
panel
Fig. 41 Instrument panel, on dash panel
Red warning lamps
Central warning lamp: additional
information on the instrument pan-
el display
–
Parking brake on.
››› page
149
››› page
150
Do not continue driving!
The brake fluid level is too low or
there is a fault in the brake system.
Lit up or flashing:
Do not continue driving!
Fault in the steering.
››› page
145
Driver or passenger has not fas-
tened seat belt.
››› page
62
Use the foot brake!
Yellow warning lamps
Central warning lamp: additional
information on the instrument pan-
el display
–
»
35
The essentials
Front brake pads worn.
››› page
152
it lights up: Fault in the ESC, or dis-
connection caused by the system.
flashes: ESC or ASR activated.
ASR manually deactivated.
Or else: ESC in Sport mode.
ABS faulty or does not work.
Front fog lights switched on.
››› page
21
Rear fog light switched on.
››› page
21
lights up or flashes: fault in the
emission control system.
››› page
168
it lights up: pre-heating of diesel
engine.
››› page
168
flashes: fault in the diesel engine
management.
fault in the petrol engine manage-
ment.
››› page
168
lights up or flashes: fault in the
steering system.
››› page
145
Tyre pressure too low, or fault in
the tyre pressure monitoring sys-
tem.
››› page
213
Fuel tank almost empty.
››› page
98
Fault in airbag system and seat
belt tensioners.
››› page
66
Other warning lamps
Left or right turn signal.
››› page
22
Hazard warning lights on.
››› page
121
Trailer turn signals
››› page
183
it lights up: Press the foot brake!
flashes: the selector lever locking
button has not engaged.
››› page
158
it lights up: cruise control activated
or speed limiter switched on and
active.
››› page
34
flashes: the speed set by the
speed limiter has been exceeded.
Main beam on or flasher on.
››› page
22
On the instrument panel display
Fig. 42 On the instrument panel display: door
open.
Do not continue driving!
With the corresponding indica-
tion: door(s), rear lid or bonnet
open or not properly closed.
››› page
106
››› page 9
››› page
198
Ignition:
Do not carry on driv-
ing! Engine coolant level too low,
coolant temperature too high
››› page
204
Flashing: Fault in the engine
coolant system.
Do not continue driving!
Engine oil pressure too low.
››› page
201
36
The essentials
Fault in the battery.
››› page
207
Driving light totally or partially
faulty.
››› page
83
Fault in the cornering light sys-
tem.
››› page
117
Diesel particulate filter blocked
››› page
167
Level of windscreen washer fluid
too low.
››› page
207
Flashing: Fault in the oil level de-
tection. Control manually.
››› page
201
Ignition: Insufficient engine oil.
Fault in the gearbox.
››› page
163
Immobiliser active.
››› page
147
Service interval display
››› page
33
Mobile telephone is connected
via Bluetooth to the original tele-
phone device.
››› Book-
let Radio
or
››› Book-
let Navi-
gation
system
Mobile telephone battery charge
meter. Available only for devices
pre-installed in factory.
Freezing warning. The outside
temperature is lower than +4°C
(+39°F).
››› page
27
Start-Stop system activated.
››› page
170
Start-Stop system unavailable.
Low consumption driving status
››› page
27
On the instrument panel
Fig. 43 Warning lamp for disabling the front
p
a
s
senger airbag.
Front passenger front airbag is
disabled (
).
››› page
66
››› in Warning symbols on page 99
››› page 98
Gearbox lever
M
anua
l
gearbox
Fig. 44 Gear shift pattern of a 5 or 6-speed
m
anual
g
earbox
The position of the gears is indicated on the
g
e
arbo
x lever ››› Fig. 44.
●
Press the clutch pedal and keep your foot
right down.
●
Move the gearbox lever to the required po-
sition.
●
Release the clutch.
Selecting reverse gear
●
Press the clutch pedal and keep your foot
right down.
●
With the gearbox lever in neutral, push it
upwards, move it to the left as far as it will go
and then forwards to select reverse ››› Fig. 44
R
.
»
37
The essentials
●
R
el
e
ase the clutch.
››› in Driving with manual gearbox on
page 158
››› page 158
Automatic gearbox*
Fig. 45 Automatic gearbox: selector lever po-
s
ition
s.
Parking lock
R
ev
er
se gear
P
R
Neutral (idling)
Drive (forward)
Sport programme: drive (forward)
Tiptronic mode: pull the lever forwards
(+) to go up a gear or backwards (–) to
go down a gear.
››› page 158
››› page 38
Manual release of selector lever
Fig. 46 Manual release of the selector lever.
N
D
S
+/–
If there is a fault in the power system to the
el
ectr
onic
selector lever lock system (flat bat-
tery, blown fuse) or the system itself is faulty,
the selector lever cannot be moved from po-
sition P in the normal manner, which pre-
vents the vehicle from being moved. The se-
lector lever must be unlocked using the man-
ual release.
●
Apply the handbrake.
●
Pull gently on both sides at the front of the
selector lever cover.
●
Also loosen the cover at the rear.
●
Press the yellow plastic part with your fin-
ger in the direction indicated by the arrow
››› Fig. 46.
●
Press the interlock button on the selector
lever knob at the same time and move the se-
lector lever to position N (if the selector lever
is moved back to position P, it will lock
again).
38
The essentials
Air conditioning
Ho
w doe
s
Climatronic* work?
Fig. 47 In the centre console: Climatronic con-
trol
s
Buttons/controls
Int
erior t
emper
ature setting
Display
Selected interior temperature
Degrees Centigrade or Fahrenheit
Automatic air conditioning mode
Defrost or demist windscreen
Air flow direction
Air recirculation
Air conditioning on/off
Selected blower speed
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Buttons/controls
Set
b
lo
wer speed
Interior temperature sensors
Defrost or demist windscreen
Automatic mode
Air distribution to windows
Air distribution to upper body
Air distribution to footwells
Air recirculation
Air conditioning on/off
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
››› in General notes on page 137
››› page 143
39
The essentials
How does the manual air conditioning
w
ork*?
Fig. 48 In the centre console: Manual air con-
ditionin
g c
ontr
ols
Temperature
Blo
w
er
Air di
stribution
– Air distribution towards the wind-
screen in order to demist or defrost.
– Air distribution to upper body.
– Air distribution to footwell
– Air distribution to the windscreen
and the footwell.
Air recirculation
A/C: Switching the cooling system on
A
B
C
D
E
››› in General notes on page 137
››› page 141
How does the heating and the fresh
air sy
s
t
em work?
Fig. 49 In the centre console: heating system
and fr
e
sh air c
ontrols.
Temperature
Blo
w
er
Air di
stribution
– Air distribution towards the wind-
screen in order to demist or defrost.
– Air distribution to upper body.
– Air distribution to footwell
A
B
C
– Air distrib
ution to the windscreen
and the footwell.
Air recirculation
››› in General notes on page 137
››› page 139
Fluid Level control
Fi
l
lin
g capacities
Capacities
Fuel tank 45 litres. 7 litre re-
serve.
Windscreen washer fluid con-
tainer in vehicles without head-
light washer
3 litres
Windscreen washer fluid con-
tainer in vehicles with headlight
washer
4.5 litres
D
40
The essentials
Fuel
Fig. 50 Fuel tank flap with tank cap attached.
The tank flap is released manually and is lo-
c
at
ed at
the rear of the vehicle on the right.
The tank holds approximately 45 litres.
Opening the fuel tank cap
●
Lift the lid.
●
Hold the cap firmly with one hand, then in-
sert the key into the lock and rotate 180° to
the left.
●
Unscrew the cap, turning it anticlockwise.
Closing the fuel tank cap
●
Screw the tank cap to the right until it
“clicks”.
●
Turn the key in the lock, without releasing
the cap, clockwise through 180°.
●
Remove the key and close the flap until it
clicks into place. The tank cap is secured with
an anti-loss attachment.
››› in Refuelling on page 196
››› page 196
Oil
Fig. 51 Engine oil dipstick.
Fig. 52 In the engine compartment: Engine
oil fi
ller cap
The level is measured using the dipstick loca-
t
ed in the en
gine c
ompartment
›››
page 201.
The oil should leave a mark between zones
A
and
C
. It should never exceed zone
A
.
●
Zone
A
: Do not add oil.
●
Zone
B
: You can add oil but keep the level
in th
at
zone.
●
Zone
C
: Add oil up to zone
B
.
T
op
pin
g up engine oil
●
Unscrew cap from oil filler opening.
●
Add oil slowly.
●
At the same time, check the level to ensure
you do not add too much.
●
When the oil level reaches at least zone
B
,
u
n
s
crew the engine oil filler cap carefully.
»
41
The essentials
Oil properties
Engine type Specification
Petrol without flexible serv-
ice interval
VW 502 00/VW 504 00
Petrol with flexible service
interval (LongLife)
VW 504 00
Diesel. Engines without Par-
ticulate filter (DPF)
VW 505 01/VW 506
01/VW 507 00
Diesel. Particulate Filter En-
gines (DPF).
With or without flexible
service interval (with and
without LongLife)
a)
VW 507 00
a)
Only use recommended oils, otherwise you may damage the
engine.
Engine oil additives
No type of additive should be mixed with the
engine oil. The deterioration caused by these
additives is not covered by the warranty.
››› in Changing engine oil on page 204
››› page 201
Coolant
Fig. 53 Engine compartment: coolant expan-
s
ion t
ank
cap.
The coolant tank is located in the engine
c
omp
ar
tment ›››
page 201.
When the engine is cold, replace the coolant
when the level is below .
Coolant specifications
The engine cooling system is supplied from
the factory with a specially treated mixture of
water and at least 40 % of the additive G13
(TL-VW 774 J), purple. This mixture gives the
necessary frost protection down to -25°C
(-13°F) and protects the light alloy parts of
the engine cooling system against corrosion.
It also prevents scaling and considerably rai-
ses the boiling point of the coolant.
To protect the cooling system, the percentage
of additive must always be at least 40 %,
even in warm climates where anti-freeze pro-
tection is not required.
If for weather reasons further protection is
necessary, the proportion of additive may be
increased, but only up to 60 %; otherwise an-
tifreeze protection will diminish and this will
worsen cooling.
When the coolant is topped up, use a mixture
of distilled water and at least 40 % of the
G13 or G12 plus-plus (TL-VW 774 G) additive
(both are purple) to obtain an optimum anti-
corrosion protection ›››
in Topping up cool-
ant on p
ag
e 206
. The mixture of G13 with
G12 plus (TL-VW 774 F), G12 (red) or G11
(green-blue) engine coolants will significant-
ly reduce anti-corrosion protection and
should therefore be avoided ›››
in Topping
up c
oo
l
ant on page 206.
››› in Topping up coolant on page 205
››› page 204
42
The essentials
Brake fluid
Fig. 54 Engine compartment: brake fluid res-
er
v
oir c
ap
The brake fluid reservoir is located in the en-
gine c
omp
ar
tment ›››
page 201.
The level should be between the and
marks. If it is below , please visit a Techni-
cal Service.
››› in Changing the brake fluid on
page 207
››› page 206
Windscreen washer
Fig. 55 In the engine compartment: wind-
s
c
r
een washer reservoir top.
The windscreen washer reservoir is located in
the en
gine c
omp
artment ›››
page 201.
To top up, mix water with a product recom-
mended by SEAT.
In cold temperatures, add anti-freeze for win-
dows.
››› in Topping up the windscreen wash-
er reservoir water on page 207
››› page 207
Battery
The battery is located in the engine compart-
ment
›
›
›
page 201. It does not require
maintenance. It is checked as part of the In-
spection Service.
››› in Symbols and warnings on han-
dling the battery on page 208
››› page 207
43
The essentials
Emergencies
F
u
se
s
Fuse location
Fig. 56 On the driver-side dash panel: fuse
bo
x
c
over
Fig. 57 In the engine compartment: fuse box
c
o
v
er
Opening and closing the fuse box situated
belo
w the d
a
sh panel
●
Opening: remove the fuse box cover
››› Fig. 56.
●
Closing: click the cover back into place.
To open the engine compartment fuse box
●
Raise the bonnet.
●
Press the locking tabs to release the fuse
box cover ››› Fig. 57
●
Then lift the cover out.
●
To fit the cover, place it on the fuse box.
Push the locking tabs down until they click
audibly into place.
Identifying fuses situated below the dash
panel by colours
Colour Amp rating
Black 1
Purple 3
Light brown 5
Brown 7.5
Red 10
Blue 15
Yellow 20
White or transparent 25
Colour Amp rating
Green 30
Orange 40
››› in Introduction on page 80
››› page 80
Replacing a blown fuse
Fig. 58 Image of a blown fuse
Preparation
●
Switch off the ignition, lights and all elec-
tric
al
equipment
.
●
Open the corresponding fuse box
›››
page 81.
44
The essentials
Identifying a blown fuse
A f
u
se i
s blown if its metal strip is ruptured
››› Fig. 58.
●
Point a lamp at the fuse to see if it has
blown.
To replace a fuse
●
Remove the fuse.
●
Replace the blown fuse by one with an
identical amperage rating (same colour and
markings) and identical size.
●
Replace the cover again or close the fuse
box lid.
Bulbs
Bulbs (12 V)
Light source used for each function
Double headlights Type
Dipped beam headlights H7 Long Life
Main beam headlights H7
Side lights W5W Long Life
Turn signal PY 21W
Double headlights Type
DRL (day light) LED
a)
a)
In case of a LED failure, go to an authorised workshop to have
it replaced.
Single headlight Type
Dipped/main beam headlights H4 Long Life
Side lights W5W Long Life
Turn signal PY 21W
DRL (day light) P21W SLL
Xenon/adaptive head-
lights*
Type
Dipped/main beam headlights D1S
a)
Side lights LED
b)
Turn signal PY 21W
DRL (day light) LED
b)
a)
This light should be changed by an Authorised Service.
b)
In case of a LED failure, go to an authorised workshop to have
it replaced.
››› page 83
Action in the event of a punc-
t
ur
e
Wh
at to do first
●
Park the vehicle on a horizontal surface
and in a safe p
lace as far away from traffic as
possible.
●
Apply the handbrake.
●
Switch on the hazard warning lights.
●
Manual gearbox: select the 1st gear.
●
Automatic gearbox: Move the sel
ector lever
to position P.
●
If you are towing a trailer, unhitch it from
your vehicle.
●
Have the vehicle tool kit*
›››
page 47 and
the spare wheel
›››
page 75 ready.
●
Observe the applicable legislation for each
country (reflective vest, warning triangles,
etc.).
●
All occupants should leave the vehicle and
wait in a safe place (for instance behind the
roadside crash barrier).
WARNING
●
Alwa
ys observe the above steps and pro-
tect yourself and other road users.
●
If you change the wheel on a slope, block
the wheel on the opposite side of the car with
a stone or similar to prevent the vehicle from
moving.
45
The essentials
Repairing a tyre with the anti-punc-
t
ur
e k
it
Fig. 59 Standard representation: contents of
the anti-p
u
nct
ure kit.
The anti-puncture kit is located under the
floor p
anel
in the lug
gage compartment.
Sealing the tyre
●
Unscrew the tyre valve cap and insert. Use
the ››› Fig. 59
1
tool to remove the insert.
Pl
ac
e it
on a clean surface.
●
Shake the tyre sealant bottle vigorously
››› Fig. 59
10
.
●
Screw the inflator tube ›
›
›
Fig. 59
3
into
the se
al
ant
bottle. The bottle's seal will break
automatically.
●
Remove the lid from the filling tube
››› Fig. 59
3
and screw the open end of the
t
ube int
o the ty
re valve.
●
With the tyre sealant bottle upside down,
fill the tyre with the contents of the sealant
bottle.
●
Remove the bottle from the valve.
●
Place the insert back into the tyre valve us-
ing the tool ››› Fig. 59
1
.
Infl
atin
g the ty
re
●
Screw the compressor tyre inflator tube
››› Fig. 59
5
into the tyre valve.
●
Check that the air bleed screw is closed
›
›
›
Fig. 59
7
.
●
Start the engine and leave it running.
●
Insert the connector ›
›
›
Fig. 59
9
into the
v
ehic
l
e's 12-volt socket ›››
page 133.
●
Turn the air compressor on with the ON/OFF
switch ››› Fig. 59
8
.
●
Keep the air compressor running until it
r
e
ac
hes 2.0 to 2.5 bar
(29-36 psi/200-250 kPa). A maximum of 8
minutes.
●
Disconnect the air compressor.
●
If it does not reach the pressure indicated,
unscrew the tyre inflator tube from the valve.
●
Move the vehicle 10m so that the sealant is
distrib
uted throughout the tyre.
●
Screw the c
ompressor tyre inflator into the
valve.
●
Repeat the inflation process.
●
If the indicated pressure still cannot be
reached, the tyre is too badly damaged. Stop
and request assistance from an authorised
technician.
●
Disconnect the air compressor. Unscrew
the tyre inflator tube from the tyre valve.
●
When the tyre pressure is between 2.5 and
2.0 bars, continue driving without exceeding
80 km/h (50 mph).
●
Check the pressure again after 10 minutes
›››
page 78.
››› in TMS (Tyre Mobility System)* on
page 76
››› page 76
46
The essentials
Changing a wheel
V
ehic
l
e tool kit
Fig. 60 Underneath the floor panel of the lug-
g
ag
e c
ompartment: vehicle tool kit.
An adapter for the anti-theft wheel bolts*
T
o
wline anc
horage
Box spanner for wheel bolts*
Jack*
Wire hook for pulling off the wheel cov-
ers*/wheel bolt cap clip.
››› in Vehicle tools on page 75
››› page 75
1
2
3
4
5
Wheel covers*
Fig. 61 Remove the wheel cover.
The wheel covers must be removed for access
t
o the wheel
bo
lts.
Removing
●
Remove the wheel cover using the wire
hook ››› Fig. 61.
●
Hook this into one of the cut-outs of the
wheel cover.
Fitting
●
Fit the wheel cover onto the wheel rim by
pressing it firmly.
●
Put pressure on the point of the cut-out for
the valve.
●
Next fit the rest of the wheel cover
Wheel bolt caps*
Fig. 62 Wheel: wheel bolts with caps.
Removal
●
Fit the plastic clip (vehicle tools) over the
c
ap u
nti
l it clicks into place ››› Fig. 62.
●
Remove the cap with the plastic clip.
47
The essentials
Anti-theft wheel bolts*
Fig. 63 Anti-theft wheel bolt with cap and
a
d
apt
er.
A special adapter (vehicle tools) is required
t
o r
emo
ve the anti-theft wheel bolts.
●
Remove the wheel cover* or the cap*.
●
Insert the special adapter (vehicle tools)
onto the anti-theft wheel bolt and push it on
as far as it will go.
●
Insert the wheel brace (vehicle tools) onto
the adapter as far as it will go.
●
Remove the wheel bolt ››› page 48.
Note
Make a note of the code number of the anti-
theft wheel
bolt and keep it in a safe place,
but not in your vehicle. If you need a new
adapter, you can obtain it from the SEAT Offi-
cial Service, indicating the code number.
Loosening the wheel bolts
Fig. 64 Wheel: loosen the wheel bolts.
●
Insert the box spanner (vehicle tools) onto
the wheel
bo
lt
as far as it will go. An adapter
is required to unscrew or tighten the anti-
theft wheel bolts ››› page 48.
●
Turn the wheel bolt approximately one turn
to the left ››› Fig. 64 (arrow). To apply the re-
quired torque, hold the wheel brace at the
end. If it is not possible to loosen a wheel
bolt, carefully apply pressure with one foot
on the end of the box spanner. Hold on to the
vehicle for support and take care not to slip.
WARNING
Slightly loosen the wheel bolts (one turn) be-
fore r
aising the vehicle with the jack*. If not,
an accident may occur.
Raising the vehicle
Fig. 65 Jack position points
Fig. 66 Fitting the jack.
●
Place the jack* (vehicle tools) on firm
gr
ou
nd. If
necessary use a large, strong
board or similar support. If the surface is slip-
pery (for example tiles) place the jack on a
rubber mat or similar to prevent it from slip-
ping ›››
.
48
The essentials
●
Find the s
up
por
t point on the strut (sunken
area) closest to the wheel to be changed
››› Fig. 65.
●
Place the jack under the jacking point and
turn the crank until the arm of the jack is di-
rectly below the vertical rib under the door
sill.
●
Align the jack so that the arm of the jack
fits around the rib under the door sill and the
movable base plate of the jack is flat on the
ground ››› Fig. 66.
●
Continue turning the jack* until the wheel
is slightly lifted off the ground.
WARNING
●
Make s
ure that the jack* remains stable. If
the surface is slippery or soft, the jack* could
slip or sink, respectively, with the resultant
risk of injury.
●
Only raise the vehicle with the jack* sup-
plied by the manufacturer. Other vehicles
could slip, with the consequent risk of injury.
●
Only mount the jack* on the support points
designed for this purpose on the strut, and
always align the jack correctly. If you do not,
the jack* could slip as it does not have an ad-
equate grip on the vehicle: risk of injury!
●
The height of the parked vehicle can
change as a result of variations in tempera-
ture and loading.
CAUTION
The vehicle must not be raised on the cross-
bar. On
ly place the jack* on the points de-
signed for this purpose on the strut. Other-
wise, the vehicle may be damaged.
Removing and fitting the wheel
Change the wheel after loosening the wheel
bolts and r
aising the vehicle with the jack.
Taking off the wheel
●
Unscrew the wheel bolts using the box
spanner and p
lace them on a clean surface.
●
Take off the wheel
›››
.
P
uttin
g on the s
pare wheel
When fitting tyres with a compulsory rotation
direction, observe the instructions in
›››
page 49.
●
Mount the wheel.
●
Screw on the wheel bolts in position and
tighten them loosely with a box spanner.
●
Carefully lower the vehicle using the jack*.
●
Tighten the wheel bolts in diagonal pairs
using the wheel brace.
The wheel bolts should be clean and turn
easily. Before fitting the spare wheel, inspect
the wheel condition and hub mounting surfa-
ces. These surfaces must be clean before fit-
ting the wheel.
CAUTION
When removing/fitting the wheel, the rim
may
hit and damage the brake disc. For this
reason, please take care and get a second
person to assist you.
Tyres with compulsory rotation direc-
tion
A directional tread pattern can be identified
b
y
the arr
ows on the sidewall that point in
the direction of rotation. Always observe the
direction of rotation indicated when fitting
the wheel to guarantee optimum properties
of this type of tyres with regard to grip,
noises, wear and aquaplaning.
If it is absolutely necessary to fit the spare
tyre* against the direction of rotation, drive
with care as this means the tyre does not of-
fer optimum driving properties. This is of par-
ticular importance when the road surface is
wet.
To return to directional tread tires, replace
the punctured tyre as soon as possible and
restore the obligatory direction of rotation of
all tyres.
49
The essentials
Subsequent work
●
Alloy wheels: repl
ace the wheel bolt caps.
●
Plate wheels: replace the wheel hubcap.
●
Return all tools to their proper storing loca-
tion.
●
If the replaced wheel does not fit in the
spare wheel housing, store it safely in the
luggage compartment ›››
page 133.
●
Check the tyre pressure of the newly moun-
ted tyre as soon as possible.
●
In vehicles fitted with a tyre pressure indi-
cator
, adjust the pressure and store it in
memory
›››
page 213.
●
Have the tightening torque of the wheel
bolts checked as soon as possible with a tor-
que wrench (it should be 120 Nm). Mean-
while, drive carefully.
●
Have the flat tyre replaced as quickly as
possible.
Snow chains
Use
Snow chains should only be used on the
fr
on
t
wheels.
●
Check that they are correctly seated after
driving for a few yards; correct the position if
necessary, in accordance with the manufac-
turer's fitting instructions.
●
Keep your speed below 50 km/h (30 mph).
●
If there is a danger of being trapped de-
spite having mounted the chains, it is best to
disable the driving wheels (ASR) in the ESC
›››
page 152.
Snow chains will improve braking ability as
well as traction in winter conditions.
For technical reasons snow chains may only
be used with the following wheel rim/tyre
combination.
175/70R14
185/60R15
Chains with links not exceeding 15 mm
(including the chain closure)
215/45R16 Chains with links not exceeding 9 mm
(including the chain closure)
215/40R17 Chains with links not exceeding 7 mm
(including the chain closure)
Remove wheel covers and any integral trim
rin
g bef
or
e fitting snow chains.
Remove the chains when roads are free of
snow. Driving characteristics worsen, and the
wheels become damaged quickly and may
even be rendered unusable.
WARNING
Snow chains should be correctly tightened in
accor
dance with the manufacturer's instruc-
tions. This will prevent the chains coming in-
to cont
act with the wheel housing.
50
The essentials
Emergency towing of the vehi-
c
l
e
T
owing
Fig. 67 Right side of the front bumper: Tow-
in
g rin
g.
Fig. 68 Right side of the rear bumper: Towing
rin
g.
Towline anchorages
Att
ac
h the b
ar or rope to the towline ancho-
rages.
The towline anchorages are located under
the floor panel in the luggage compartment,
next to the vehicle tools ››› page 47.
Screw the front towline anchorage into the
screw connection ››› Fig. 67 and tighten it
with the wheel brace. The rear towline an-
chorage is under the rear bumper, on the
right.
Tow rope or tow bar
It is easier and safer for the vehicle to be tow-
ed using a tow bar. You should only use a
tow-rope if you do not have a tow-bar.
A tow rope should be slightly elastic to re-
duce the loading on both vehicles. It is advis-
able to use a tow rope made of synthetic fi-
bre or similarly elastic material.
Attach the tow rope or the tow bar only to the
towline anchorages provided or a towing
bracket.
Notes for the driver of the towing vehicle
●
The tow rope must be taut before you drive
off.
●
Release the clutch very carefully when start-
ing the vehicle (manual gearbox), or acceler-
ate gently (automatic gearbox).
Driving style
Towing requires some experience, especially
when using a tow rope. Both drivers should
realise how difficult it is to tow a vehicle. In-
experienced drivers should not attempt to
tow.
Do not pull too hard with the towing vehicle
and take care to avoid jerking the tow rope.
When towing on an unpaved road, there is al-
ways a risk of overloading and damaging the
anchorage points.
The ignition of the vehicle being towed must
be switched on to prevent the steering wheel
from locking and also to allow the use of the
turn signals, horn, windscreen wipers and
washers.
Place the gear lever in neutral on vehicles
with a manual gearbox. With an automatic
gearbox, place the lever in N.
The brake servo only works when the engine
is running. When not running, you must ap-
ply considerably more pressure to the brake
pedal.
As the power assisted steering does not work
if the engine is not running, you will need
more strength to steer than you normally
would.
»
51
The essentials
››› in Notes on page 79
››› page 79
Tow-starting
If the engine will not start, first try starting it
usin
g the battery of another vehicle
››› page 52. You should only attempt to tow-
start a vehicle if charging the battery does
not work. This is done by leveraging wheel
movement.
When tow-starting a vehicle with a petrol en-
gine, do not tow it more than a short dis-
tance, otherwise unburned fuel can enter the
catalytic converter.
However, if your vehicle has to be tow-star-
ted:
●
Engage 2
nd
or 3
rd
ge
ar.
●
Keep the clutch pressed down.
●
Switch the ignition on.
●
Once both vehicles are moving, release the
clutch.
●
As soon as the engine starts, press the
clutch and move the gear lever into neutral.
This helps to prevent driving into the towing
vehicle.
››› in Notes on page 79
››› page 79
How to jump start
Jump l
e
a
ds
The jump lead must have a sufficient wire
cro
ss section.
If the engine fails to start because of a dis-
charged battery, the battery can be connec-
ted to the battery of another vehicle to start
the engine.
Jump leads
Jump leads must comply with standard DIN
72553 (see cable manufacturer's instruc-
tions). The wire cross section must be at least
25 mm
2
for petrol engines and at least
35 mm
2
for diesel engines.
Note
●
The vehic
les must not touch each other,
otherwise electricity could flow as soon as
the positive terminals are connected.
●
The discharged battery must be properly
connected to the on-board network.
How to jump start: description
Fig. 69 Diagram of connections for vehicles
w
ithout
Start-Stop system.
Fig. 70 Diagram of connections for vehicles
w
ith
St
art-Stop system.
Jump lead terminal connections
1. Switch off the ignition of both vehicles
›
›
›
.
52
The essentials
2. Connect one end of the r
e
d
jump lead to
the positive
+
terminal of the vehicle
w
ith the fl
at
battery
A
›
›› Fig. 69
.
3.
Connect the other end of the red jump
lead to the positive terminal
+
in the ve-
hic
l
e pr
oviding assistance
B
.
4. For vehicles without Start-Stop system:
c
onnect
one end of
the black jump lead to
the negative terminal
–
of the vehicle
pr
o
v
iding the current
B
›
›› Fig. 69
.
–
F
or vehicles with Start-Stop system: con-
nect one end of the black jump lead
X
to a
s
uit
ab
le ground terminal, to a solid piece of
metal in the engine block, or to the engine
block itself ››› Fig. 70.
5. Connect the other end of the black jump
lead
X
to a solid metal component bolted
t
o the en
gine b
lock or to the engine block
itself of the vehicle with the flat battery.
Do not connect it to a point near the bat-
tery
A
.
6. Position the leads in such a way that they
c
annot
c
ome into contact with any moving
parts in the engine compartment.
Starting
7. Start the engine of the vehicle with the
boosting battery and let it run at idling
speed.
8. Start the engine of the vehicle with the flat
battery and wait for 2 or 3 minutes until
the engine is running.
Removing the jump leads
9. Before you remove the jump leads, switch
off the dipped beam headlights if they are
switched on.
10.Turn on the heater blower and heated rear
window in the vehicle with the flat battery.
This helps minimise voltage peaks which
are generated when the leads are discon-
nected.
11.When the engine is running, disconnect
the leads in reverse order to the details
given above.
Make sure the battery clamps have sufficient
metal-to-metal contact with the battery termi-
nals.
If the engine fails to start, switch off the start-
er after about 10 seconds and try again after
about a minute.
WARNING
●
Plea
se note the safety warnings referring to
working in the engine compartment
›››
page 198, Working in the engine
compartment.
●
The battery providing assistance must have
the same voltage as the flat battery (12 V)
and approximately the same capacity (see
imprint on battery). Failure to comply could
res
ult in an explosion.
●
Never use jump leads when one of the bat-
teries is frozen. Danger of explosion! Even af-
ter the battery has thawed, battery acid could
leak and cause chemical burns. If a battery
freezes, it should be replaced.
●
Keep sparks, flames and lighted cigarettes
away from batteries, danger of explosion.
Failure to comply could result in an explo-
sion.
●
Observe the instructions provided by the
manufacturer of the jump leads.
●
Do not connect the negative cable from the
other vehicle directly to the negative terminal
of the flat battery. The gas emitted from the
battery could be ignited by sparks. Danger of
explosion.
●
Do not attach the negative cable from the
other vehicle to parts of the fuel system or to
the brake line.
●
The non-insulated parts of the battery
clamps must not be allowed to touch. The
jump lead attached to the positive battery
terminal must not touch metal parts of the ve-
hicle, this can cause a short circuit.
●
Position the leads in such a way that they
cannot come into contact with any moving
parts in the engine compartment.
●
Do not lean on the batteries. This could re-
sult in chemical burns.
»
53
The essentials
Note
The vehicles must not touch each other, oth-
erwi
se electricity could flow as soon as the
positive terminals are connected.
Changing the windscreen wiper
bla
des
Changing the wiper blades
Fig. 71 Wipers in service position
Fig. 72 Changing the windscreen wiper
bla
de.
To change the blades it is necessary to move
the w
iper
s
from the rest position into the
service position.
Do not change the windscreen wipers when
out of the service position, as it could cause
paint to flake off the bonnet due to friction
with the windscreen wiper arm.
Service position (for changing wiper blades)
●
Ensure that the wiper blades are not frozen.
●
Turn the ignition on and off and then (with-
in approximately 9 seconds) push the wind-
screen wiper lever down (short wipe). The
windscreen wipers will move to the service
position ››› Fig. 71.
Removing the wiper blade
●
Lift the windscreen wiper arm.
●
Press the securing tab down
1
›
›
› Fig. 72
.
●
Extract the wiper blade from the wiper arm.
Fitting the wiper blade
●
Insert the wiper blade onto the windscreen
wiper arm until it clicks into place.
●
Place the windscreen wiper arms to their in-
itial position.
››› in Changing the windscreen and
rear window wiper blades on page 78
››› page 78
Changing the rear window wiper blade
Fig. 73 Removing and fitting the rear window
w
iper b
l
ade.
Removing the wiper blade
●
Lift the wiper arm away from the glass
54
The essentials
●
Slide the b
l
a
de adapter in the direction of
the arrow and remove the blade ››› Fig. 73 A.
Fitting the wiper blade
●
With one hand, hold the top end of the wip-
er arm.
●
Place the blade as shown in ››› Fig. 73 B
and slide the adapter along until it engages.
››› in Changing the windscreen and
rear window wiper blades on page 78
››› page 78
55
Safety
Safety
Saf
e driv
in
g
Safety first!
This chapter contains important information,
tips, sug
gestions and warnings that you
should read and consider for both your own
safety and for your passengers' safety.
WARNING
●
This m
anual contains important informa-
tion about the operation of the vehicle, both
for the driver and the passengers. The other
sections of the on-board documentation also
contain further information that you should
be aware of for your own safety and for the
safety of your passengers.
●
Ensure that the on-board documentation is
kept in the vehicle at all times. This is espe-
cially important when lending or selling the
vehicle to another person.
Advice about driving
B
ef
or
e setting off
For your own safety and the safety of your
p
a
s
sengers, always note the following points
before every trip:
–
Make sure that the vehicle's lights and turn
signals are working properly.
–
Check tyre pressure.
–
Ensure that all windows provide a clear and
good view of the surroundings.
–
Ensure that all luggage is correctly secured
››› page 133.
–
Make sure that no objects can interfere
with the pedals.
–
Adjust front seat, head restraint and mir-
rors properly according to your size.
–
Ensure that the passenger in the central
rear seat always has the head restraint in
the correct position for use.
–
Instruct passengers to adjust the head re-
straints according to their height.
–
Protect children with appropriate child
seats and properly applied seat belts
››› page 72.
–
Assume the correct sitting position. Instruct
your passengers also to assume a proper
sitting position ››› page 57.
–
Fasten your seat belt securely. Instruct your
passengers also to fasten their seat belts
properly ››› page 61.
What affects driving safety?
As a driver, you are responsible for yourself
and your p
assengers. When your concentra-
tion or driving safety is affected by any cir-
cumstance, you endanger yourself as well as
others on the road ›››
, for this reason:
–
Always pay attention to traffic and do not
get di
stracted by passengers or telephone
calls.
–
Never drive when your driving ability is im-
paired (e.g. by medication, alcohol, drugs).
–
Observe traffic laws and speed limits.
–
Always reduce your speed as appropriate
for ro
ad, traffic and weather conditions.
–
When travelling long distances, take
breaks regularly - at least every two hours.
–
If possible, avoid driving when you are tired
or stressed.
WARNING
When driving safety is impaired during a trip,
the risk of
injury and accidents increases.
Safety equipment
Never put your safety or the safety of your
p
a
s
sengers in danger. In the event of an acci-
dent, the safety equipment may reduce the
56
Safe driving
risk of injury. The following list includes most
of
the s
af
ety equipment in your SEAT:
●
Three-point seat belts
●
Belt tension limiter for the front and rear
side seats
●
Belt tensioners for the front seats
●
Front airbags
●
Side airbags in the front seat backrests,
with chest and head protection
●
“ISOFIX” anchor points for “ISOFIX” rear
child seat system
●
Height-adjustable front head restraints
●
Rear-centre head restraints with in-use po-
sition and non-use position
●
Adjustable steering column
The safety equipment mentioned above
works together to provide you and your pas-
sengers with the best possible protection in
the event of an accident. However, these
safety systems can only be effective if you
and your passengers are sitting in a correct
position and use this equipment properly.
Safety is everyone's business!
Correct position for passengers
Correct sitting position for driver
Fig. 74 The proper distance between driver
and s
t
eerin
g wheel
Fig. 75 Correct head restraint position for the
driv
er
.
For your own safety and to reduce the risk of
injur
y
in the ev
ent of an accident, we recom-
mend the following adjustments for the driv-
er:
–
Adjust the steering wheel so that there is a
distance of at least 25 cm between the
steering wheel and the centre of your chest
››› Fig. 74.
–
Move the driver's seat forwards or back-
wards so that you are able to press the ac-
celerator, brake and clutch pedals to the
floor with your knees still slightly angled
›››
.
–
Ensure that you can reach the highest point
of
the s
t
eering wheel.
–
Adjust the head restraint so that its upper
edge is at the same level as the top of your
head, or as close as possible to the same
level as the top of your head ››› Fig. 75.
–
Move the seat backrest to an upright posi-
tion so that your back rests completely
against it.
–
Fasten your seat belt securely ››› page 61.
–
Keep both feet in the footwell so that you
have the vehicle under control at all times.
Adjustment of the driver's seat ››› page 127.
WARNING
●
An incorrect
sitting position of the driver
can lead to severe injuries.
»
57
Technical dataAdviceOperationEmergenciesSafety
Safety
●
Adjust
the driver's seat so that there is at
least 25 cm distance between the centre of
the chest and the centre of the steering
wheel ››› Fig. 74. If distance is less than 25
cm, the airbag system may not protect you
properly.
●
If your physical constitution prevents you
from maintaining the minimum distance of 25
cm, contact a specialised workshop. The
workshop will help you decide if special spe-
cific modifications are necessary.
●
When driving, always hold the steering
wheel with both hands on the outside of the
ring at the 9 o'clock and 3 o'clock positions.
This reduces the risk of injury when the driver
airbag is triggered.
●
Never hold the steering wheel at the 12
o'clock position, or in any other manner (e.g.
in the centre of the steering wheel). In such
cases, if the airbag is triggered, you may sus-
tain injuries to the arms, hands and head.
●
To reduce the risk of injury to the driver
during sudden braking manoeuvres or an ac-
cident, never drive with the backrest tilted far
back! The airbag system and seat belts can
only provide optimal protection when the
backrest is in an upright position and the
driver is wearing his or her seat belt correct-
ly.
●
Adjust the head restraint properly to ach-
ieve optimal protection.
Adjusting the steering wheel position
Read the additional information carefully
›››
page 13
WARNING
●
Never adju
st the position of the steering
wheel when the vehicle is moving, as this
could cause an accident.
●
Move the lever up firmly so the steering
wheel position does not accidentally change
during driving. risk of accident!
●
Make sure you are capable of reaching and
firmly holding the upper part of the steering
wheel: risk of accident!
●
If you adjust the steering wheel so that it
points towards your face, the driver airbag
will not protect you properly in the event of
an accident. Make sure that the steering
wheel points towards your chest.
Correct sitting position for front pas-
sen
g
er
For your own safety and to reduce the risk of
injur
y
in the ev
ent of an accident, we recom-
mend the following adjustments for the front
passenger:
–
Move the front passenger seat back as far
as possible
›››
.
–
Mo
v
e the se
at backrest to an upright posi-
tion so that your back rests completely
against it.
–
Adjust the head restraint so that its upper
edge is at the same level as the top of your
head, or as close as possible to the same
level as the top of your head ››› page 60.
–
Always keep both feet in the footwell in
front of the front passenger seat.
–
Fasten your seat belt securely ››› page 61.
It is possible to deactivate the front passen-
ger airbag in exceptional circumstances
››› page 70.
Adjusting the front passenger seat
›››
page 12.
WARNING
●
An incorrect
sitting position of the front
passenger can lead to severe injuries.
●
Adjust the front passenger seat so that
there is at least 25 cm between your chest
and the dash panel. If distance is less than
25 cm, the airbag system may not protect you
properly.
●
If your physical constitution prevents you
from maintaining the minimum distance of 25
cm, contact a specialised workshop. The
workshop will help you decide if special spe-
cific modifications are necessary.
58
Safe driving
●
Alwa
ys keep your feet in the footwell when
the vehicle is moving; never rest them on the
dash panel, out the window or on the seat. An
incorrect sitting position exposes you to an
increased risk of injury in case of a sudden
braking or an accident. If the airbag is trig-
gered, you could sustain severe injuries due
to an incorrect sitting position.
●
To reduce the risk of injury to the front pas-
senger in events such as sudden braking ma-
noeuvres or an accident, never travel with the
backrest tilted far back! The airbag system
and seat belts can only provide optimal pro-
tection when the backrest is in an upright po-
sition and the front passenger is wearing his
or her seat belt properly. The further the seat
backrests are tilted to the rear, the greater
the risk of injury due to incorrect positioning
of the belt web or to the incorrect sitting po-
sition!
●
Adjust the head restraint correctly in order
to achieve maximum protection.
Correct sitting position for rear seat
p
a
s
sengers
To reduce the risk of injury in the event of a
s
ud
den br
aking manoeuvre or an accident,
passengers on the rear seat bench must con-
sider the following:
–
Sit up straight.
–
Adjust the head restraint to the correct po-
sition ››› page 60.
–
Always keep both feet in the footwell in
front of the rear seat.
–
Fasten your seat belt securely ››› page 61.
–
Use an appropriate child restraint system
when you take children in the vehicle
››› page 72.
WARNING
●
If the pa
ssengers in the rear seats are not
sitting properly, they could sustain severe in-
juries.
●
Adjust the head restraint correctly in order
to achieve maximum protection.
●
Seat belts can only provide optimal protec-
tion when seat backrests are in an upright
position and the vehicle occupants are wear-
ing their seat belts correctly. If passengers In
the rear seats are not sitting in an upright po-
sition, the risk of injury due to incorrect posi-
tioning of the seat belt increases.
Examples of incorrect sitting posi-
tion
s
Seat belts can provide optimal protection on-
ly
when the belt
w
ebs are properly posi-
tioned. Incorrect sitting positions substan-
tially reduce the protective function of seat
belts and increase the risk of injury due to in-
correct seat belt position. As the driver, you
are responsible for all passengers, especially
children.
–
Never allow anyone to assume an incorrect
sitting position in the vehicle while travel-
ling ›››
.
The f
o
l
lowing list contains examples of sit-
ting positions that could be dangerous for all
vehicle occupants. The list is not complete,
but we would like to make you aware of this
issue.
Therefore, whenever the vehicle is in motion:
●
Never stand in the vehicle.
●
Never stand on the seats.
●
Never kneel on the seats.
●
Never tilt your seat backrest far to the rear.
●
Never lean against the dash panel.
●
Never lie on the rear bench.
●
Never sit on the front edge of a seat.
●
Never sit sideways.
●
Never lean out of a window.
●
Never put your feet out of a window.
●
Never put your feet on the dash panel.
●
Never put your feet on the surface of a seat.
●
Do not allow anyone to travel in the foot-
well.
●
Never travel without wearing the seat belt.
●
Do not allow anyone to travel in the lug-
gage compartment.
»
59
Technical dataAdviceOperationEmergenciesSafety
Safety
WARNING
●
Any inc
orrect sitting position increases the
risk of severe injuries.
●
Sitting in an incorrect position exposes the
vehicle occupants to severe injuries if airbags
are triggered, by striking a vehicle occupant
who has assumed an incorrect sitting posi-
tion.
●
Before the vehicle moves, assume the prop-
er sitting position and maintain it throughout
the trip. Before every trip, instruct your pas-
sengers to sit properly and to stay in this po-
sition during the trip ››› page 57, Correct posi-
tion for passengers.
Correct adjustment of front head re-
s
tr
aint
s
Fig. 76 Correctly adjusted head restraint as
v
iew
ed fr
om the front and the side.
Properly adjusted head restraints are an im-
por
t
ant
part of passenger protection and can
reduce the risk of injuries in most accident
situations.
–
Adjust the head restraint so that its upper
edge is, as far as possible, at the same lev-
el as the top of your head, or at the very
least, at eye level ››› Fig. 76.
WARNING
●
Trav
elling with the head restraints removed
or improperly adjusted increases the risk of
severe injuries. An improper adjustment of
the head restraints may cause death in an ac-
cident and increase the risk of suffering inju-
ries during abrupt braking actions or unex-
pected manoeuvres.
●
The head restraints must always be adjus-
ted according to the height of the passenger.
Correct adjustment of rear head re-
s
tr
aint
s
Fig. 77 Rear head restraint adjustment.
The rear head restraints have 2 positions:
●
Raised position or position for use
A
››› Fig. 77. In this po
sition, the head restraint
is used normally, protecting the occupant of
the rear seats, along with the rear seat belts.
●
Rest position, not in use
B
›
›
› Fig. 77
. This
position improves the driver's rear visibility.
To fit the head restraint in position for use
A
, pull on the edges with both hands in the
dir
ection of
the arr
ow. To place it in rest posi-
tion
B
, lower the head restraint.
WARNING
●
Whenever a pa
ssenger is seated on the rear
seats, the head restraint should be placed in
the position for use
A
.
60
Seat belts
●
Do not swap the c
entre rear head restraint
with either of the outer seat rear head re-
straints. Risk of injury in case of an accident!
Note
Note the instructions on the head restraints
a
djus
tment.
Pedal area
P
ed
a
ls
–
Ensure that you can always press the accel-
er
at
or
, brake and clutch pedals unimpaired
to the floor.
–
Ensure that the pedals can return unim-
paired to their initial positions.
–
Ensure that the floor mats are securely fas-
tened during the trip and do not obstruct
the pedals ›››
.
On
ly
u
se floor mats which leave the pedals
clear and which are secured to prevent them
from slipping. You can obtain suitable floor
mats from a specialised dealership.
If a brake circuit fails, the brake pedal must
be pressed down thoroughly in order to stop
the vehicle.
Wear suitable footwear
Always wear shoes which support your feet
properly and give you a good feeling for the
pedals.
WARNING
●
If the peda
ls are obstructed, an accident
may occur. Risk of serious injuries.
●
Never lay or fit floor mats or other floor cov-
erings over the original floor mats. This
would reduce the pedal area and could ob-
struct the pedals. Risk of accident.
●
Never place objects in the driver footwell.
An object could move into the pedal area and
impair pedal operation. In the event of a sud-
den driving or braking manoeuvre, you will
not be able to operate the brake, clutch or ac-
celerator pedal. Risk of accident!
Seat belts
Wh
y
w
ear a seat belt?
Number of seats
Your vehicle has five se
ats, two in the front
and three in the rear. Each seat is equipped
with a three-point seat belt.
In some versions, your vehicle is approved
only for four seats. Two front seats and two
rear seats.
WARNING
●
Never tran
sport more than the permitted
amount of people in your vehicle.
●
Every vehicle occupant must properly fas-
ten and wear the seat belt belonging to his or
her seat. Children must be protected with an
appropriate child restraint system.
61
Technical dataAdviceOperationEmergenciesSafety
Safety
Seat belt lamp*
Fig. 78 Warning lamp on the instrument pan-
el
.
The control lamp illuminates to remind the
driv
er t
o f
asten his seat belt.
Before starting the vehicle:
–
Fasten your seat belt securely.
–
Instruct your passengers to fasten their
seat belts properly before driving off.
–
Protect children by using a child seat ac-
cording to the child's height and weight.
When the ignition is switched on, the control
lamp in the instrument panel lights up* if
the driver or passenger* have not fastened
their seat belts.
An audible warning signal will sound for a
few seconds if the seat belts are not fastened
as the vehicle drives off and reaches a speed
of more than approximately 25 km/h
(15 mph) or if the seat belts are unfastened
while the vehicle is in motion. The warning
lamp will also flash .
The lamp goes out when the driver and
passenger seat belts are fastened with the ig-
nition switched on.
The protective function of seat belts
Fig. 79 Drivers with properly worn seat belts
w
i
l
l not be thrown forward in the event of sud-
den braking
Properly worn seat belts hold the occupants
in the pr
oper po
s
ition. These also help pre-
vent uncontrolled movements that may result
in serious injury and reduce the risk of being
thrown out of the vehicle.
Vehicle occupants wearing their seat belts
correctly benefit greatly from the ability of the
belts to absorb kinetic energy. In addition,
the front part of your vehicle and other pas-
sive safety features (such as the airbag sys-
tem) are designed to absorb the kinetic ener-
gy released in a collision. Taken together, all
these features reduce the releasing kinetic
energy and consequently, the risk of injury.
This is why it is so important to fasten seat
belts before every trip, even when "just driv-
ing around the corner".
Ensure that your passengers wear their seat
belts as well. Accident statistics have shown
that wearing seat belts is an effective means
of substantially reducing the risk of injury
and improving the chances of survival when
involved in a serious accident. Furthermore,
properly worn seat belts improve the protec-
tion provided by airbags in the event of an
accident. For this reason, wearing a seat belt
is required by law in most countries.
Although your vehicle is equipped with air-
bags, the seat belts must be fastened and
worn. The front airbags, for example, are only
triggered in some cases of head-on collision.
The front airbags will not be triggered during
minor frontal or side collisions, rear-end colli-
sions, rollovers or accidents in which the air-
bag trigger threshold value in the control unit
is not exceeded.
Therefore, you should always wear your seat
belt and ensure that all vehicle occupants
have fastened their seat belts properly before
you drive off!
62
Seat belts
Safety instructions on using seat
belt
s
–
Always wear the seat belt as described in
this section.
–
En
sure that the seat belts can be fastened
at all times and are not damaged.
WARNING
●
If seat
belts are worn incorrectly or not at
all, the risk of severe injuries increases. The
optimal protection from seat belts can be
achieved only if you use them properly.
●
Fasten your seat belt before every trip -
even when driving in town. Other vehicle oc-
cupants must also wear the seat belts at all
times, otherwise they run the risk of being in-
jured.
●
The seat belt cannot offer its full protection
if the seat belt is not positioned correctly.
●
Never allow two passengers (even children)
to share the same seat belt.
●
Always keep both feet in the footwell in
front of your seat as long as the vehicle is in
motion.
●
Never unbuckle a seat belt while the vehi-
cle is in motion. Risk of fatal injury.
●
The seat belt must never be twisted while it
is being worn.
●
The seat belt should never lie on hard or
fragile objects (such as glasses or pens, etc.)
because this can cause injuries.
●
Do not al
low the seat belt to be damaged or
jammed, or to rub on any sharp edges.
●
Never wear the seat belt under the arm or
in any other incorrect position.
●
Loose, bulky clothing (such as an overcoat
over a jacket) impairs the proper fit and func-
tion of the seat belts, reducing their capacity
to protect.
●
The slot in the seat belt buckle must not be
blocked with paper or other objects, as this
can prevent the latch plate from engaging se-
curely.
●
Never use seat belt clips, fastening rings or
similar items to alter the position of the belt
webbing.
●
Frayed or torn seat belts or damage to the
connections, belt retractors or parts of the
buckle could cause severe injuries in the
event of an accident. Therefore, you must
check the condition of all seat belts at regular
intervals.
●
Seat belts which have been worn in an acci-
dent and stretched must be replaced by a
specialised workshop. Renewal may be nec-
essary even if there is no apparent damage.
The belt anchorage should also be checked.
●
Do not attempt to repair a damaged seat
belt yourself. The seat belts must not be re-
moved or modified in any way.
●
The belts must be kept clean, otherwise the
retractors may not work properly.
Head-on collisions and the laws of
ph
y
s
ics
Fig. 80 A driver not wearing a seat belt is
thr
o
wn f
orward violently
Fig. 81 The unbelted passenger in the rear
se
at
i
s thrown forward violently, hitting the
driver who is wearing a seat belt.
It is easy to explain how the laws of physics
w
ork
in the c
ase of a head-on collision: when
a vehicle starts moving, a type of energy
»
63
Technical dataAdviceOperationEmergenciesSafety
Safety
called “kinetic energy” is created both in the
p
a
s
sengers and inside the vehicle.
The amount of “kinetic energy” depends on
the speed of the vehicle and the weight of
the vehicle and its passengers. The higher
the speed and the greater the weight, the
more energy there is to be “absorbed” in an
accident.
The most significant factor, however, is the
speed of the vehicle. If the speed doubles
from 25 km/h (15 mph) to 50 km/h
(30 mph), for example, the corresponding ki-
netic energy is multiplied by four.
Because the vehicle occupants in our exam-
ple are not restrained by seat belts, in the
event of crashing against a wall, all of the oc-
cupants' kinetic energy will be absorbed
solely by said impact.
Even at speeds of 30 km/h (19 mph) to
50 km/h (30 mph), the forces acting on bod-
ies in a collision can easily exceed one tonne
(1000 kg). At greater speed these forces are
even higher.
Vehicle occupants not wearing seat belts are
not “attached” to the vehicle. In a head-on
collision, they will move forward at the same
speed their vehicle was travelling just before
the impact. This example applies not only to
head-on collisions, but to all accidents and
collisions.
Even at low speeds the forces acting on the
body in a collision are so great that it is not
possible to brace oneself with one's hands.
In a frontal collision, unbelted passengers
are thrown forward and will make violent con-
tact with the steering wheel, dash panel,
windscreen or whatever else is in the way
››› Fig. 80.
It is also important for rear passengers to
wear seat belts properly, as they could other-
wise be thrown forward violently through the
vehicle interior in an accident. Passengers in
the rear seats who do not use seat belts en-
danger not only themselves but also the front
occupants ››› Fig. 81.
How to properly adjust your
seatbelt
Fastening and unfastening the seat
belt
Fig. 82 Positioning and removing the seat
belt
b
uc
kle.
64
Seat belts
Fig. 83 Position of seat belt during pregnan-
cy
.
Fasten your seat belt
The se
at
belt
cannot offer its full protection if
the seat belt is not positioned correctly.
●
Adjust the seat and head restraint correctly.
●
To fasten the belt, take hold of the latch
plate and pull it slowly across your chest and
lap.
●
Insert the latch plate into the buckle for the
appropriate seat and push it down until it is
securely locked with an audible click
›››
Fig. 82.
●
Pull the belt to ensure that the latch plate is
securely engaged in the buckle.
The seat belts are equipped with an automat-
ic retractor on the shoulder strap. Full free-
dom of movement is permitted when the
shoulder belt is pulled slowly. However, dur-
ing sudden braking, during travel in steep
areas or bends and during acceleration, the
automatic retractor on the shoulder belt is
locked.
The automatic belt retractors on the front
seats are fitted with seat belt tensioners
››› page 65.
Releasing the seat belt
●
Press the red button on the belt buckle
››› Fig. 82. The latch plate is released and
springs out ›››
.
●
Guide the belt back by hand so that it rolls
up e
a
s
ily and the trim is not damaged.
Positioning seat belts
Seat belts offer their maximum protection on-
ly when they are properly positioned.
WARNING
●
The seat belt
s offer best protection only
when the backrests are in an upright position
and the seat belts have been fastened prop-
erly.
●
Never put the latch plate in the buckle of
another seat. If you do this, the seat belt will
not protect you properly and the risk of injury
is increased.
●
Never unbuckle a seat belt while the vehi-
cle is in motion. If you do, you increase the
risk of sustaining severe or fatal injuries.
●
An incorrectly
worn seat belt can cause se-
vere injuries in the event of an accident.
●
The shoulder part of the seat belt must lie
on the centre of the shoulder, never across
the neck. The seat belt must lie flat and fit
comfortably on the torso
●
The lap part of the seat belt must lie across
the pelvis, never across the stomach. The
seat belt must lie flat and fit comfortably on
the pelvis Pull the belt tight if necessary to
take up any slack.
●
For pregnant women, the lap part of the
seat belt must lie as low as possible over the
pelvis, never across the stomach, and always
lie flat so that no pressure is exerted on the
abdomen ››› Fig. 83.
●
Always engage the retractor lock when you
are securing a child seat in group 0, 0+ or 1
››› page 72.
●
Read and observe the warnings ››› page 63.
Belt pretensioners*
Ho
w the se
at
belt tensioner works
Read the additional information carefully
›
›
›
page 13
The seat belts for the occupants in the front
seats are equipped with belt tensioners. Sen-
sors will trigger the belt pretensioners during
severe head-on, lateral and rear collisions
»
65
Technical dataAdviceOperationEmergenciesSafety
Safety
only if the seat belt is being worn. This re-
tr
acts
and tight
ens the seat belts, reducing
the forward motion of the occupants.
The belt tensioners will not be triggered in
the event of minor collisions, if the vehicle
overturns, or in accidents where no major
forces act on the vehicle.
Note
●
If the seat
belt tensioners are triggered, a
fine dust is produced. This is normal and it is
not an indication of fire in the vehicle.
●
The relevant safety requirements must be
observed when the vehicle or components of
the system are scrapped. Specialised work-
shops are familiar with these regulations,
which are also available to you.
Service and disposal of belt tension-
er
s
The belt tensioners are components of the
se
at
belts
that are installed in the seats of
your vehicle. If you work on the belt tension-
ers or remove and install parts of the system
when performing other repair work, the seat
belt may be damaged. The consequence may
be that, in the event of an accident, the belt
tensioners function incorrectly or may not
function at all.
So that the effectiveness of the seat belt ten-
sioner is not reduced and that removed parts
do not cause any injuries or environmental
pollution, regulations, which are known to
the specialised workshops, must be ob-
served.
WARNING
●
Improper use or r
epairs not carried out by
qualified mechanics increase the risk of se-
vere or fatal injuries. The belt tensioners may
fail to trigger or may trigger in the wrong cir-
cumstances.
●
Never attempt to repair, adjust, remove or
install parts of the belt tensioners or seat
belts.
●
The seat belt tensioner, seat belt and auto-
matic retractor cannot be repaired.
●
Any work on the belt tensioners and seat
belts, including the removal and refitting of
system parts in conjunction with other repair
work, must be performed by a specialised
workshop only.
●
The belt tensioners will only provide pro-
tection for one accident and must be changed
if they have been activated.
Airbag system
Brief
intr
oduction
Wh
y is it so important to wear a seat
belt and to sit correctly?
For the inflating airbags to achieve the best
protection, the se
at belt must always be worn
properly and the correct sitting position must
be assumed.
The airbag system is not a substitute for seat
belts, but it is an integral part of the vehicle's
overall passive safety system. Please bear in
mind that the airbag system can only work ef-
fectively when the vehicle occupants are
wearing their seat belts correctly and have
adjusted the head restraints properly. There-
fore, it is most important to properly wear the
seat belts at all times, not only because this
is required by law in most countries, but also
for your safety
›››
page 61, Why wear a seat
belt?.
The airbag inflates in a matter of seconds, so
if you are not properly seated when the air-
bag is triggered, you may sustain fatal inju-
ries. Therefore, it is essential that all vehicle
occupants assume a correct sitting position
while travelling.
Sharp braking before an accident may cause
a passenger not wearing a seat belt to be
thrown forward into the area of the deploying
66
Airbag system
airbag. In this case, the inflating airbag may
inflict
c
ritic
al or fatal injuries on the occu-
pant. This also applies to children.
Always maintain the greatest possible dis-
tance between yourself and the front airbag.
This way, the front airbags can completely
deploy when triggered, providing their maxi-
mum protection.
The most important factors that will trigger
an airbag are: the type of accident, the angle
of collision and the speed of the vehicle.
Whether or not the airbags are triggered de-
pends primarily on the vehicle deceleration
rate resulting from the collision and detected
by the control unit. If the vehicle deceleration
occurring during the collision and measured
by the control unit remains below the speci-
fied reference values, the front, side and/or
curtain airbags will not be triggered. Take in-
to account that the visible damage in a vehi-
cle involved in an accident, no matter how
serious, is not a determining factor for the
airbags to have been triggered.
WARNING
●
Wearin
g the seat belt incorrectly or assum-
ing an incorrect sitting position can lead to
critical or fatal injuries.
●
All vehicle occupants, including children,
who are not properly belted can sustain criti-
cal or fatal injuries if the airbag is triggered.
Children up to 12 years old should always
travel on the rear seat. Never transport chil-
dren in the v
ehicle if they are not restrained
or the restraint system is not appropriate for
their age, size or weight.
●
If you are not wearing a seat belt, or if you
lean forward or to the side while travelling or
assume an incorrect sitting position, there is
a substantially increased risk of injury. This
increased risk of injury will be further in-
creased if you are struck by an inflating air-
bag.
●
To reduce the risk of injury from an inflating
airbag, always wear the seat belt properly.
●
Always adjust the front seats properly.
Description of airbag system
The airbag system mainly comprises (as per
v
ehic
l
e equipment):
●
an electronic control and monitoring sys-
tem (control unit)
●
frontal airbags for driver and passenger,
●
side airbags,
●
curtain airbags,
●
a control lamp on the dash panel
››› page 68.
●
key-operated switch for front passenger air-
bag,
●
a control lamp for disabling/enabling the
front passenger airbag.
The airbag system operation is monitored
electronically. The airbag control lamp will il-
luminate for a few seconds every time the ig-
nition is switched on (self-diagnosis).
There is a fault in the system if the control
lamp :
●
does not light up when the ignition is
switched on ››› page 68,
●
turns off after 4 seconds after the ignition
is switched on,
●
turns off and then lights up again after the
ignition is switched on,
●
illuminates or flashes while the vehicle is
moving.
The airbag system is not triggered if:
●
the ignition is switched off
●
there is a minor frontal collision
●
there is a minor side collision
●
there is a rear-end collision
●
the vehicle turns over.
WARNING
●
The seat belt
s and airbags can only provide
maximum protection if the occupants are
seated correctly ››› page 57, Correct position
for passengers.
●
If a fault has occurred in the airbag system,
have the system checked immediately by a
specialised workshop. Otherwise, during a
»
67
Technical dataAdviceOperationEmergenciesSafety
Safety
frontal collision the system might not trigger
correctly
or may fail to trigger at all.
Airbag activation
The airbags deploy extremely rapidly, within
thousandths
of a second, to provide addi-
tional protection in the event of an accident.
A fine dust may develop when the airbag de-
ploys. This is normal and it is not an indica-
tion of fire in the vehicle.
The airbag system is only ready to function
when the ignition is on.
In special accidents instances, several air-
bags may activate at the same time.
In the event of minor head-on and side colli-
sions, rear-end collisions, overturning or roll-
over of the vehicle, airbags do not activate.
Activation factors
The conditions that lead to the airbag system
activating in each situation cannot be gener-
alised. Some factors play an important role,
such as the properties of the object the vehi-
cle hits (hard/soft), angle of impact, vehicle
speed, etc.
Deceleration trajectory is key for airbag acti-
vation.
The control unit analyses the collision trajec-
tory
and activates the respective restraint
system.
If the deceleration rate is below the prede-
fined reference value in the control unit the
airbags will not be triggered, even though
the accident may cause extensive damage to
the car.
The following airbags are triggered in seri-
ous head-on collisions
●
Driver airbag.
●
Front passenger front airbag
The following airbags are triggered in seri-
ous side-on collisions
●
Front side airbag on the side of the acci-
dent.
●
Rear side airbag on the side of the acci-
dent.
●
Curtain (head) airbag on the side of the ac-
cident.
In an accident with airbag activation:
●
the interior lights switch on (if the interior
light switch is in the courtesy light position);
●
the hazard warning lights switch on;
●
all doors are unlocked;
●
the fuel supply to the engine is cut.
Airbag control lamp and seat belt ten-
sioner
The control lamp monitors all airbags and
seat belt
tensioners in the vehicle, including
control units and wiring connections.
Monitoring of airbag and belt tensioner sys-
tem
Both the airbag and belt tensioner systems
operation is constantly monitored electroni-
cally. The control lamp will light up for a
few seconds every time the ignition is switch-
ed on (self-diagnosis).
The system must be checked when the con-
trol lamp :
●
does not light up when the ignition is
switc
hed on,
●
turns off after 4 seconds after the ignition
is switched on
●
turns off and then lights up again after the
ignition is switched on
●
illuminates or flashes while the vehicle is
moving.
In the event of a malfunction, the warning
lamp remains on continuously. Have the air-
bag system inspected immediately by a spe-
cialised workshop.
68
Airbag system
If any of the airbags are disabled by a Techni-
c
al
Service, the warning lamp flashes for sev-
eral more seconds after verification and will
turn off if there is no fault.
WARNING
●
If there i
s a malfunction, the airbag and
belt tensioner system cannot properly per-
form its protective function.
●
If a malfunction occurs, have the system
checked immediately by a specialised work-
shop. Otherwise, in the event of an accident,
the airbag system and belt tensioners may
not be triggered, or may not be triggered cor-
rectly.
Airbag safety instructions
Fr
ont
airb
ags
Read the additional information carefully
›
›
›
page 14.
WARNING
●
The seat belt
s and airbags can only provide
maximum protection if the occupants are
seated correctly ››› page 57, Correct position
for passengers.
●
The deployment space between the front
passengers and the airbags must not in any
case be occupied by other passenger, pets
and objects.
●
The airbags
provide protection for just one
accident; replace them once they have de-
ployed.
●
It is also important not to attach any ob-
jects such as cup holders or telephone
mountings to the surfaces covering the air-
bag units.
●
Do not attempt to modify components of
the airbag system in any way.
Side airbags*
Read the additional information carefully
›
›
›
page 15.
WARNING
●
If y
ou do not wear a seat belt, if you lean
forward, or are not seated correctly while the
vehicle is in motion, you are at a greater risk
of injury if the side airbag system is triggered
in an accident.
●
In order for the side airbags to provide their
maximum protection, the prescribed sitting
position must always be maintained with
seat belts fastened while travelling.
●
Occupants of the outer seats must never
carry any objects or pets in the deployment
space between them and the airbags, or al-
low children or other passengers to travel in
this position. It is also important not to at-
tach any accessories (such as cup holders) to
the doors. This would impair the protection
offered b
y the side airbags.
●
The built-in coat hooks should be used only
for lightweight clothing. Do not leave any
heavy or sharp-edged objects in the pockets.
●
Great forces, such as hard blows or kicks,
must not be exerted upon the backrest bol-
ster because the system may be damaged. In
this case, the side airbags would not be trig-
gered.
●
Under no circumstances should protective
covers be fitted over seats with side airbags
unless the covers have been approved for use
in your vehicle. Because the airbag deploys
from the side of the backrest, the use of con-
ventional seat covers would obstruct the side
airbag, seriously reducing the airbag's effec-
tiveness.
●
Any damage to the original seat upholstery
or around the seams of the side airbag units
must be repaired immediately by a special-
ised workshop.
●
The airbags provide protection for just one
accident; replace them once they have de-
ployed.
●
Any work on the side airbag system or re-
moval and installation of the airbag compo-
nents for other repairs (such as removal of
the front seat) should only be performed by a
specialised workshop. Otherwise, faults may
occur during the airbag system operation.
●
Do not attempt to modify components of
the airbag system in any way.
»
69
Technical dataAdviceOperationEmergenciesSafety
Safety
●
The side and hea
d airbags are managed
through sensors located in the interior of the
front doors. To ensure the correct operation of
the side and curtain (head) airbags neither
the doors nor the door panels should be
modified in any way (e.g. fitting loudspeak-
ers). If the front door is damaged, the airbag
system may not work correctly. All work car-
ried out on the front door must be done in a
specialised workshop.
●
In a side-on collision the side airbags will
not work if the sensors do not correctly meas-
ure the pressure increase on the interior of
the doors, due to air escaping through the
areas with holes or openings in the door pan-
el.
●
Never drive if the interior door panels have
been removed or if the panels have not been
correctly fitted.
●
Never drive the vehicle if the loudspeakers
in the door panels have been removed, un-
less the holes left by the loudspeakers have
been closed properly.
●
Always check that the openings are closed
or covered if additional loudspeakers or other
equipment are fitted inside the door panels.
●
Any work carried out to the doors should be
made in an authorised specialised workshop.
Curtain airbags*
Read the additional information carefully
›
›
›
page 15.
WARNING
The airbag is deployed at high speed in frac-
tions of
a second.
●
Do not obstruct the head-protection airbag
deployment areas.
●
Never secure objects over the curtain air-
bag cover or in its deployment area.
●
Occupants of the front seats and rear side
seats must never carry any other people, ani-
mals or objects in the deployment space be-
tween them and the airbags. Make sure that
all the vehicle occupants, including children,
observe this.
●
The clothes hangers are intended only for
light articles of clothing. Do not leave any
heavy or sharp-edged objects in the pockets.
●
Do not mount accessories on the doors.
●
Use only sun blinds which have been ex-
pressly approved for use in your vehicle.
●
Do not turn the sun blinds towards the win-
dows if there are objects, e.g. pens or garage
remote controls, secured to them.
Deactivating airbags
D
e
activ
ation of front passenger front
airbag*
Fig. 84 In the glove compartment: Switch for
activ
atin
g and de
activating the front passen-
ger airbag
Fig. 85 Centre side of dash panel: control
l
amp f
or de
activated front passenger airbag
in centre console
70
Airbag system
Read the additional information carefully
›
›
›
page 14
If you fit a rear-facing child seat to the front
passenger seat, the front passenger front air-
bag must be de-activated.
When the front passenger airbag is deactiva-
ted, this means that only the front passenger
front airbag is deactivated. All the other air-
bags in the vehicle remain activated.
Activating the front passenger front airbag
–
Switch the ignition off.
–
Open the glove compartment on the front
passenger side.
–
Insert the key into the slot of the switch for
deactivating the front passenger airbag
››› Fig. 84. About 3/4 of the key should en-
ter, as far as it will go.
–
Then turn the key gently to the position.
Do not force it if you feel resistance, and
make sure you have inserted the key fully.
–
When the ignition is switched on, check
whether the control lamp
on the dash panel does ››› Fig. 85 not
light up ›››
.
WARNING
●
It is
the driver's responsibility to ensure
that the key-operated switch is set to the cor-
rect position.
●
You shoul
d deactivate the front passenger
front airbag only if you have to use a rear-fac-
ing child seat in exceptional cases
››› page 72, Transporting children safely.
●
Never install a child seat facing backwards
on the front passenger seat unless the front
passenger front airbag has been disabled.
Otherwise, there is a risk of death.
●
As soon as the child seat is no longer nee-
ded on the front passenger seat, enable the
front passenger front airbag again.
●
Only deactivate the front passenger front
airbag when the ignition is off, otherwise a
fault may occur in the airbag system, which
could cause the airbag to not deploy properly
or not deploy at all in case of an accident.
●
Never leave the key in the airbag disabling
switch as it could get damaged or enable or
disable the airbag during driving.
●
When the passenger airbag is deactivated,
if the control lamp is not
continuously lit up when the front passenger
airbag is disabled, there may be a fault in the
airbag system:
–
Have the airbag system inspected imme-
diately by a specialised workshop.
–
Do not use a child seat on the front pas-
senger seat! The front passenger front
airbag could be triggered in the event of
an accident, even if there is a fault in the
system and, as a result, a child could sus-
tain serious or fatal injuries.
–
It is unpredictable whether the front pas-
senger airbag will deploy in the event of
an accident. Warn all your passengers of
this.
71
Technical dataAdviceOperationEmergenciesSafety
Safety
Transporting children safely
Saf
ety
f
or children
Introduction
For safety reasons, as we have learned from
accident
statistics, we recommend that chil-
dren under 12 years of age travel in the rear
seats. Depending on their age, height and
weight, children travelling in rear seats must
use a child seat or a seat belt. For safety rea-
sons, the child seat should be installed in the
rear seat, behind the front passenger seat or
in the centre back seat.
The physical laws involved and the forces
acting in a collision apply also to children
›››
page 63. But unlike adults, children do not
have fully developed muscle and bone struc-
tures. This means that children are subject to
a greater risk of injury.
To reduce the risk of injuries, children must
always use special child restraint systems
when travelling in the vehicle.
We recommend the use of child safety prod-
ucts from the SEAT Original Accessories Pro-
gramme, which includes systems for all ages
made by “Peke” (not for all countries).
These systems have been especially de-
signed and approved, complying with the
ECE-R44. regulation.
Follow the manufacturer's instructions and
obser
ve any statutory requirements when in-
stalling and using child seats. Always read
and note ››› page 72.
We recommend you always carry the manu-
facturer's Child Seat Instruction Manual to-
gether with the on-board documentation.
Important information regarding the
front passenger's airbag
Read the additional information carefully
›
›
›
page 16.
Read and always observe the safety informa-
tion included in the following chapters:
●
Safety distance with respect to the passen-
ger airbag ››› page 66.
●
Objects between the passenger and the
passenger side airbag ›››
in Front airbags
on p
ag
e 69
.
The passenger side front airbag, when ena-
bled, is a serious risk for a child that is facing
backward since the airbag can strike the seat
with such force that it can cause serious or
fatal injuries. Children up to 12 years old
should always travel on the rear seat.
Therefore we strongly recommend you to
transport children on the rear seats. This is
the safest location in the vehicle. Alternative-
ly, the front passenger airbag can be disa-
bled with a key-operated switch ››› page 70.
When transporting children, use a child seat
appropriate to the age and size of each child.
WARNING
●
If a chi
ld seat is secured to the front pas-
senger seat, the risk to the child of sustain-
ing critical or fatal injuries in the event of an
accident increases.
●
An inflating front passenger airbag can
strike the rear-facing child seat and project it
with great force against the door, the roof or
the backrest.
●
Never install a child seat facing backwards
on the front passenger seat unless the front
passenger front airbag has been disabled.
Risk of potentially fatal injuries to the child!
However, if it is necessary, in exceptional ca-
ses, to transport a child in the front passen-
ger seat, the front passenger front airbag
must always be disabled ››› page 70, Deacti-
vation of front passenger front airbag*. If the
front passenger seat has a height adjustment
option, move it to the highest position.
●
For those vehicles that do not include a key
lock switch to deactivate the airbag, the vehi-
cle must be taken to a technical service.
●
All vehicle occupants, especially children,
must assume the proper sitting position and
be properly belted in while travelling.
●
Never hold children or babies on your lap,
this can result in potentially fatal injuries to
the child!
72
Transporting children safely
●
Never al
low a child to be transported in a
vehicle without being properly secured, or to
stand up or kneel on a seat while travelling.
In an accident, the child could be flung
through the vehicle, causing possibly fatal in-
juries to themselves and to the other vehicle
occupants.
●
If children assume an improper sitting posi-
tion when the vehicle is moving, they expose
themselves to greater risk of injury in the
event of a sudden braking manoeuvre or in an
accident. This is particularly important if the
child is travelling on the front passenger seat
and the airbag system is triggered in an acci-
dent; as this could cause serious injury or
even death.
●
A suitable child seat can protect your child!
●
Never leave a child alone in the child seat
or inside the vehicle because depending on
the season, very high temperatures may be
reached inside a parked vehicle, which could
be fatal.
●
Children who are less than 1.5 metres tall
must not wear a normal seat belt without a
child seat, as this could cause injuries to the
abdominal and neck areas during a sudden
braking manoeuvre or in an accident.
●
Do not allow the seat belt to become twis-
ted and the seat belt should be properly in
place ››› page 61.
●
Only one child may occupy a child seat
››› page 73, Child seats.
●
When a chil
d seat is mounted in the rear
seats, the door child-proof lock should be ac-
tivated ››› page 109.
Child seats
Safety in
structions
Read the additional information carefully
›››
page 16.
WARNING
When travelling, children must be secured in
the vehic
le with a restraint system suitable
for age, weight and size.
●
Read and always observe information and
warnings concerning the use of child seats
››› page 72.
WARNING
The retaining rings are designed only for use
with “ISOFIX” and Top
Tether* system child
seats.
●
Never secure other child seats that do not
have the “ISOFIX” or Top Tether* system, or
retaining belts or objects to the fastening
rings - this can result in potentially fatal inju-
ries to the child.
●
Ensure that the child seat is secured cor-
rectly using the “ISOFIX” and Top Tether* se-
curing rings.
WARNING
An undue installation of the safety seat will
incre
ase the risk of injury in the event of a
crash.
●
Never tie the retainer strap to a hook in the
luggage compartment.
●
Never secure or tie luggage or other items
to the lower anchorages (ISOFIX) or the upper
ones (Top Tether).
Categorisation of child seats into
gr
oup
s
Only use child seats that are officially ap-
pr
o
v
ed and suitable for the child.
Child seats are subject to the regulation ECE-
R 44. ECE-R stands for: Economic Commis-
sion for Europe Regulation.
The child seats are grouped into 5 catego-
ries:
Group 0: Up to 10 kg (up to around 9
months)
Group 0+: Up to 13 kg (up to around 18
months)
Group 1: from 9 to 18 kg (up to approx. 4
years old)
Group 2: from 15 to 25 kg (up to approx. 7
years old)
»
73
Technical dataAdviceOperationEmergenciesSafety
Safety
Group 3: Fr
om 22 to 36 kg (over around 7
y
e
ars old)
Child seats that have been tested and ap-
proved under the ECE R44 standard bear the
test mark on the seat (the letter E in a circle
with the test number below it).
Follow the manufacturer's instructions and
observe any statutory requirements when in-
stalling and using child seats.
We recommend you to always include the
manufacturer's Child Seat Instruction Manual
together with the on-board documentation.
SEAT recommends you use child seats from
the Original Accessories Catalogue. These
child seats have been designed and tested
for use in SEAT vehicles. You can find the
right child seat for your model and age group
at SEAT dealers.
WARNING
Read and always observe information and
warning
s concerning the use of child seats
››› page 72.
74
Self-help
Emergencies
Self
-help
Emer
g
ency equipment
Emergency warning triangle*
The use of reflective warning triangles is
oblig
atory in emergencies in some countries.
As are the first aid kit and a set of spare light
bulbs.
The warning triangle is under the storage
compartment which is located under the lug-
gage compartment floor.
Note
●
The warning tri
angle is not part of the vehi-
cle's standard equipment.
●
The warning triangle should meet legal re-
quirements.
First-aid kit and fire extinguisher*
The first-aid kit can go in the storage com-
p
ar
tment
which is located under the luggage
compartment floor.
The fire extinguisher* is attached to the lug-
gage compartment carpet with Velcro.
Note
●
The first
-aid kit and the fire extinguisher
are not part of the vehicle's standard equip-
ment.
●
The first aid kit must comply with legal re-
quirements.
●
Observe the expiry date of the contents of
the first aid kit. After it has expired you
should purchase a new one.
●
The fire extinguisher must comply with le-
gal requirements.
●
Ensure that the fire extinguisher is fully
functional. The fire extinguisher should,
therefore, be checked regularly. The sticker
on the fire extinguisher will inform you of the
next date for checking.
●
Before acquiring accessories and emergen-
cy equipment see the instructions in “Acces-
sories and spares” ››› page 187.
Vehicle tools
Read the additional information carefully
›
›
›
page 47
Some of the items listed are only provided in
certain model versions, or are optional ex-
tras.
WARNING
●
The factor
y-supplied jack is only designed
for changing wheels on this model. On no ac-
count attempt to use it for lifting heavier ve-
hicle
s or other loads. Risk of injury.
●
Use the jack only on a firm, level ground.
●
Never start the engine when the vehicle is
on the jack. Risk of accident.
●
If work is to be carried out underneath the
vehicle, this must be secured by suitable
means. Otherwise, there is a risk of injury.
Note
The jack does not generally require any main-
t
enanc
e. If required, it should be greased us-
ing universal type grease.
Spare wheel (temporary spare
wheel)*
The temporary spare wheel is stored under
the floor p
anel
in the lug
gage compartment
and is attached by a thumbnut.
How to use the temporary spare wheel
If you ever have a punctured tyre or loss of
pressure, the temporary spare wheel is only
intended for temporary use until you reach a
workshop. Change it for a duty wheel as soon
as possible.
Please note the following restrictions when
using the temporary spare wheel. This tem-
porary spare wheel has been specially de-
signed for your vehicle, thus, it cannot be
»
75
Technical dataAdviceOperationEmergenciesSafety
Emergencies
changed with the temporary spare wheel
fr
om another
v
ehicle.
No other type of tyre (normal summer or win-
ter tyre) may be fitted on the compact tempo-
rary spare wheel rim.
Snow chains
For technical reasons, snow chains must not
be used on the temporary spare wheel.
If you have a puncture on one of the front
wheels when using snow chains, fit the tem-
porary spare wheel in place of one of the rear
wheels. Fit the snow chains on the rear wheel
that you have removed and replace the punc-
tured front wheel with this wheel.
Extraction of the spare wheel in vehicles
with SEAT SOUND 6 speakers (with subwoof-
er)*
●
Disassemble the subwoofer's floor panel
(carpet) as follows:
●
Pull the carpet upwards to remove it.
●
Disconnect the subwoofer's speaker cable.
●
Turn the securing wheel anti-clockwise.
●
Remove the subwoofer speaker and the
spare wheel.
●
When replacing the spare wheel, place the
subwoofer speaker in the direction indicated
by the arrow and with the word “FRONT” fac-
ing forward.
●
Reconnect the speaker cable and firmly ro-
tate the securing wheel clockwise so that the
subwoofer system and wheel are firmly in
place.
WARNING
●
After fittin
g the temporary spare wheel,
check the tyre pressures as soon as possible.
Failure to do so may cause an accident. The
tyre pressures are listed on the inside of the
fuel tank flap.
●
Do not drive at over 80 km/h (50 mph)
when the temporary spare wheel is fitted on
the vehicle: risk of accident!
●
Avoid heavy acceleration, hard braking and
fast cornering: risk of accident!
●
Never use more than one temporary spare
wheel at the same time, risk of accident.
●
No other type of tyre (normal summer or
winter tyre) may be fitted on the compact
temporary spare wheel rim.
Tyre repair
TM
S
(T
yre Mobility System)*
Read the additional information carefully
›
›
›
page 46
The Anti-puncture kit* (Tyre Mobility System)
will reliably seal punctures caused by the
penetration of a foreign body of up to about
4 mm in diameter. Do not remove foreign ob-
jects, e.g. screws or nails, from the tyre.
After inserting the sealant residue in the tyre,
you must again check the tyre pressure about
10 minutes after starting the engine.
You should only use the tyre mobility set if
the vehicle is parked in a safe place, you are
familiar with the procedure and you have the
necessary tyre mobility set! Otherwise, you
should seek professional assistance.
Do not use the tyre sealant in the following
cases:
●
If the wheel rim has been damaged.
●
In outside temperatures below -20°C (-4°F).
●
In the event of cuts or perforations in the
tyre greater than 4 mm.
●
If you have been driving with very low pres-
sure or a completely flat tyre.
●
If the sealant bottle has passed its use by
date.
WARNING
Using the tyre mobility system can be dan-
gerou
s, especially when filling the tyre at the
roadside. Please observe the following rules
to minimise the risk of injury:
●
Stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible.
Park it at a safe distance from surrounding
traffic to fill the tyre.
76
Self-help
●
Ensur
e the ground on which you park is flat
and solid.
●
All passengers and particularly children
must keep a safe distance from the work area.
●
Turn on the hazard warning lights to warn
other road users.
●
Use the tyre mobility system only if you are
familiar with the necessary procedures. Oth-
erwise, you should seek professional assis-
tance.
●
The tyre mobility set is intended for tempo-
rary emergency use only until you can reach
the nearest specialised workshop.
●
Replace the repaired tyre with the tyre mo-
bility set as soon as possible.
●
The sealant is a health hazard and must be
cleaned immediately if it comes into contact
with the skin.
●
Always keep the tyre mobility set out of the
reach of small children.
●
Never use a jack, even if it has been ap-
proved for your vehicle.
●
Always stop the engine, apply the hand-
brake lever firmly and engage gear if using a
manual gearbox, in order to reduce the risk of
vehicle involuntary movement.
WARNING
A tyre filled with sealant does not have the
same perf
ormance properties as a conven-
tional tyre.
●
Never drive faster than 80 km/h (50 mph).
●
Avoid he
avy acceleration, hard braking and
fast cornering.
●
Drive for only 10 minutes at a maximum
speed of 80 km/h (50 mph) and then check
the tyre.
For the sake of the environment
Dispose of used or expired sealant observing
an
y l
egal requirements.
Note
●
A new bottl
e of
se
alant can be purchased at
SEAT dealerships.
●
Take into account the separate instruction
manual of the tyre mobility set* manufactur-
er.
Contents of the tyre mobility system*
Fig. 86 Standard representation: contents of
the anti-p
u
nct
ure kit.
The anti-puncture kit is located underneath
the floor c
o
v
ering in the luggage compart-
ment. It includes the following components
››› Fig. 86:
Tyre valve remover
Sticker indicating maximum speed “max.
80 km/h” or “max. 50 mph”
Filler tube with cap
Air compressor
Tube for inflating tyres
Warning provided by tyre pressure moni-
toring system (it can also be integrated in
the compressor).
»
1
2
3
4
5
6
77
Technical dataAdviceOperationEmergenciesSafety
Emergencies
Air bleed screw (in its place, the compres-
sor m
a
y
have a button).
ON/OFF switch
12 volt connector
Bottle of sealant
Spare tyre valve
The valve insert remover
1
has a gap at the
lo
w
er end f
or a valve insert. The valve insert
can only be screwed or unscrewed in this
way. This also applies to its replacement part
11
.
WARNING
When inflating the wheel, the air compressor
and the inflator t
ube may become hot.
●
Protect hands and skin from hot parts.
●
Do not place the hot flexible inflator tube or
hot air compressor on flammable material.
●
Allow them to cool before storing the de-
vice.
●
If it is not possible to inflate the tyre to at
least 2.0 bars (29 psi / 200 kPa), the tyre is
too badly damaged. The sealant is not in a
good condition to seal the tyre. Do not con-
tinue driving. Seek specialist assistance.
CAUTION
Switch off the air compressor after a maxi-
mum of 8 operation
al minutes to avoid over-
heating! Before switching on the air compres-
sor again, let it cool for several minutes.
7
8
9
10
11
Check after 10 minutes of driving
Screw in the inflator tube ›››
Fig. 86
5
again
and check
the pressure on the gauge
6
.
1.3 bar (19 ps
i / 130 kPa) and lower:
●
Stop the vehicle! The tyre cannot be sealed
sufficiently with the tyre mobility set.
●
You should obtain professional assistance
›››
.
1.4 bar (20 ps
i / 140 kPa) and higher:
●
Set the tyre pressure to the correct value
again.
●
Car
efully resume your journey, without ex-
ceeding 80 km/h (50 mph), until you reach
the nearest specialised workshop and re-
place the tyre.
WARNING
Driving with an unsealed tyre is dangerous
and can cau
se accidents and serious injury.
●
Do not continue driving if the tyre pressure
is 1.3 bar (19 psi / 130 kPa) and lower.
●
Seek specialist assistance.
Changing the windscreen wiper
b
l
a
des
Changing the windscreen and rear
window wiper blades
Read the additional information carefully
›››
page 54.
Perfect wiper blade condition is essential for
clear vision. Damaged wiper blades should
be replaced immediately.
The windscreen wiper blades are supplied as
standard with a layer of graphite. This layer is
responsible for ensuring that the wipe is si-
lent. If the graphite layer is damaged, the
noise of the water as it is wiped across the
windscreen will be louder.
Check the condition of the wiper blades regu-
larly. If the wipers scrape across the glass,
they should be changed if they are damaged,
or cleaned if they are dirty
›››
.
If
thi
s
does not produce the desired results,
the setting angle of the windscreen wiper
arms might be incorrect. They should be
checked by a specialised workshop and cor-
rected if necessary.
WARNING
Do not drive unless you have good visibility
through al
l windows!
78
Self-help
●
Cle
an the windscreen wiper blades and all
windows regularly.
●
The wiper blades should be changed once
or twice a year.
CAUTION
●
Dam
aged or dir
ty windscreen wipers could
scratch the glass.
●
Never use fuel, nail varnish remover, paint
thinner or similar products to clean the win-
dows. This could damage the windscreen
wiper blades.
●
Never move any windscreen wiper by hand.
This could cause damage.
●
To prevent damage to the bonnet and the
windscreen wiper arms, the latter should only
be lifted off the windscreen when in service
position.
Note
●
The winds
creen wiper arms can be moved
to the service position only when the bonnet
is properly closed.
●
You can also use the service position, for
example, if you want to fix a cover over the
windscreen in the winter to keep it clear of
ice.
Towing or tow-starting
Not
e
s
Read the additional information carefully
›››
page 51
Please observe the following points if you
use a tow rope:
Notes for the driver of the towing vehicle
–
Move the vehicle slowly until the cable is
taut. Then accelerate gradually.
–
Begin and change gears cautiously. If you
are drivin
g an automatic vehicle, accelerate
gently.
–
Remember that the brake servo and power
steering are not working in the vehicle you
are towing. Brake sooner than normal and
pressing the pedal gently.
Notes for the driver of the towed vehicle
–
Ensure that the tow rope remains taut at all
times when towing.
Towing vehicles with an automatic gearbox
●
Put the selector lever into position “N”.
●
Do not drive faster than 50 km/h (31 mph).
●
Do not tow further than 50 km.
●
If a breakdown vehicle is used, the vehicle
must be towed with the front wheels raised.
WARNING
If the vehicle has no electrical power, the
brake light
s, turn signals and all other lights
will no longer function. Do not have the vehi-
cle towed away. Failure to follow this instruc-
tion could result in an accident.
WARNING
Vehicle handling and braking capacity
chan
ge considerably during towing. Please
observe the following instructions to mini-
mise the risk of serious accidents and injury:
●
As the driver of the vehicle being towed:
–
You should depress the brake much hard-
er as the brake servo does not operate.
Pay the utmost attention to avoid crash-
ing into the towing vehicle.
–
More strength is required at the steering
wheel as the power steering does not op-
erate when the engine is switched off.
●
As the driver of the towing vehicle:
–
Accelerate with particular care and cau-
tion.
–
Avoid sudden braking and manoeuvres.
–
Brake earlier than usual and more
smoothly.
CAUTION
When tow-starting, fuel could enter the cata-
lytic con
verter and damage it.
»
79
Technical dataAdviceOperationEmergenciesSafety
Emergencies
Note
●
Obser
ve legal requirements when towing or
tow-starting.
●
Switch on the hazard warning lights of both
vehicles. However, observe any regulations
to the contrary.
●
For technical reasons, vehicles with an au-
tomatic gearbox must not be tow-started.
●
If there is no lubricant in the gearbox as the
result of a fault, you must raise the driven
wheels while the vehicle is being towed.
●
If the vehicle has to be towed more than
50 km (30 miles), the front wheels should be
raised during towing, and towing should be
carried out by a qualified person.
●
The steering wheel is locked when the vehi-
cle has no electrical power. The vehicle must
then be towed with the front wheels raised.
Towing should be carried out by a qualified
person.
●
The towline anchorage should always be
kept in the vehicle.
Towline anchorages
Fig. 87 Towline anchorage at the front of the
v
ehic
l
e
Read the additional information carefully
›
›
›
page 51
Fitting the front towline anchorage
–
Take the towline anchorage from the on-
board tool set.
–
Remove the front cover by pressing down
on its left-hand side. For FR finishes, press
down and pull outwards. For the rest of the
Sport finishes, remove the cover by insert-
ing a screwdriver into the lower slot and
levering gently.
–
Bolt the anchorage to its limit to the left, in
the direction of the arrow ››› Fig. 87.
Rear towline anchorage
There is a towline anchorage at the rear on
the right below the rear bumper.
Fuses and bulbs
F
u
se
s
Introduction
Due to the constant updating of vehicles,
fuse a
ssignments based on equipment and
the use of the same fuse for various electrical
components, it is not possible to provide an
up-to-date summary of the fuse positions for
the electrical components at the time this
manual was printed. For detailed information
about the fuse positions, please consult a
technical service.
In general, a fuse can be assigned to various
electrical components. Likewise, an electrical
component can be protected by several
fuses.
Only replace fuses when the cause of the
problem has been solved. If a newly inserted
fuse blows after a short time, you must have
the electrical system checked by a special-
ised workshop as soon as possible.
WARNING
The high voltages in the electrical system can
give serious
electrical shocks, causing burns
and even death!
●
Never touch the electrical wiring of the igni-
tion system.
80
Fuses and bulbs
●
Take c
are not to cause short circuits in the
electrical system.
WARNING
Using unsuitable fuses, repairing fuses or
bridgin
g a curr
ent circuit without fuses can
cause a fire and serious injury.
●
Never use a fuse with a higher value. Only
replace fuses with a fuse of the same amper-
age (same colour and markings) and size.
●
Never repair a fuse.
●
Never replace a fuse by a metal strip, staple
or similar.
CAUTION
●
To prev
ent damage to the vehicle's electric
system, before replacing a fuse always turn
off the ignition, the lights and all electrical
elements and remove the key from the igni-
tion.
●
If you replace a fuse with higher-rating
fuse, you could cause damage to another part
of the electrical system.
●
Protect the fuse boxes when open to pre-
vent the entry of dust or humidity as they can
damage the electrical system.
●
Always carefully remove the fuse box cov-
ers and refit them correctly to avoid problems
with your vehicle.
Note
●
One component m
ay have more than one
fuse.
●
Several components may run on a single
fuse.
●
In the vehicle, there are more fuses than
those indicated in this chapter. These should
only be changed by a specialised workshop.
●
Positions not containing a fuse do not ap-
pear in the following tables.
●
Some of the equipment listed in the tables
below pertain only to certain versions of the
model or are optional extras.
●
Please note that the above lists, while cor-
rect at the time of printing, are subject to
change.
Fuses to the left of the instrument
p
anel
Read the additional information carefully
›
›
›
page 44
Only replace fuses with a fuse of the same
amperage (same colour and markings) and
size.
Control box 1
No. Consumer/Amps
1 Left lights 40
2 Central locking 40
No. Consumer/Amps
3 Power C63 (30 Power) 30
4 PTC Relay (Engine glow) 50
5
Left pillar connector A pin 22 (motor
for closing window on driver's side)
30
6 For closing back left window (motor) 30
7 Horn 20
9 Panoramic roof 30
10 Active suspension 7.5
11 Headlight washer system relay 30
12 MIB display 5
13
(RL-15) SIDO Kl.15 supply (inputs 29
and 55)
30
14
Removing ignition key, diagnostics,
headlight lever (flashers), switching
on dipped /side beams (rotating
lights)
7.5
15
Air and heat control (supply)
7.5
Automatic gearbox lever
16 Instrument panel 5
17 Dwa Sensor, Alarm horn 7.5
23 Dual windscreen cleaner pump 7.5
24
Engine heater, heating control box
(supply)
30
26 12V Relay socket 20
»
81
Technical dataAdviceOperationEmergenciesSafety
Emergencies
No. Consumer/Amps
27 Rear window wiper motor 15
28 Lighter 20
29
Airbag control unit, airbag deactiva-
tion warning lamp
10
30
Reverse, Mirror joysticks, RKA, switch-
ing on heated seats, int. pressure A.C,
heating A.C. controls (supply), electro-
chromic mirror, PDC control, switching
on front and rear fog lights (rotating
lights).
7.5
31 Petrol gauge 5
32
AFS headlights, headlight regulator
(signal and adjustment), LWR Cent, di-
agnostics, front headlight lever
(switch on), Dimmer (headlight adjust-
ment)
7.5
33 Start-Stop relay, clutch sensor 5
34 Heated jets 5
35
Soundaktor control feed, GRA feed,
Kühlerlüfter central feed
5
36 Heated seats 10
37 Additional diagnostics 10
38 Right hand lights A/66 feed 40
39 ABS Pump (rear battery) 40
41 Heated rear window 30
42 Passenger side window controls 30
No. Consumer/Amps
43 Rear right window control 30
44 Reversing camera 10
45
Windscreen wiper feed lever, diagnos-
tics
10
47 ABS Ventil (rear battery) 25
49
EKP TDI relay (fuel pump feed) 30
EKP MPI relay (fuel pump feed) 20
TFSI pump gauge control 15
50 Multimedia Radio (power supply) 20
51 Heated mirrors 10
53 Rain sensor 5
54 30 ZAS (ignition switch) 5
55 Heated seats 10
Fuse arrangement in engine compart-
ment
Read the additional information carefully
›
›
›
page 44
Only replace fuses with a fuse of the same
amperage (same colour and markings) and
size.
No. Consumer/Amps
1
Fan, condenser 40
TK8 fan, condenser 50
2 Glow plugs 50
3
ABS Pump 40
EMBOX2-13 (TA8) 20
4 PTC glow phase 2 40
5 PTC glow phase 3 40
6 BDM, 30 ReF 5
7 MSG (KL30) 7.5
8 Windscreen wipers 30
9
Automatic gear box control, AQ 160
Control box
30
10
ABS Ventil 25
EMBOX2-11 (TA8) 5
11 Vacuum pump motor 20
12
Injectors
10
TDI fuel metering adjuster, TA8 ex-
haust temperature sensor
13 Servo sensor 5
14
Coolant pump high/low temperature,
gauge (relay EKP)
10
15 50 controls motor diag 5
82
Fuses and bulbs
No. Consumer/Amps
16 Starter motor 30
17 Controls motor (MSG KL87) 20
18
PTC Relays, TOG sensor, engine
valves, PWM fan
10
19 Lambda sensors 15
20
Glow plug relay, Heizrohr 5
Ignition coil 20
Pre-wired motor (coolant pump, varia-
ble valve distributor, active carbon
solenoid valve filter, pressure valve,
secondary air inlet valve)
10
Changing bulbs
Gener
a
l
notes
Read the additional information carefully
›
›
›
page 45
Before changing any bulb, first turn off the
failed device.
Do not touch the glass part of the bulb with
your bare hands. The fingerprints left on the
glass will vaporise as a result of the heat gen-
erated by the bulb, reducing bulb life and
causing condensation on the reflector sur-
face, thus reducing effectiveness.
A bulb must only be replaced by one of the
same type. The type is indicated on the bulb,
either on the glass part or on the base.
Xenon headlights
With this type of headlight, the user can re-
place the turn signal bulb. Replacement of
the dipped/main beam bulb must be done by
Technical Services, given that complex ele-
ments must be removed from the vehicle and
the automatic control system that incorpo-
rates it must be reset.
The Xenon bulbs discharge 2.5 times the
light flux and have an average lifespan of 5
times more than that of halogen bulbs, this
means that, except due to unusual circum-
stances, there is no need to change the bulbs
for the whole life of the vehicle.
WARNING
●
Take p
articular care when working on com-
ponents in the engine compartment if the en-
gine is warm, there is a risk of burns.
●
Bulbs are highly sensitive to pressure. The
glass can break when you touch the bulb,
causing injury.
●
The high voltage element of gas discharge
bulbs* (xenon light) must be handled correct-
ly. Otherwise, there is a risk of death.
●
When changing bulbs, please take care not
to injure yourself on sharp parts in the head-
light housing.
CAUTION
●
Remov
e the ignition key before working on
the electric system. Otherwise, a short circuit
could occur.
●
Switch off the lights or parking lights be-
fore you change a bulb.
For the sake of the environment
Please ask your specialist retailer how to dis-
pose of u
sed bulbs in the proper manner.
Note
●
Depending on w
eather conditions (cold or
wet), the front lights, the fog lights, the tail
lights and the turn signals may be temporari-
ly misted. This has no influence on the useful
life of the lighting system. By switching on
the lights, the area through which the beam
of light is projected will quickly be demisted.
However, the edges may continue to be mis-
ted.
●
Please check at regular intervals that all
lighting (especially the exterior lighting) on
your vehicle is functioning properly. This is
not only in the interest of your own safety,
but also that of all other road users.
●
Before changing a bulb, make sure you
have the correct new bulb.
●
Do not touch the glass part of the bulb with
your bare hands, use a cloth or paper towel
instead. The residue left by the fingerprints
»
83
Technical dataAdviceOperationEmergenciesSafety
Emergencies
would vaporise as a result of the heat gener-
ated by
the bulb, they will be deposited on
the reflector and will impair its surface.
Single headlight bulb change
Pos
ition of the bulbs
Fig. 88 Single headlight.
Side lights - Dipped beam/main beam.
T
urn s
ign
al light.
DRL (day light)
A
B
C
Turn signal and DRL (day light) light
Fig. 89 Single headlight DRL light (day light).
Fig. 90 Single turn signal lamp.
–
Raise the bonnet.
–
Turn the bulb holder ›
›
›
Fig. 89
1
or
›
›
›
Fig. 90
2
to the left and pull.
–
Remove the bulb by pressing on the bulb
ho
l
der and t
urning it anti-clockwise at the
same time.
–
Installation involves all of the above steps
in reverse sequence.
Dipped/main beam headlights and
side light
Fig. 91 Single headlight.
Fig. 92 Dipped beam/main beam and side
light
of
the s
ingle headlight.
84
Fuses and bulbs
Remove the cover
–
Raise the bonnet.
–
Move the loop ›
›
›
Fig. 91
1
in the direction
of
the arr
o
w and remove the cover.
Changing the dipped/main beam headlight
–
Remove connector ››› Fig. 92
3
from the
b
u
l
b.
–
Unclip the retainer spring ››› Fig. 92
2
pressing inwards to the right.
–
Extract the bulb and fit the replacement so
th
at
the lug on the b
ase fits into the recess
on the reflector.
–
Fit the connector.
–
Fit the cover and close the strap. Make sure
that the gasket sits well on the casing cover
during the operation.
–
Check whether the new bulb is working.
Changing the side light
–
Extract the bulb holder ››› Fig. 92
4
out-
w
ar
d
s.
–
Remove the bulb by pulling it out and fit-
ting the new one.
–
Installation involves all of the above steps
in reverse sequence.
–
Fit the cover and close the strap. Make sure
that the gasket sits well on the casing cover
during the operation.
–
Check whether the new bulb is working.
Double headlight bulb change
Position of the bulbs
Fig. 93 Double headlight.
Side lights
M
ain be
am he
adlights
Dipped beam headlights
Turn signal
DRL (LED day light)
A
B
C
D
E
Side light and main beam
Fig. 94 Double headlight.
Fig. 95 Side light and main beam headlights.
Remove the cover
–
Raise the bonnet.
–
Move the loop
1
in the direction of the ar-
r
o
w and r
emove the cover ››› Fig. 94.
»
85
Technical dataAdviceOperationEmergenciesSafety
Emergencies
Changing the side light
–
Remove connector ›
›
›
Fig. 95
2
by pulling
outw
ar
d.
–
R
emove the bulb by pulling it out and fit-
ting the new one.
–
Installation involves all of the above steps
in reverse sequence.
–
Fit the cover and close the strap. Make sure
that the gasket sits well on the casing cover
during the operation.
–
Check whether the new bulb is working.
Changing the main beam bulb
–
Remove connector ››› Fig. 95
3
by pulling
outw
ar
d.
–
Extr
act the bulb and fit the replacement so
that it sits correctly into the cut-out on the
reflector.
–
Installation involves all of the above steps
in reverse sequence.
–
Fit the cover and close the strap. Make sure
that the gasket sits well on the casing cover
during the operation.
–
Check whether the new bulb is working.
Dipped beam headlight
Fig. 96 Double headlight.
Fig. 97 Dipped beam headlights.
–
Raise the bonnet.
–
Move the loop ›
›
›
Fig. 96
1
in the direction
of
the arr
o
w and remove the cover.
–
Remove connector ››› Fig. 97
2
from the
b
u
l
b.
–
Unclip the retainer spring ››› Fig. 97
3
pressing inwards to the right.
–
Extract the bulb and fit the replacement so
th
at
the lug on the b
ase fits into the recess
on the reflector.
–
Fit the connector.
–
Fit the cover and close the strap. Make sure
that the gasket sits well on the casing cover
during the operation.
–
Check whether the new bulb is working.
Turn signal light
Fig. 98 Turn signal light.
–
Raise the bonnet.
–
Turn the bulb holder ›
›
›
Fig. 98
1
to the left
and p
u
l
l.
86
Fuses and bulbs
–
R
emo
v
e the bulb by pressing on the bulb
holder and turning it anti-clockwise at the
same time.
–
Installation involves all of the above steps
in reverse sequence.
Changing the AFS headlight
bulbs
Position of the bulbs
Fig. 99 AFS headlight bulbs.
Turn signal
X
enon he
a
dlight (dipped beam/main
beam)
A
B
Changing the xenon bulb
The procedure for changing the bulb is the
same on both side
s of the vehicle.
WARNING
This type of bulb should be changed at a spe-
cia
lised workshop.
Turn signal bulb
Fig. 100 Turn signal light.
–
Raise the bonnet.
–
Turn bulb holder ›
›
›
Fig. 100
A
to the left
and p
u
l
l.
–
Remove the bulb by pressing on the bulb
holder and turning it anti-clockwise at the
same time.
–
Installation involves all of the above steps
in reverse sequence.
Changing the fog light bulbs
Front fog light bulb
Fig. 101 Front fog light.
Fig. 102 Front fog light.
–
Remove the bolt ›
›
›
Fig. 101
1
from the fog
light
gri
l
le with a screwdriver.
–
Subsequently, remove the clips located on
the edge of the grill with gentle leverage.
»
87
Technical dataAdviceOperationEmergenciesSafety
Emergencies
–
R
emo
v
e the 3 bolts ››› Fig. 102
2
to re-
mo
v
e the f
og light.
–
Remove the metal clip situated on the up-
per part of the fog light by pulling towards
the exterior of the vehicle ››› Fig. 102
3
.
FR version fog-light bulb
Fig. 103 Fog light: access to the connector
and t
o the light
b
ulb holder.
–
Remove the 4 bolts
A
›
›
› Fig. 103
from the
inside of the wheel housing and the 2 bot-
tom bolts
B
›
›
› Fig. 103
from the bumper
with a screwdriver.
–
Pull the bumper to release it from its an-
chorages to access the connector and the
light bulb holder.
Note
Due to the difficulty of accessing fog light
bul
bs, have them replaced at a Technical
Service or specialised workshop.
Remove the bulb holder
Fig. 104 Front fog light.
–
Remove connector ›
›
›
Fig. 104
1
from the
b
u
l
b.
–
Turn the bulb holder ››› Fig. 104
2
to the
l
ef
t
and pull.
–
Remove the bulb by pressing on the bulb
holder and turning it counter-clockwise at
the same time.
–
Installation involves all of the above steps
in reverse sequence.
–
Check that the bulb works properly.
Changing the tail light bulbs
Summary of LED tail lights
LED
●
Brake lights
●
Side lights
Bul
bs
●
Retro fog light
●
Reverse lights
●
Turn signal
Access to tail lights
Fig. 105 Access to tail lights.
●
Open the rear lid.
●
Turn the bolt in the direction of the arrow,
b
y
h
and or with a screwdriver ››› Fig. 105.
88
Fuses and bulbs
●
R
emo
v
e the tail light, by pulling it out-
wards.
Changing the tail light bulbs
Fig. 106 Changing the tail light bulbs
Fig. 107 Changing the tail light bulbs
●
R
emo
v
e the connector from housing
A
››› Fig. 105.
●
Remove the bulb holder, separating it from
the c
a
s
ing. To do this, press tabs
B
in the
dir
ection of
the arr
ows ››› Fig. 106.
●
When the bulb holder has been removed,
press in the direction of the arrow
1
and at
the s
ame time, t
urn in the dir
ection of the ar-
row
2
›
›› Fig. 107
Ch
an
ging bulbs. LED lamps
Carry out the same operations as in lights fit-
ted with bulbs.
If necessary, remove the socket, as if it were
a bulb.
If the brake light and/or side light with LEDs
have to be replaced, the tail light must be re-
placed.
Changing the side and interior
bulbs
Turn signals
Fig. 108 Turn signals.
–
Press the turn signal to the left or to the
right
t
o r
emove the bulb.
–
Remove the bulb holder from the turn sig-
nal.
–
Remove the failed bulb and replace with a
new bulb.
–
Insert the bulb holder in the turn signal
guide until it clicks into place.
–
First fit the turn signal in the opening in the
chassis, fastening the tabs
1
›
›
› Fig. 108
,
and then fit in the bulb as shown by the ar-
row
2
›
›
› Fig. 108
.
89
Technical dataAdviceOperationEmergenciesSafety
Emergencies
Number plate light
–
Insert the flat part of a screwdriver into the
speci
al slot and remove the bulb.
–
Remove the bulb holder, by turning it until
it is free.
–
Change the bulb.
–
Replace the bulb holder, by turning it until
it fits fully.
–
Fit the light into the space and press until
you hear a “click”.
Additional brake light*
Given the difficulty involved in the replace-
ment
of
thi
s light it should be done by Tech-
nical Services.
Interior light and front reading lights
Fig. 109 Front reading light.
To remove the glass
–
Insert a fine screwdriver between the cas-
in
g and the gl
a
ss ››› Fig. 109.
–
Carefully remove the glass, levering it to
avoid possible damage.
To replace the bulbs
–
Pull the bulbs outwards.
–
To remove the central bulb, hold and press
to one side.
Assembly
–
Proceed in the reverse order, pressing gen-
tly on the outer edge of the side light.
–
First fit the glass with the fastening tabs
over the frame of the switch. Next press the
front part until the two long tabs click on
the support.
Luggage compartment light*
Fig. 110 Boot light.
Fig. 111 Boot light.
–
Extract the bulb by pressing on its inside
edg
e -
arr
ow- using the flat side of a screw-
driver ››› Fig. 110.
90
Operation
Fig. 112 Dash panel.
92
Controls and displays
Operation
C
ontr
o
ls and displays
General instrument panel
Door release lever
Light swit
ch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
Headlight range control* . . . . . . . . . . 121
Air vents
Lever for:
–
Turn signals/main beam head-
lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
–
Cruise c
ontrol* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
Instrument panel and warning
lamps:
–
In
struments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
–
Warning and indic
ation lamps . . . 35
Steering wheel with horn and
–
Driver airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
–
On-board computer controls . . . . 25
–
Controls for radio, telephone,
navigation and speech dialogue
system
›››
Booklet Radio
–
Paddle levers for tiptronic gear-
shift (automatic gearbox) . . . . . . . 161
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Steering and starter lock . . . . . . . . . . 147
Lever for:
–
W
ind
s
creen wipers and washer . . 123
–
Window washer-wiper system* . . 123
–
Multi-function display control* . . 25
Infotainment system:
Depending on the equipment,
glove compartment with: . . . . . . . . . 130
–
CD player* and/or SD card*
››› Booklet Radio
Passenger airbag* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Switches for:
–
Heating and ventilation . . . . . . . . . 139
–
Air conditioning* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
–
C
limatronic* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
Depending on the equipment, but-
tons
for:
–
SEAT Drive Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
–
Park a
ssist system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
–
Hazard warning lights . . . . . . . . . . 121
–
Airbag off warning lamp* . . . . . . .68, 70
Depending on the equipment:
–
USB/AUX-IN inp
ut . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
–
Cigar
ette lighter/Power socket . . 132
Drink holder/Ashtray . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
Controls in the centre console:
–
St
ar
t
-Stop operation button . . . . . 170
–
Tyre pressure monitoring* . . . . . . . 213
–
Heated rear window . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
–
Heated seats* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
–
Central locking* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
Handbrake lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
Gear lever
–
Automatic* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
–
Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
Storage space
Pedals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Steering column control lever* . . . . 13
Bonnet release lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
Fuse housing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
Control for adjusting electric exteri-
or mirrors* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
Electric window controls* . . . . . . . . . 114
Note
Some of the items of equipment listed here
are fitted on
ly on certain model versions or
are optional extras.
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
93
Technical dataAdviceOperationEmergenciesSafety
Operation
Instruments and warning/control lamps
In
s
trument
s
General instrument panel
Fig. 113 Instrument panel, on dash panel
The layout of the instruments depends upon
the model
and the en
gine.
R
ev counter (with the engine running, in
hundreds of revolutions per minute)
››› page 95.
The beginning of the red zone of the rev
counter indicates the maximum speed in
any gear after running-in and with the en-
gine hot. However, it is advisable to
1
change up a gear or move the selector
l
ev
er t
o D (or lift your foot off the acceler-
ator) before the needle reaches the red
zone ›››
.
En
gine c
oo
lant temperature display
››› page 97.
Displays on the screen ››› page 95.
Adjuster button and display
››› page 97.
2
3
4
Speedometer.
F
uel
g
auge ››› page 98.
WARNING
Any distraction may lead to an accident, with
the risk of
injury.
●
Do not operate the instrument panel con-
trols when driving.
5
6
94
Instruments and warning/control lamps
CAUTION
●
To prev
ent damage to the engine, the rev
counter needle should only remain in the red
zone for a short period of time.
●
When the engine is cold, avoid high revs
and heavy acceleration and do not make the
engine work hard.
For the sake of the environment
Changing up a gear in time reduces fuel con-
sumption and noise.
Rev counter
The rev counter indicates the number of en-
gine r
ev
o
lutions per minute
›››
Fig. 113
1
.
T
og
ether w
ith the gear-change indicator, the
rev counter offers you the possibility of using
the engine of your vehicle at a suitable
speed.
The start of the red zone on the dial indicates
the maximum engine speed which may be
used briefly when the engine is warm and af-
ter it has been run in properly. Before reach-
ing this range, you should change to a higher
gear for vehicles with a manual gearbox or for
automatic gearboxes put the selector lever in
“D” or take your foot off the accelerator ped-
al.
We recommend that you avoid high revs and
that you follow the recommendations on the
gear-change indicator. Consult the additional
information in ›››
page 28, Gear-change
indicator.
CAUTION
Never allow the rev counter needle
1
››› Fig. 113 to go int
o the red zone on the
scale for more than a very brief period, other-
wise there is a risk of engine damage.
For the sake of the environment
Changing up a gear early will help you to save
fuel and minimi
se emissions and engine
noise.
Indications on the display
A variety of information can be viewed on the
in
s
trument
panel display
›››
Fig. 113
3
de-
pendin
g on the
v
ehicle equipment:
●
Bonnet, rear lid and doors open
›››
page 28.
●
Information and warning texts.
●
Mileage.
●
Time.
●
Navigation instructions.
●
Outside temperature.
●
Compass.
●
Shift lever position ››› page 158.
●
Recommended gear (manual gearbox)
›››
page 28.
●
Multifunction display (MFD) and menus
with different setting options ›››
page 25.
●
Service interval display ›››
page 33.
●
Second speed display ›››
page 25.
●
Speed warning function ›››
page 32.
●
Start-Stop system status display
››› page 170.
●
Low consumption driving status (ECO)
››› page 96
●
Identifying letters on engine (MKB).
●
Active cylinder management display
(ACT
®
)* ››› page 165
Distance travelled
The odometer registers the total distance
travelled by the car.
The odometer (trip) shows the distance
travelled since the last odometer reset. The
last digit of the trip recorder indicates distan-
ces of 100 metres or one tenths of a mile.
●
Briefly press the button ››› Fig. 113
4
to re-
set
the trip r
ec
order to 0.
●
Keep the button
4
pressed for about 3
sec
ond
s
and the previous value will be dis-
played.
»
95
Technical dataAdviceOperationEmergenciesSafety
Operation
Time
●
To set the time, keep the button ›
›
›
Fig. 113
4
pressed for more than 3 seconds to select
the hour or minut
e di
s
play.
●
To continue setting the time, press the up-
per or lower part of the button
4
. Hold but-
t
on do
wn t
o scroll through the numbers
quickly.
●
Press the button
4
again in order to finish
settin
g the time.
The time c
an al
so be set via the
key and
Set
up
function button in the Easy Connect
sy
s
t
em ››› page 99.
Compass
With the ignition on and the navigation sys-
tem on, the cardinal point corresponding to
the direction of travel of the vehicle is dis-
played on the instrument panel.
Selector lever position
The selected gear is displayed on the side of
the selector lever and on the instrument pan-
el display. In positions D and S, and with the
Tiptronic, the corresponding gear is also dis-
played.
Recommended gear (manual gearbox)
The recommended gear in order to save fuel
is displayed on the instrument panel while
you are driving ›››
page 28.
Second speed display (mph or km/h)
In addition to the speedometer, the speed
can also be displayed in a different unit of
measurement (in miles or in km per hour).
This option cannot be deactivated in models
destined for countries in which the second
speed must always be visible.
The second speed display can be adjusted in
the Easy Connect system via the
key and
the
Set
up
function button ›
›
›
page 99.
Speed warning
When the speed setting is exceeded, this will
be indicated on the instrument panel display.
This is very useful, for example when using
winter tyres that are not designed for driving
at the maximum speed of the vehicle
›››
page 32.
The speed warning settings can be adjusted
in the Easy Connect system via the
key
and the
Set
up
function button ›
›
›
page 99.
Start-Stop operating display
Updated information relating to the status is
displayed on the instrument panel
››› page 170.
Low consumption driving status (ECO)*
Depending on the equipment, when driving,
the “ECO” display appears on the instrument
panel when the vehicle is in low consump-
tion status due to active cylinder manage-
ment (ACT
®
)* ›››
page 30.
Identifying letters on engine (MKB)
Hold the button ››› Fig. 113
4
down for more
th
an 15 sec
ond
s to display the identifying
letters of the vehicle engine (MKB). To do
this, the ignition must be switched on and
the engine switched off.
WARNING
Observe the safety warnings ›››
in Warning
symbols on p
age 99.
WARNING
Even though outside temperatures are above
freezin
g, some roads and bridges may be icy.
●
At outside temperatures above +4°C
(+39°F), even when the “ice crystal symbol”
is not visible, there may still be patches of ice
on the road.
●
Do not rely on the outside temperature in-
dicator!
Note
●
Different
versions of the instrument panel
are available and therefore the versions and
instructions on the display may vary. In the
case of displays without warning or informa-
tion texts, faults are indicated exclusively by
the warning lamps.
96
Instruments and warning/control lamps
●
Depending on the equipment, some set
-
tings and instructions can also be carried out
in the Easy Connect system.
●
When several warnings are active at the
same time, the symbols are shown succes-
sively for a few seconds and will stay on until
the fault is rectified.
Odometer
Fig. 114 Instrument panel: odometer and re-
set
b
utt
on.
The distance covered is displayed in “kilome-
tr
e
s” or mi
les “m”. It is possible to change
the measurement units (kilometres
“km”/miles “m”) in the radio/Easy Connect*.
Please refer to the Easy Connect* Instructions
Manual for more details.
Odometer/trip recorder
The odometer shows the total distance cov-
ered by the vehicle.
The trip recorder shows the distance that has
been travelled since it was last reset. It is
used to measure short trips. The last digit of
the trip recorder indicates distances of 100
metres or tenths of a mile.
The trip recorder can be set to zero by press-
ing
0.0/SET
›
›› Fig. 114
.
F
ault display
If there is a fault in the instrument panel, the
letters DEF will appear in the trip recorder
display. Have the fault repaired immediately,
as far as is possible.
Coolant temperature gauge
For vehicles with no coolant temperature
g
aug
e, a c
ontrol lamp appears for high
coolant temperatures
›››
page 204. Please
note
›››
.
The c
oo
l
ant temperature gauge
2
›››
Fig. 113 only w
orks when the ignition is
switched on. In order to avoid engine dam-
age, please read the following notes for the
different temperature ranges.
Engine cold
If only
the diodes in the lower part of the
scale light up, this indicates that the engine
has not yet reached operating temperature.
Avoid high revs and heavy acceleration and
do not make the engine work hard.
Normal temperature
If in normal operations, the diodes light up
until the central zone, it means that the en-
gine has reached operating temperature. At
high outside temperatures and when making
the engine work hard, the diodes may contin-
ue lighting up and reach the upper zone. This
is no cause for concern, provided the control
lamp does not light up on the instrument
panel digital display.
Heat range
When the diodes light up in the upper area of
the display and the control lamp appears
on the instrument panel display, the coolant
temperature is excessive ››› page 204.
CAUTION
●
To ens
ure a long useful life for the engine,
avoid high revs, driving at high speed and
making the engine work hard for approxi-
mately the first 15 minutes when the engine
is cold. The phase until the engine is warm al-
so depends on the outside temperature. If
necessary, use the engine oil temperature*
›››
page 31 as a guide.
»
97
Technical dataAdviceOperationEmergenciesSafety
Operation
●
Additiona
l lights and other accessories in
front of the air inlet reduce the cooling effect
of the coolant. At high outside temperatures
and high engine loads, there is a risk of the
engine overheating.
●
The front spoiler also ensures proper distri-
bution of the cooling air when the vehicle is
moving. If the spoiler is damaged this can re-
duce the cooling effect, which could cause
the engine to overheat. Seek specialist assis-
tance.
Fuel level
Fig. 115 Fuel gauge.
The display
6
›
›
› Fig. 113
only works when
the ignition is switched on. When the display
reaches the reserve mark, the lower diode
lights up in red and the control lamp ap-
pears ››› page 94. When the fuel level is very
low, the lower diode flashes in red.
The distance to empty fuel level is displayed
on the instrument panel
3
›
›› Fig. 113
.
Y
ou can consult the tank capacity of your ve-
hicle in the ›››
page 40 section.
CAUTION
Never run the fuel tank completely dry. An ir-
regu
lar fuel supply could cause misfiring. In
this way the unburned fuel can reach the ex-
haust system, which could cause the catalytic
converter to overheat resulting in damage.
Warning and control lamps
W
arnin
g symbo
ls
Read the additional information carefully
›
›
›
page 35
There are red warning symbols (priority 1)
and yellow warning symbols (priority 2).
Warning messages, Priority 1 (red)
If one of these faults occurs, the warning
lamp will light up or flash and will be accom-
panied by three audible warnings. This is a
danger warning. Stop the vehicle and switch
off the engine. Check the fault and correct it.
Obtain professional assistance if necessary.
If several priority 1 faults are detected at the
same time, the symbols will be displayed one
after the other for about 2 seconds at a time
and will continue until the fault is corrected.
No menus will be shown in the display for the
duration of a priority 1 warning message.
Examples of priority 1 warning messages
(red)
●
Brake system symbol with the warning
message STOP BRAKE FLUID INSTRUC-
TION MANUAL or STOP BRAKE FAULT IN-
STRUCTION MANUAL.
●
Coolant symbol with the warning mes-
sage STOP SEE COOLANT INSTRUCTION
MANUAL.
●
Engine oil pressure symbol with the
warning message STOP ENGINE OIL
PRESSURE LOW! INSTRUCTION MANUAL.
Warning messages, Priority 2 (yellow)
If one of these faults occurs, the correspond-
ing warning lamp lights up and is accompa-
nied by an audible warning. Check the corre-
sponding function as soon as possible al-
though the vehicle may be used without risk.
If several priority 2 warning messages are de-
tected at the same time, the symbols are dis-
played one after the other for about 2 sec-
onds at a time. After a set time, the informa-
tion text will disappear and the symbol will
be shown as a reminder at the side of the
display.
98
Introduction to the Easy Connect system*
Priority 2 w
arning messages will not be
sho
wn u
ntil all Priority 1 warning messages
have been dealt with!
Examples of priority 2 warning reports (yel-
low):*
●
Fuel warning light with the information text
PLEASE REFUEL.
WARNING
If the warning lamps and messages are ignor-
ed, the vehic
le may stall in traffic, or may
cause accidents and severe injuries.
●
Never ignore the warning lamps or text
messages.
●
Stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible.
●
Park the vehicle away from traffic and en-
sure that there are no highly flammable ma-
terials under the vehicle that could come into
contact with the exhaust system (e.g. dry
grass, fuel).
●
A faulty vehicle represents a risk of acci-
dent for the driver and for other road users. If
necessary, switch on the hazard warning
lamps and put out the warning triangle to ad-
vise other drivers.
●
Before opening the bonnet, switch off the
engine and allow it to cool.
●
In any vehicle, the engine compartment is a
hazardous area and could cause severe inju-
ries ››› page 198.
CAUTION
Failure to heed the control lamps and text
mess
ages when they appear may result in
faults in the vehicle.
Introduction to the Easy
C
onnect
sy
stem*
System settings (CAR)*
CAR menu (Setup)
Read the additional information carefully
›››
page 24
To select the settings menus, press the Easy
Connect
button and the
Set
up
function
b
utt
on.
The act
ual number of menus available and
the name of the various options in these me-
nus will depend on the vehicle’s electronics
and equipment.
Pressing the menu button will always take
you to the last menu used.
When the function button check box is activa-
ted , the function is active.
Pressing the menu button
will always take
y
ou t
o the l
ast menu used.
Any changes made using the settings menus
are automatically saved on closing those me-
nus.
»
99
Technical dataAdviceOperationEmergenciesSafety
Operation
Function buttons in the
vehicle settings
menu
Page
ESC system ››› page 152
Tyres ››› page 213
Driver assistance ››› table on page 24
Parking and manoeuvring ››› page 173
Vehicle lights ››› table on page 24
Mirrors and windscreen wipers ››› table on page 24
Opening and closing ››› table on page 24
Multifunction display ››› table on page 24
Date and time ››› table on page 24
Units ››› table on page 24
Service ››› page 95
Factory settings ››› table on page 24
WARNING
Any distraction may lead to an accident, with
the risk of
injury. Operating the Easy Connect
system while driving could distract you from
traffic.
100
Communications and multimedia
Communications and multi-
medi
a
St
eerin
g wheel controls*
General information
The steering wheel includes a multifunction
module fr
om where it is possible to control
the audio, telephone and radio/navigation
functions without needing to distract the
driver.
There are two versions of the multifunction
module:
●
Audio system + telephone without voice
contro
l version (MID): for controlling the au-
dio functions available (radio, audio CD,
MP3, iPod
®1)
, USB
1)
, SD
1)
) and Bluetooth sys-
tem from the steering wheel.
●
Audio system + telephone with voice con-
trol version (HIGH): for controlling the audio
functions available (radio, audio CD, MP3,
iPod
®1)
, USB
1)
, SD
1)
) and Bluetooth system
from the steering wheel.
1)
Depending on the vehicle equipment.
101
Technical dataAdviceOperationEmergenciesSafety
Operation
Operating the telephone and audio system without voice control (MID)
Fig. 116 Controls on the steering wheel.
Button Radio Media (except AUX) AUX Telephone Navigation
A
Turn: Turn volume up/down
Press: Mute
Turn: Turn volume up/down
Press: Mute
Turn: Turn volume up/down
Press: Mute
Turn: Turn volume up/down
Press: Mute
Turn: Turn volume up/down
Press: Mute
B
Short press: access to the tele-
phone menu in the instrument
panel
a)
.
Short press: access to the tele-
phone menu in the instrument
panel
a)
.
Short press: access to the tele-
phone menu in the instrument
panel
a)
.
Short press: answer/hang up
calls, enable/open the tele-
phone menu.
Hold down: reject an incoming
call/switch to private mode/re-
dial
a)
.
Short press: access to the tele-
phone menu in the instrument
panel
a)
.
C
Search for last station
Short press: switch to the previ-
ous song
Hold down: quick rewind
No function No function No function
D
Search for the next station
Short press: switch to the next
song
Hold down: fast forward
No function No function No function
E
,
F
Change menu on instrument
panel
a)
Change menu on instrument
panel
a)
Change menu on instrument
panel
a)
Change menu on instrument
panel
a)
Change menu on instrument
panel
a)
G
MID: change source MID: change source MID: change source MID: change source MID: change source
102
Communications and multimedia
Button Radio Media (except AUX) AUX Telephone Navigation
H
Turn: Next/previous preset
b)
Press: Acts on the MFD
Turn: Next/previous song
b)
Press: Acts on the MFD
Turn: No function
Press: Acts on the MFD
Turn: Acts on the MFD
Press: Confirm
Turn: Changes menu or memory
on instrument panel
Press: Operates on instrument
panel
a)
According to the vehicle's equipment package.
b)
Only if the dash panel is in audio menu.
Operating the telephone and audio system with voice control (HIGH)
Fig. 117 Controls on the steering wheel.
Button Radio Media (except AUX) AUX Telephone
a)
Navigation
a)
A
Turn: Turn volume up/down
Press: Mute
Turn: Turn volume up/down
Press: Mute
Turn: Turn volume up/down
Press: Mute
Turn: Turn volume up/down
Press: Mute
Turn: Turn volume up/down
Press: Mute
B
Short press: access to the tele-
phone menu on the dash pan-
el
a)
.
Hold down: redial
a)
Short press: access to the tele-
phone menu on the dash pan-
el
a)
.
Hold down: redial
a)
Short press: access to the tele-
phone menu on the dash pan-
el
a)
.
Hold down: redial
a)
Short press: answer/hang up
calls, enable/open the tele-
phone menu.
Hold down: reject an incoming
call/switch to private/redial
mode
Short press: access to the tele-
phone menu on the dash pan-
el
a)
.
Hold down: redial
a)
»
103
Technical dataAdviceOperationEmergenciesSafety
Operation
Button Radio Media (except AUX) AUX Telephone
a)
Navigation
a)
C
Search for last station
Short press: switch to the previ-
ous song
Hold down: quick rewind
No function No function
b)
Radio/media functionality (ex-
cept AUX )
D
Search for the next station
Short press: switch to the next
song
Hold down: fast forward
No function No function
b)
Radio/media functionality (ex-
cept AUX )
E
,
F
Change menu on instrument
panel
Change menu on instrument
panel
Change menu on instrument
panel
Change menu on instrument
panel
Change menu on instrument
panel
G
Enable/disable voice control
a)
Enable/disable voice control
a)
Enable/disable voice control
a)
No function
b)
Enable/disable voice control
H
Turn: Next/previous preset
c)
Press: Acts on the MFD or con-
firms the menu option of the
dash panel depending on the
menu option
Turn: Next/previous song
c)
Press: Acts on the MFD or con-
firms the menu option of the
dash panel depending on the
menu option
Turn: Acts upon the dash panel
menu depending on where it is
located
Press: Acts on the MFD or con-
firms the menu option of the
dash panel depending on the
menu option
Turn: Acts upon the dash panel
menu depending on where it is
located
Press: Acts on the MFD or con-
firms the menu option of the
dash panel depending on the
menu option
Turn: Acts upon the dash panel
menu depending on where it is
located
Press: Acts on the MFD or con-
firms the menu option of the
dash panel depending on the
menu option
a)
According to the vehicle's equipment package.
b)
When a call is being made, radio/media functionality (except AUX).
c)
Only if the dash panel is in audio menu.
104
Communications and multimedia
Multimedia
USB/A
UX
-IN inp
ut
Fig. 118 USB/AUX-IN input.
Depending on the features and the country,
the
v
ehic
le may have a USB/AUX-IN connec-
tion.
The USB/AUX-IN input is located above the
storage compartment in the front centre con-
sole ››› Fig. 118.
The operating description is located in the re-
spective Instruction Manuals of the audio
system or the navigation system.
105
Technical dataAdviceOperationEmergenciesSafety
Operation
Opening and closing
C
entr
a
l locking system
Description
Read the additional information carefully
›››
page 9.
The central locking system enables you to
lock and unlock all doors and the rear lid by
just pushing the button.
Central locking can be activated by using any
of the following options:
●
the key, by inserting it into the driver door
cylinder and rot
ating it in the opening direc-
tion. Depending on the vehicle version, ei-
ther all doors will be unlocked or only the
driver door will be unlocked. All doors will be
locked on locking the vehicle using the key.
●
the interior central lock button
›››
page 108.
●
the radio frequency remote control, using
the buttons on the key
›››
page 110.
Various functions are available to improve
the vehicle safety:
Locking system “Safe*”
Selective* unlocking system
Self-locking system to prevent involunta-
ry unlocking
–
–
–
Automatic speed dependent locking and
unlocking system*
Emergency unlocking system
Unlocking the vehicle*
Press button
›
›› Fig. 122
on r
emote
control to unlock all the doors and rear
lid.
Locking the vehicle*
Press button
›
›› Fig. 122
on the r
e-
mote control to lock all doors and the
rear lid or turn the key in the door to lock
all doors and the rear lid.
WARNING
●
Lock
ing from the outside carelessly or with-
out good visibility may lead to bruising, par-
ticularly in the case of children.
●
When locking a vehicle, never leave chil-
dren unaccompanied inside, as from the out-
side it will be difficult to provide assistance if
required.
●
Having the doors locked prevents intruders
from getting in, for example when stopped at
a traffic light.
Note
For anti-theft security, only the driver door is
fitted with a loc
k cylinder.
–
–
–
–
“Safe” security system**
This is an anti-theft device which consists of
a double loc
k for the door locks and a deacti-
vation function for the boot in order to pre-
vent forced entry.
Activation
The “safe” system is activated when the vehi-
cle is locked using the key or the remote con-
trol.
To activate it with the key, rotate once it is in-
serted in the door lock cylinder in the locking
direction.
To activate the system using the remote con-
trol, press the lock button once
on the re-
mot
e.
Onc
e thi
s system is activated, opening doors
from the outside and the inside is not possi-
ble. The rear lid can not be opened. The cen-
tral lock button does not work.
When the ignition is switched off, the instru-
ment panel display indicates that the “Safe”
system is on.
Deactivation
Rotate the key inserted in the lock cylinder
twice towards the locking direction.
To activate the system using the remote con-
trol, press the lock button on the remote
twice
in less than five seconds.
106
Opening and closing
On deactivating the “Safe” system, the alarm
v
o
lumetric
sensor is also deactivated.
With the “Safe” switched off, doors can be
opened from the interior but not from the ex-
terior.
See “Selective unlocking system*”
“Safe” status
On the driver door, there is warning lamp visi-
ble from outside the vehicle through the win-
dow which shows the “Safe” system status.
We will know that “Safe” system is activated
by the flashing warning lamp. The indicator
will flash on all vehicles, fitted and nor fitted
with an alarm, until they unlock.
Remember:
Safe activated with or without an alarm:
warning lamp flashes continuously.
Safe deactivated without an alarm: the warn-
ing lamp stays off.
Safe deactivated with an alarm: the warning
lamp stays off.
WARNING
No one should remain inside the vehicle if the
“Safe” sys
tem is activated because opening
the doors will not be possible in the event of
an emergency neither from the inside nor the
outside and help from the outside is made
difficult. Danger of death. Passengers could
become trap
ped inside in case of emergency.
Selective unlocking system*
This system allows to unlock either just the
driver door or all
the vehicle.
Driver door unlock button
Unlock once. Use either the key or the remote
control.
Once the key is inserted in the lock cylinder,
rotate once in the unlock direction. The driver
door will remain without “Safe” and un-
locked. In vehicles fitted with an alarm, see
the Anti-theft Alarm section ››› page 111.
Using the remote control, press the unlock
button on the remote
once. The “Safe”
sy
s
t
em for all the vehicle is deactivated, only
the driver door is unlocked and both the
alarm and the warning lamp are also turned
off.
Unlocking all doors and the luggage com-
partment
The unlock button on the remote control
must be pressed twice
so that all doors
and the lug
g
ag
e compartment can be
opened.
Press twice within 5 seconds to deactivate
the “Safe” system for all vehicle, to unlock all
doors and to use the luggage compartment.
The warning lamp and the alarm (only vehi-
cles fitted with one) are turned off.
Unlocking the luggage compartment
See ›››
page 9.
Activating the selective unlocking system*
With the door open, insert a key into the start
cylinder and start the ignition. Insert the oth-
er key into the driver door lock and turn in the
opening direction for at least 3 seconds. The
turn signals will flash twice.
Deactivating the selective unlocking system*
With the door open, insert a key into the start
cylinder and start the ignition. Insert the oth-
er key into the driver door lock and turn in the
locking direction for at least 3 seconds. The
turn signals will flash once.
Self-locking system to prevent invol-
untary unlocking
It is an anti-theft system and prevents the un-
int
ention
al
unlocking of the vehicle.
If the vehicle is unlocked and none of the
doors (including the boot) are opened within
30 seconds, it re-locks automatically.
107
Technical dataAdviceOperationEmergenciesSafety
Operation
Automatic speed-dependent locking
and u
n
loc
king system*
This is a safety system which prevents access
to the v
ehicle from the outside when it is run-
ning (e.g. when stopped at a traffic light).
Locking
The doors will lock automatically if the speed
of 15 km/h (9 mph) is exceeded. The rear lid
will lock automatically if the speed of 6 km/h
(4 mph) is exceeded.
If the vehicle is stopped and any of its doors
open, when starting again and exceeding the
mentioned speed, all doors will lock again.
Unlocking
On withdrawing the ignition key, the vehicle
will returns to its status prior to self-locking.
Each door can be unlocked and opened inde-
pendently from the inside (for example, when
a passenger gets out). To do it, simply oper-
ate the lever inside the door.
Activating the system*
With the ignition on, press the locking key on
the central locking system within 3 to 10 sec-
onds.
Deactivating the system*
With the ignition on, pre
ss the unlocking key
on the central locking system within 3 to 10
seconds.
In both cases, if the operation has been car-
ried out correctly, the locking lamp will flash
›
›› Fig. 119
.
WARNING
The door handles must not be operated when
the vehic
le is running: the door would open.
Note
If the airbags are triggered during an acci-
dent, the vehic
le is unlocked, except for the
luggage compartment. It is possible to lock
the vehicle from inside with the central lock-
ing, after turning the ignition off and back on
again.
Central lock button*
Fig. 119 Central lock button.
Read the additional information carefully
›
›
›
page 9
The central lock button allows you to lock and
unlock the vehicle from the inside.
The central lock button also works with the
ignition switched off, except when the “safe”
system is activated.
Please note the following if you lock your ve-
hicle with the central lock button:
●
Locking the doors and rear lid prevents ac-
cess from the outside (for safety reasons, e.g.
when stopped at a traffic light).
●
The driver door cannot be locked while it is
open. This avoids the user from forgetting his
key inside the vehicle.
108
Opening and closing
●
A
l
l
doors can be unlocked separately from
inside the vehicle. Do this by pulling the door
release lever once.
WARNING
●
If the v
ehicle is locked, children and disa-
bled people may be trapped inside it.
●
Repeated operation of central locking will
prevent the central lock button from working
for a few seconds. Then, it can only be un-
locked in case it has been previously locked.
After few seconds, the central locking be-
comes operative again.
●
The central lock button is not operative
when the vehicle is locked from the outside
(with the remote control or the key).
Note
●
Vehicl
e locked,
button.
●
Vehicle unlocked,
button.
Childproof lock
3 Valid for vehicles: 5-door versions
Fig. 120 Childproof lock on the left hand side
door
.
The childproof lock prevents the rear doors
fr
om bein
g opened fr
om the inside. This sys-
tem prevents minors from opening a door ac-
cidentally while the vehicle is running.
This function is independent of the vehicle
electronic opening and locking systems. It
only affects rear doors. It can only be activa-
ted and deactivated manually, as described
below:
Activating the childproof lock
–
Unlock the vehicle and open the door in
which you wish to activate the childproof
lock.
–
With the door open, rotate the groove in
the door using the ignition key, anti-clock-
wise for the left-hand side doors ››› Fig. 120
and clockwise for the right-hand side
doors.
Deactivating the childproof lock
–
Unlock the vehicle and open the door
whose childproof lock you want to deacti-
vate.
–
With the door open, rotate the groove in
the door using the ignition key, anti-clock-
wise for the right-hand side doors, and
clockwise for the left-hand side doors
››› Fig. 120.
Once the childproof lock is activated, the
door can only be opened from the outside.
The childproof lock can be activated or deac-
tivated by inserting the key in the groove
when the door is open, as described above.
109
Technical dataAdviceOperationEmergenciesSafety
Operation
Keys
Set
of
k
eys
Fig. 121 Set of keys.
The set of keys may consists of the following,
dependin
g on the
v
ersion of your vehicle:
●
a remote control key ››› Fig. 121
A
●
a key without remote control
B
,
●
a plastic key tab*
C
.
or
●
two keys without remote control
B
●
a plastic key tab*
C
.
D
up
lic
ate keys
If you need a replacement key, go to a Techni-
cal Service with your vehicle identification
number.
WARNING
●
An incorrect
use of the keys can cause seri-
ous injuries.
●
Never leave children or disabled persons in
the vehicle. In case of emergency, they may
not be able to leave the vehicle or manage on
their own.
●
An uncontrolled use of the key could start
the engine or activate any electric equipment
(e.g. electric windows), causing risk of acci-
dent. The doors can be locked using the re-
mote control key. This could become an ob-
stacle for assistance in an emergency situa-
tion.
●
Never forget the keys inside the vehicle. An
unauthorised use of your vehicle could result
in injury, damage or theft. Therefore always
take the key with you when you leave the ve-
hicle.
●
Never remove the key from the ignition if
the vehicle is in motion. Otherwise, the steer-
ing could suddenly block and it would be im-
possible to steer the vehicle.
CAUTION
There are electronic components in the re-
mote contr
ol key. Avoid wetting and hitting
the keys.
Radio frequency remote con-
tr
o
l*
Un
locking and locking the vehicle
Fig. 122 Assignment of buttons on the re-
mot
e c
ontr
ol key.
Fig. 123 Range of the radio frequency remote
c
ontr
o
l.
110
Opening and closing
The radio frequency remote control key is
u
sed t
o loc
k and unlock the vehicle from a
distance.
By using button
4
›
›› Fig. 122
on the c
ontrol,
the key shaft is released.
Unlocking the vehicle
›
›› Fig. 122
1
.
L
oc
k
ing the vehicle
›
›› Fig. 122
2
.
Un
loc
k
ing the rear lid. Press button
››› Fig. 122
3
until all the turn signals on the
v
ehic
l
e flash briefly. When the unlocking but-
ton
3
is pressed, you have 2 minutes to
open the door
. Onc
e thi
s time has passed, it
will lock again.
Moreover, the battery indicator on the key
››› Fig. 122 (arrow), will flash.
The remote control transmitter and the bat-
teries are integrated in the key. The receiver
is inside the vehicle. The maximum range de-
pends on different factors. The range is re-
duced as the batteries start to lose power.
WARNING
Read and observe the relevant warnings ›››
in Set of keys on page 110.
Note
●
The radio fr
equency remote control key
functions only when you are within range
››› Fig. 123.
●
If the v
ehicle cannot be unlocked or locked
by using the radio frequency remote control,
the remote control key will have to be re-
synchronised. For this, go to your technical
services.
Replacing the battery
If the battery indicator does not flash when
the button
s are pushed, the battery must be
replaced.
CAUTION
The use of inappropriate batteries may dam-
age the ra
dio frequency remote control. For
this reason, always replace the dead battery
with another of the same size and power.
For the sake of the environment
Used batteries must be disposed of at an ap-
propriat
e waste facility or through an author-
ised service, given that their components can
affect the environment.
Synchronising the remote control key
If it is not possible to unlock or lock the door
w
ith the r
emot
e control, it should be re-
synchronised.
While the vehicle is open:
–
Press the
button
2
›
›› Fig. 122
on the
r
emote control.
–
Then close the vehicle using the key shaft
within one minute.
While the vehicle is closed:
–
Press the
button
1
›
›› Fig. 122
on the
r
emote control.
–
Then close the vehicle using the key shaft
within one minute.
It is possible that the vehicle could no longer
be opened and closed with the remote con-
trol if the button
is repeatedly pressed
outs
ide of
the eff
ective range of the radio fre-
quency remote control. The remote control
key will have to be resynchronised.
Spare remote control keys are available at
your Technical Service, where they must be
matched to the locking system.
Up to five remote control keys can be used.
Anti-theft alarm*
Description of anti-theft alarm sys-
tem*
The anti-theft alarm makes it more difficult to
br
e
ak
into the vehicle or steal it. The system
»
111
Technical dataAdviceOperationEmergenciesSafety
Operation
will initiate acoustic and optical warning sig-
n
al
s
when your vehicle is tried to be forced.
The anti-theft alarm system is automatically
switched on when locking the vehicle. The
system is immediately activated and the turn
signal light located on the driver door will
flash along with the turn signals, indicating
that the alarm and the locking security sys-
tem (double lock) have been turned on.
If any of the doors or the bonnet are open,
they will not be included in the protection
zones of the vehicle when the alarm is con-
nected. If the door or the bonnet are subse-
quently closed, they will be automatically in-
cluded in the protection areas of the vehicle
and the turn signals will flash accordingly
when the doors close.
●
The turn signal light will flash twice on
opening and deactivating the alarm.
●
The turn signal light will flash once on clos-
ing and activating the alarm.
When does the system trigger an alarm?
The system triggers an alarm, if the following
unauthorised actions are carried out when
the vehicle is locked:
●
Mechanical opening of the vehicle with the
vehicle key without switching on the ignition
in the next 15 seconds (in certain markets,
such as the Netherlands, the alarm is activa-
ted immediately).
●
A door is opened.
●
Opening the bonnet.
●
The rear lid is opened.
●
Ignition switched on with a non-validated
key.
●
Movements in the driving compartment
(vehicles with a volume sensor).
●
Towing of the vehicle
1)
.
●
Vehicle tilt angle
1)
.
●
Undue manipulation of the alarm.
●
Battery handling.
In this case, the acoustic signals will go off
and the turn signal will flash for approximate-
ly 30 seconds. This cycle may be repeated up
to 10 times depending on the country.
Opening all the doors in manual mode
In vehicles without an alarm, when opening
the driver door manually, all doors are
opened.
How to switch the alarm off
To deactivate the anti-theft alarm, turn the
key in the opening direction, open the door
and switch the ignition on, or press the un-
lock button
on the remote control.
In
v
ehic
les equipped with an anti-theft alarm
system, you have 15 seconds to insert the
key in the ignition lock and activate the igni-
tion if the vehicle is opened using the driver
door key.
Otherwise, the alarm will trigger for 30 sec.
and the ignition will be blocked.
Note
●
After 28 d
ays, the indicator light will be
switched off to prevent the battery from
draining if the vehicle has been left parked
for a long period of time. The alarm system
remains activated.
●
The alarm will trigger again if attempts are
made to open another protection zone.
●
The alarm system can be activated or deac-
tivated using the radio frequency remote con-
trol ››› page 110.
●
The anti-theft alarm is not activated when
the vehicle is locked from within using the
central locking button
.
●
If the vehicle battery is run down or flat
then the anti-theft a
larm will not operate cor-
rectly.
●
Vehicle monitoring remains active even if
the battery is disconnected or not working for
any reason.
1)
With vehicles fitted with a tow-away protection
112
Opening and closing
●
The alarm i
s triggered immediately if one of
the battery cables is disconnected while the
alarm system is active.
Vehicle interior monitoring and anti-
tow sy
stem*
Monitoring or control function incorporated
in the anti-theft al
arm* which detects unau-
thorised vehicle entry by means of ultra-
sound.
Activation
–
It is automatically switched on when the
anti-theft al
arm is activated.
Deactivation
–
Open the vehicle with the key, either me-
chanically or by pressing the
button on
the r
emot
e c
ontrol. The time period from
when the door is opened until the key is in-
serted into the contact should not exceed
15 seconds, otherwise the alarm will be
triggered.
–
Press the button
on the remote control
tw
ic
e.
The volumetric sensor and tilt sen-
sors will be deactivated. The alarm system
remains activated.
The vehicle interior monitoring and the anti-
tow system are automatically switched on
again next time the vehicle is locked.
The vehicle interior monitoring and anti-tow
sensor (tilt sensor) are automatically switch-
ed on when the anti-theft alarm is switched
on. In order to activate it, all the doors and
the rear lid must be closed.
If you wish to switch off the vehicle interior
monitoring and the anti-tow system, it must
be done each time that the vehicle is locked;
if not, they will be automatically switched on.
The vehicle interior monitoring and the anti-
tow system should be switched off if animals
are left inside the locked vehicle (otherwise,
their movements will trigger the alarm) or
when, for example, the vehicle is transported
or has to be towed with only one axle on the
ground.
False alarms
Interior monitoring will only operate correctly
if the vehicle is completely closed. Please ob-
serve related legal requirements.
The following cases may cause a false alarm:
●
Open windows (partially or fully),
●
Tilting panoramic sunroof open (partially or
completely),
●
Movement of objects inside the vehicle,
such as loose papers, items hanging from
the rear vision mirror (air fresheners), etc.
Note
●
If the v
ehicle is relocked and the alarm is
activated without the volumetric sensor func-
tion, relocking will activate the alarm with all
its functions, except the volumetric sensor.
This function is reactivated when the alarm is
switched on again, unless it is deliberately
switched off.
●
If the alarm has been triggered by the volu-
metric sensor, this will be indicated by a
flashing of the warning lamp on the driver
door when the vehicle is opened. The flash is
different to the flash indicating the alarm is
activated.
●
The vibration of a mobile phone left inside
the vehicle may cause the vehicle interior
monitoring alarm to trigger, as both sensors
react to movements and shakes inside the ve-
hicle.
●
If on activating the alarm, any door or the
rear lid is open, only the alarm will be activa-
ted. The vehicle interior monitoring and the
anti-tow system will only be activated once
all the doors are closed (including the rear
lid).
Boot hatch
Openin
g and c
lo
sing
Read the additional information carefully
›
›
›
page 9
»
113
Technical dataAdviceOperationEmergenciesSafety
Operation
WARNING
●
Alwa
ys close the rear lid properly. Risk of
accident or injury.
●
The rear lid must not be opened when the
reverse or rear fog lights are lit. This may
damage the tail lights.
●
Do not close the rear lid by pushing it down
with your hand on the rear window. The glass
could smash. Risk of injury!
●
Ensure the rear lid is locked after closing it.
If not, it may open unexpectedly while driv-
ing.
●
Never allow children to play in or around
the vehicle. A locked vehicle can be subjected
to extremely high and low temperatures, de-
pending on the time of year, thus causing se-
rious injuries/illness. It could even have fatal
consequences. Close and lock both the rear
lid and all the other doors when you are not
using the vehicle.
●
Closing the rear lid without observing and
ensuring it is clear could cause serious injury
to you and to third parties. Make sure that no
one is in the path of the rear lid.
●
Never drive with the rear lid open or half-
closed, exhaust gases may enter into the in-
terior of the vehicle. Danger of poisoning!
●
If you only open the rear lid, do not leave
the key inside. The vehicle cannot be opened
if the key is left inside.
Electric windows
Openin
g and c
lo
sing of the electric
windows*
Fig. 124 Detail of the driver door: controls for
the fr
ont
and r
ear windows (5-door vehicles
with front and rear electric windows).
Read the additional information carefully
›
›
›
page 11
The front and rear electric windows can be
operated by using the controls on the driver
door. The other doors each have a switch for
their own window.
Always close the windows fully if you park
the vehicle or leave it unattended ›››
.
Y
ou c
an u
se the electric windows for approx.
10 minutes after switching off the ignition if
neither the driver door nor the front passen-
ger door has been opened and the key has
not been removed from the ignition.
Safety switch not pressed: buttons on rear
doors are activated.
Safety switch pressed: buttons on rear doors
are deactivated.
WARNING
Observe the safety warnings ›››
in Set of
keys on p
age 110.
●
Incorrect use of the electric windows can
result in injury.
●
Never close the rear lid without observing
and ensuring it is clear, to do otherwise could
cause serious injury to you and third parties.
Make sure that no one is in the path of a win-
dow.
●
If the ignition is switched on, the electric
equipment could be activated with risk of in-
jury, for example, in the electric windows.
●
The doors can be locked using the remote
control key. This could become an obstacle
for assistance in an emergency situation.
●
Therefore always take the key with you
when you leave the vehicle.
●
The electric windows will work until the ig-
nition has been switched off and one of the
front doors has been opened.
●
If necessary, use the safety switch to disa-
ble the rear electric windows. Make sure that
they have been disabled.
114
Opening and closing
Note
If the window is not able to close because it
is s
tiff or because of an obstruction, the win-
dow will automatically open again
››› page 115. If this happens, check why the
window could not be closed before attempt-
ing to close it again.
One-touch opening and closing*
One-touch opening and closing means you
do not hav
e to hold down the button.
Buttons
›››
Fig. 124
1
,
2
,
4
and
5
have
tw
o po
s
itions for opening windows and two
for closing them. This makes it easier to open
and close windows to the desired position.
One-touch closing
–
Pull up the window button briefly up to the
second position. The window closes fully.
One-touch opening
–
Push down the window button briefly up to
the second position. The window opens
fully.
Resetting one-touch opening and closing
–
The automatic open and close function will
not work if the battery has been temporari-
ly disconnected. The function can be re-
stored as follows:
–
Close the window as far as it will go by lift-
ing and holding the electric window switch.
–
Release the switch and then lift it again for
1 second. This will re-enable the automatic
function.
If you push (or pull) a button to the first
stage, the window will open (or close) until
you release the button. If you push or lift the
button briefly to the second stage, the win-
dow will open (one-touch opening) or close
(one-touch closing) automatically. If you op-
erate the button while the window is opening
or closing, it stops at this position.
Roll-back function
The roll-back function reduces the risk of in-
jur
y
when the el
ectric windows close.
●
If a window is obstructed when closing au-
tomatically, the window stops at this point
and lowers immediately
›››
.
●
Next, check why the window does not close
bef
or
e att
empting it again.
●
If you try within the following 10 seconds
and the window closes again with difficulty
or there is an obstruction, the automatic clos-
ing will stop working for 10 seconds.
●
If the window is still obstructed, the win-
dow wi
ll stop at this point.
●
If there i
s no obvious reason why the win-
dow cannot be closed, try to close it again by
pulling the tab within ten seconds. The win-
dow closes with maximum force. The roll-
back function is now deactivated.
If more than 10 seconds pass, the window
will open fully when you operate one of the
buttons. One-touch closing is reactivated.
WARNING
●
Incorrect
use of the electric windows can
result in injury.
●
Always take the ignition key with you when
leaving the vehicle, even if you only intend to
be gone for a short time. Please ensure that
children are never left alone inside the vehi-
cle.
●
The electric windows will work until the ig-
nition has been switched off and one of the
front doors has been opened.
●
Closing the windows without observing and
ensuring it is clear could cause serious injury
to you and third parties. Make sure that no
one is in the path of a window.
●
Never allow people to remain in the vehicle
when you close the vehicle from the outside.
The windows cannot be opened even in an
emergency.
●
The roll-back function does not prevent fin-
gers or other parts of the body getting
pinched against the window frame. Risk of
accident.
115
Technical dataAdviceOperationEmergenciesSafety
Operation
Convenience opening/closing*
Using the door lock*
–
Hold the key in the door lock of the driver
door in either the lockin
g or the unlocking
position until all windows are either
opened or closed.
–
Release the key to interrupt this function.
Using the remote control
–
Keep the locking/unlocking button pressed
for the electric window risers to
open/close; if you stop pressing the but-
ton, the window raising/lowering function
is stopped.
–
If the automatic raising is stopped and im-
mediately
after, the opening button is kept
pressed, the window risers will lower.
–
Once the windows are completely closed,
the turn signals will flash.
Tilting panoramic roof*
Opening or closing of the tilting pan-
oramic roof
Read the additional information carefully
›
›
›
page 11
The panoramic/tilting sunroof is opened and
closed by using the switch when the ignition
is switched on.
Always close the panoramic/tilting sunroof
fully if you park the vehicle or leave it unat-
tended ›››
.
The ti
ltin
g s
unroof can be operated for up to
about ten minutes after the ignition has been
switched off, provided the driver door and
the front passenger door are not opened.
Sun visor
The sun visor is opened and closed manually
(independently of the panoramic/tilting sun-
roof).
WARNING
●
Incorrect
use of the tilting sunroof can re-
sult in injury.
●
Never close the tilting sunroof without first
checking that there are no obstructions. Risk
of serious injury to you or others. Make sure
that no one is in the path of the tilting sun-
roof.
●
Always take the vehicle key with you when
you leave the vehicle.
●
Never leave children or disabled persons in
the vehicle, particularly if they have access to
the keys. Unsupervised use of a key could
mean that the engine is started or that elec-
trical equipment is used (e.g. electric tilting
sunroof) with a risk of accident. The doors
can be locked using the remote control key.
This c
ould become an obstacle for assistance
in an emergency situation.
●
The tilting sunroof continues to function
until one of the front doors is opened and the
key removed from the ignition.
●
Ensure that no object and/or end is be-
tween the glass and the sunroof when the
one-touch opening/closing function is reset.
Convenience closing*
Using the door lock
–
Hold the key in the door lock of the driver
door in the loc
k
in
g position until the tilting
sunroof is closed.
–
Release the key to interrupt this function.
Using the remote control
–
Push the lock button on the remote control
for approximately 3 seconds. The tilting
sunroof closes.
–
Press the unlock button to interrupt the
function.
116
Lights and visibility
Roll-back function of the tilting panor-
amic
s
u
nroof*
The tilting panoramic sunroof has a rol
l-back
function which prevents larger objects get-
ting trapped when the roof is closed. The roll-
back function does not prevent fingers get-
ting pinched against the roof opening. The
tilting sunroof stops and opens again imme-
diately if it is obstructed when closing.
Lights and visibility
Light
s
C
ontr
ol lamps
It lights up
Rear fog light switched on ››› page 118.
It lights up
Front fog lights* switched on ››› page 118.
It lights up
Left or right turn signal.
The control lamp flashes twice as fast when a turn signal
is faulty.
It lights up
Main beam on or flasher on ››› page 119.
Several warning and control lamps light up
f
or a f
ew sec
onds when the ignition is switch-
ed on, signalling that the function is being
verified. They will switch off after a few sec-
onds.
WARNING
Observe the safety warnings ›››
in Warning
symbols on p
age 99.
Switching lights on and off
Read the additional information carefully
›››
page 21
The legal requirements regarding the use of
vehicle lights in each country must be ob-
served.
The driver is personally responsible for the
correct use and adjustment of the lights in all
situations.
WARNING
Never drive with just the side lights on, there
is a ri
sk of accident. The side lights are not
bright enough to illuminate the road ahead
and to ensure that other road users are able
to see you. Always use your dipped beam
headlights if it is dark or if visibility is poor.
Note
●
The dipped beam he
adlights will only work
with the ignition on. The side lights come on
automatically when the ignition is turned off.
●
If the lights are left on after the key has
been taken out of the ignition lock, an audi-
ble warning sounds while the driver door re-
mains open. This is a reminder to switch the
lights off.
●
The rear fog light can dazzle drivers behind
you. You should use the rear fog light only
when visibility is very poor. For this reason,
when you exceed approximately 60 km/h (38
»
117
Technical dataAdviceOperationEmergenciesSafety
Operation
mph), a warning will appear on the
instrument
panel: Turn off the fog
light!.
●
The use of the lighting described here is
subject to the relevant statutory require-
ments.
Automatic lighting*
Activation
–
Rotate the switch to the
po
s
ition, this
indication will light up.
Deactivation
–
Turn the light switch to .
Automatic lighting
If automatic headlight control is switched on,
dipped beam headlights are automatically
switched on by a photosensor if you drive in-
to a tunnel, for example.
WARNING
●
Even if
the automatic headlight control is
switched on, the dipped beam headlights will
not be switched on with fog. Therefore, the
dipped beam must be switched on manually.
Note
●
For those
vehicles with the automatic head-
light system, when the key is removed from
the ignition, the audible warning will only
sound if the light
knob is in position or .
●
If the daylight driving automatic light func-
tion is switched on, the front fog lights or
rear fog light cannot be switched on in addi-
tion.
●
The use of the lighting described here is
subject to the relevant statutory require-
ments.
●
Do not put stickers on the windscreen in
front of the sensor. This may cause disrup-
tions or faults in the automatic lighting sys-
tem.
●
The rain sensor switches on the dipped
beam headlights when the windscreen wipers
have been operating continuously for a few
seconds and it switches the lights off when
the continuous or interval wipe is switched
off for some minutes.
Daytime running lights
›››
table on page 2
The daytime running lights are enabled auto-
matically when the ignition is switched on.
Daytime running lights are signalling devices
for improving road safety. The lights are built
into the headlights and come on each time
the ignition is turned on if the light switch is
in position 0 or . It is automatically
switched off when the dipped beam lights
are turned on.
WARNING
The side lights or daytime driving lights are
not bright enough t
o illuminate the road
ahead and to ensure that other road users are
able to see you.
●
Always use your dipped beam head lights if
it is raining or if visibility is poor.
●
The rear lights do not come on with the
daytime driving light. A vehicle which does
not have the rear lights on may not be visible
to other drivers in the darkness, if it is rain-
ing or in conditions of poor visibility.
Note
See legal requirements for each country.
Fog lights
Fig. 125 Dash panel: light control.
118
Lights and visibility
Switching on the front fog lights*
●
Turn the switch from position
or
to the first stop and pull it. The symbol in
the light switch lights up.
Switching on the rear fog light (vehicles with
front fog lights)
●
Turn the lights control from position
or to the second stop and pull it ›››
in
Sw
it
c
hing lights on and off on page 117. A
lamp on the control and warning lamps panel
lights up.
Switching on the rear fog light (vehicles with
no front fog lights)
●
Turn the light control to the end from posi-
tion or and pull it. A lamp on the con-
trol and warning lamps panel lights up.
Turn signal and main beam lever
Read the additional information carefully
›
›
›
page 22
Parking lights
●
Switch the ignition off and remove the key
from the lock.
●
Move the turn signal lever up or down to
turn the right or left-hand parking lights on,
respectively.
Convenience turn signals
For the convenience turn signals, move the
lever as far as possible upwards or down-
wards and release the lever. The turn signal
will flash three times.
The convenience turn signals are activated
and deactivated in the Easy Connect system
via the
key and the
Set
up
function button
›
›
›
page 99.
In vehicles that do not have the correspond-
ing menu, this function can be deactivated in
a specialised workshop.
WARNING
The main beam can dazzle other drivers. Risk
of acc
ident! Never use the main beam head-
lights or the headlight flasher if they could
dazzle other drivers.
Note
●
If the con
venience turn signals are operat-
ing (three flashes) and the other convenience
turn signals are switched on, the active part
stops flashing and only flashes once in the
new part selected.
●
The turn signals only work when the igni-
tion is switched on. The corresponding warn-
ing lamp or flashes in the instrument
panel. The control lamp flashes when the
turn signals are operated, provided a trailer is
correctly attached and connected to the vehi-
cle. If a turn signal bulb is defective, the con-
trol lamp flashes at double speed. If the trail-
er turn sign
al bulbs are defective, the control
lamp does not light up. Change the bulb.
●
The main beam headlights can only be
switched on if the dipped beam headlights
are already on. The warning lamp then
comes on in the instrument panel.
●
The headlight flasher comes on for as long
as you pull the lever – even if no other lights
are switched on. The warning lamp then
comes on in the instrument panel.
●
When the parking lights are switched on,
the headlight and the tail light on the corre-
sponding side of the vehicle light up. The
parking lights will only work if the key is re-
moved from the ignition. If said light is on, an
audible warning will be emitted while the
driver door is open.
●
If the turn signal lever is left on after the
key has been taken out of the ignition lock,
an acoustic signal sounds when the driver
door is opened. This is intended as a remind-
er to switch off the turn signal, unless you
wish to leave the parking light on.
Coming Home/Leaving Home Func-
tion*
The Coming Home function is controlled man-
ual
ly
.
The Leaving Home function is control-
led with a photosensor.
If the Coming Home or Leaving Home func-
tion is connected, the front side and dipped
»
119
Technical dataAdviceOperationEmergenciesSafety
Operation
lights, the tail lights and the number plate
light
w
i
ll light up to provide assistance.
Coming home function
The Coming Home function is activated by
switching off the ignition and briefly flashing
the lights. When the driver door is opened,
the Coming Home lighting comes on. If the
driver door is already open when the lights
are flashed briefly, the Coming Home lighting
comes on immediately.
When the last door of the vehicle or the rear
lid is closed, the Coming Home function
starts and the switching off the headlights is
delayed.
The Coming Home lighting switches off in the
following cases:
●
On completion of the time period establish-
ed for the delay in switching off the lights af-
ter all the vehicle doors and the rear lid have
been closed.
●
If, 30 seconds after being connected, any
doors or the rear lid remain open.
●
If the light switch is turned to position .
●
If the ignition is switched on.
Automatic Leaving Home function
The Leaving Home function is activated when
the vehicle is unlocked if:
●
the light control is in position and
●
the photosensor detects “darkness”.
The Leaving Home lighting switches off in the
following cases:
●
If the time period for the delay in switching
off the headlights has ended
●
If the vehicle is locked again.
●
If the light switch is turned to position .
●
If the ignition is switched on.
Manual Leaving Home function
In vehicles without an automatic headlight
system (light sensor), if the manual Coming
Home function is activated when leaving the
car, upon returning to the car and unlocking
it the manual Leaving Home function will be
activated automatically.
Note
●
To activat
e the Coming/Leaving home func-
tion, the rotary light switch must be in posi-
tion and the light sensor must detect
darkness.
●
If the ignition key is removed while the
lights are on, the lights flash briefly and the
driver door opens, no audible warning is
heard, since with the Coming Home function
on, the lights are automatically switched off
after a period of time (except when the light
switch is in position or .
Adaptive headlights* (for driving
r
ou
nd bend
s)
Fig. 126 Cornering lighting using adaptive
he
a
dlights.
When driving around bends, the headlights
w
i
l
l light the most important areas of the
road.
This cornering light gives better illumination
of the side of the road and the corner area.
The dynamic lighting is controlled automati-
cally according to speed and the steering
wheel angle.
The two main headlights move at different
angles to avoid that the front of the vehicle is
left completely in the dark.
Note
The system operates from a speed of about
10 km/h (6 mph).
120
Lights and visibility
Fog lights with cornering function*
This is an additional light source to dipped
beam hea
dlights to light up the road as a
bend is taken.
The cornering light operates with the lights
switched on and when driving at less than
40 Km/h (25 mph). Ignition occurs by turning
the steering or connecting the turn signal.
Forward gear
●
If the steering wheel is turned to the right,
or the right-hand t
urn signal operated, the
right-hand fog light turns on.
●
If the steering wheel is turned to the left, or
the left-hand turn signal operated, the left-
hand fog light turns on.
In reverse, both fog lights turn on.
Note
When the fog lamps are on, the cornering
function i
s activated and both headlights are
continuously on.
Instrument and switch lighting, head-
light
r
an
ge control
Fig. 127 Dash panel: headlight range control
Instrument and switch lighting
The lightin
g l
ev
el of instruments, controls
and displays can be adjusted through the in-
fotainment system with the
CAR
button and
the
S
ETUP
function button ›
›
›
page 24.
The instrument lighting (some dials and nee-
dles), the centre console lighting and the
lighting of the displays are regulated by a
photodiode incorporated in the instrument
panel.
The instrument lighting (needles) is switched
on when the ignition is on and the light is
off. The instrument lighting is dimmed auto-
matically as the daylight starts to fade. It
goes out completely when ambient light is
very low. This function is intended to remind
the driver to switch on the dipped beam
headlights in good time when light condi-
tions become poor.
Headlight range control
By using the electrical headlight range con-
trol you can adjust the headlight range to the
load level that is being carried in the vehicle
››› Fig. 127. This way, it is possible to avoid
dazzling oncoming traffic more than necessa-
ry. At the same time, by using the correct
headlight settings, the driver has the best
possible lighting for the road ahead.
The headlights can only be adjusted when
the dipped beam is switched on. Turn the
wheel downwards to lower the headlight
beam from the basic setting 0.
Dynamic headlight range control
Vehicles with gas discharge bulbs (xenon
bulbs) are equipped with dynamic headlight
range control. When you switch on the lights,
their range regulates itself according to the
vehicle load.
Vehicles with gas discharge bulbs do not
have headlight range control.
Hazard warning lights
Read the additional information carefully
›
›
›
page 22
»
121
Technical dataAdviceOperationEmergenciesSafety
Operation
The hazard warning lights are used to draw
the att
ention of
other r
oad users to your vehi-
cle in emergencies.
If your vehicle breaks down:
1. Park your vehicle at a safe distance from
moving traffic.
2. Press the button to switch on the hazard
warning lights ›››
.
3. Switch the ignition off.
4. Apply the handbrake.
5. For a manual gearbox, engage 1st gear;
f
or an aut
om
atic gearbox, move the gear
lever to P.
6. Use the warning triangle to draw the atten-
tion of other road users to your vehicle.
7. Always take the vehicle key with you when
you leave the vehicle.
All turn signals flash simultaneously when
the hazard warning lights are switched on.
The two turn signal turn signal lamps
and the turn signal lamp in the switch will
flash at the same time. The simultaneous
hazard warning lights also work when the ig-
nition is switched off.
WARNING
●
The risk of
an accident increases if your ve-
hicle breaks down. Always use the hazard
warning lights and a warning triangle to draw
the attention of other road users to your sta-
tionary
vehicle.
●
Due to the high temperatures that the cata-
lytic converter can reach, never park in an
area where the catalytic converter could come
into contact with highly inflammable materi-
als, for example dry grass or spilt petrol. This
could start a fire.
Note
●
The b
atter
y will run down if the hazard
warning lights are left on for a long time,
even if the ignition is switched off.
●
The use of the hazard warning lights de-
scribed here is subject to the relevant statu-
tory requirements.
Interior lights
Int
erior and r
e
ading lights
Read the additional information carefully
›
›
›
page 23
Luggage compartment lighting
The light is activated when the rear lid is
open, even when the ignition and lights are
turned off. For this reason, ensure that the
rear lid is always closed.
Glove compartment light
When opening the glove compartment on the
passenger side, the glove compartment light
will automatically turn on and will turn off
upon closure.
Ambient light*
››› table on page 2
The ambient lighting lights up the central
console area and the footwell area.
They will switch on fully when the doors are
opened and will decrease in intensity while
driving when the dipped beam headlight is
on.
The intensity of the ambient light* can be ad-
justed using the Easy Connect menu (see
Adjusting Lights > Interior light-
ing ›››
page 24).
Note
If not all the vehicle doors are closed, the in-
terior lights
will be switched off after approx.
10 minutes, providing the ignition key has
been removed and the courtesy light position
selected. This prevents the battery from dis-
charging.
122
Lights and visibility
Visibility
He
at
ed r
ear window
Fig. 128 Centre console: heated rear window
sw
it
c
h.
The heated rear window only works when the
en
gine i
s
running. When it is switched on, a
lamp lights up on the switch.
After approximately 8 minutes, the heating
device of the rear window switches off auto-
matically.
For the sake of the environment
The heated rear window should be switched
off as
soon as the glass is demisted. By sav-
ing electrical power you can also save fuel.
Note
To avoid possible damage to the battery, an
automatic
temporary disconnection of this
function is possible, coming back on when
normal
operating conditions are re-establish-
ed.
Sun visors
Fig. 129 Sun visor on the driver side.
The sun visors for the driver and the front
p
a
s
senger can be pulled out of their central
supports and turned towards the doors in the
direction of the arrow ››› Fig. 129. Never pull
them downwards.
The driver sun visor has compartments for
cards, and the passenger sun visor has a
vanity mirror with a cover*.
Note
Incorrect use of the sun visor (e.g. pulling
them downw
ards once they are open) may re-
sult in broken hinges. This damage is not cov-
ered by the vehicle warranty.
Windscreen wiper and rear win-
do
w w
iper sy
stems
Control lamp*
It lights up
Windscreen wiper fluid level too low
This serves as a reminder to fill up the reser-
voir at the e
arliest opportunity ››› page 207.
Windscreen wipers
Read the additional information carefully
›
›
›
page 23
WARNING
●
Worn and dirty
wiper blades reduce visibili-
ty and safety levels while driving.
●
In cold conditions you should not use the
wash/wipe system unless you have warmed
the windscreen with the heating and ventila-
tion system. The windscreen washer fluid
could otherwise freeze on the windscreen and
obscure your view of the road.
●
Always note the corresponding warnings
›››
page 54.
»
123
Technical dataAdviceOperationEmergenciesSafety
Operation
WARNING
The rain sensor* may not detect enough rain
to swit
ch on the wipers.
●
If necessary, switch on the wipers manually
when water on the windscreen obstructs visi-
bility.
CAUTION
In icy conditions, always check that the wiper
bla
des are not frozen to the glass before us-
ing the wipers for the first time. If you switch
on the windscreen wipers when the wiper
blades are frozen to the windscreen, you
could damage both the wiper blades and the
wiper motor.
Note
●
The winds
creen wipers will only work when
the ignition is switched on.
●
The heat output of the heated jets* is con-
trolled automatically when the ignition is
switched on, depending upon the outside
temperature.
●
In certain versions of vehicles with alarms,
the windscreen wiper will only work in inter-
val/rain sensor mode when the ignition is on
and the bonnet closed.
●
When the interval wipe function is on, the
intervals are directly proportional to the
speed. This way, the higher the vehicle speed
the shorter the intervals.
●
If y
ou stop the vehicle with the windscreen
wiper in position 1 or 2, it will automatically
change to a lower position speed. The set
speed will be resumed when the vehicle pulls
away.
●
The windscreen will be wiped again after
approximately five seconds once the “auto-
matic wash/wipe system” has been activa-
ted, provided the vehicle is moving (drip func-
tion). If you activate the wipers less than 3
seconds after the drip function, a new wash
sequence will begin without performing the
last wipe. For the “drip” function to work
again, you have to turn the ignition off and
then on again.
●
Do not put stickers on the windscreen in
front of the rain sensor*. This may cause sen-
sor disruption or faults.
Rear window wiper
Fig. 130 Windscreen wiper lever: rear window
w
iper
.
Switching on the interval wipe
–
Press the lever forward to position
6
››› Fig. 130.
The w
iper w
ill wipe the window
approximately every 6 seconds.
Switching off the interval wipe function
–
Pull the lever back from position
6
toward
the s
t
eerin
g wheel. The wiper will continue
to function for a short period if you switch
off whilst the wipers are in motion.
Switching on the window wiper and washer
system
–
Press the lever fully forwards to position
7
››› Fig. 130 . The wiper and w
asher operate
at the same time. The rear window wash
system will function as long as you hold the
lever in this position.
–
Release the lever. The washer system stops
and the wipers
continue until the end of
the cycle.
–
Move the lever towards the steering wheel
to switch off.
WARNING
●
Worn and dirty
wiper blades reduce visibili-
ty and safety levels while driving.
●
Always note the corresponding warnings
›››
page 54.
124
Lights and visibility
CAUTION
In icy conditions, always check that the wiper
bla
de is not frozen to the glass before using
the wiper for the first time. If you switch on
the wiper when the wiper blade is frozen to
the glass, this could damage both the wiper
blade and the wiper motor.
Note
●
The rear w
indow wiper will only work when
the ignition is switched on.
●
Depending on the version of the model,
when you engage reverse gear and with the
headlight wiper activated, this can start a
wipe.
Headlight washer*
The headlight washers clean the headlight
l
en
se
s.
The headlight washers are activated auto-
matically when the windscreen washer is
used and the window wiper lever is pulled to-
wards the steering wheel for at least 1.5 sec-
onds – provided the dipped beam headlights
or main beams are switched on. Clean off
stubborn dirt (insects, etc.) from the head-
lights at regular intervals, for instance when
filling the fuel tank.
Note
●
To ens
ure that the headlight washers work
properly in winter, keep the nozzle holders in
the bumper free of snow and remove any ice
with a de-icer spray.
●
To remove water, the windscreen wipers
will be activated from time to time, the head-
light washers will be activated every three cy-
cles.
Rear view mirrors
Int
erior mirr
or
It is dangerous to drive if you cannot see
c
l
e
arly through the rear window.
Interior mirror with automatic anti-dazzle
function*
The anti-dazzle function is activated every
time the ignition is switched on.
When the anti-dazzle function is enabled, the
interior rear vision mirror will darken auto-
matically according to the amount of light it
receives. The anti-dazzle function is cancel-
led if reverse gear is engaged.
Note
●
The automatic
anti-dazzle function will only
work properly if the sun blind* for the rear
window is retracted and there are no other
obj
ects preventing light from reaching the in-
terior rear vision mirror.
●
If you have to stick any type of sticker on
the windscreen, do not do so in front of the
sensors. Doing so could prevent the anti-daz-
zle function from working well or even from
working at all.
Folding in the exterior mirrors man-
ually
The exterior mirrors of the vehicle may be fol-
ded in. F
or thi
s, pr
ess the mirror housing to-
wards the vehicle.
Note
Before washing the vehicle with an automatic
car wa
sh, fold in the exterior mirrors to avoid
damage.
125
Technical dataAdviceOperationEmergenciesSafety
Operation
Electric exterior mirrors*
Fig. 131 Exterior mirror controls.
Read the additional information carefully
›
›
›
page 13
The exterior mirrors can be adjusted using
the rotary knob in the driver door.
Basic setting of exterior mirrors
1. Turn knob ››› Fig. 131 to position L (left ex-
terior mirror).
2. Turn the rotary knob to position the exteri-
or mirror so that you have a good view to
the rear of the vehicle.
3. Turn the knob to position R (right exterior
mirror).
4. Swivel the rotary knob to position the ex-
terior mirror so that you have a good view
to the rear of the vehicle ›››
.
Heated exterior mirrors*
–
Press the demisting button ›
›
›
Fig. 128
–
The mirrors demist for some minutes to
prevent draining the battery unnecessarily.
–
If necessary, press the button again to re-
peat the function.
–
The exterior mirror heating is not activated
in temperatures above approximately
+20°C (+68°F).
Folding in the exterior mirrors electrically*
–
Turn the control ››› Fig. 131 to position to
fold in the exterior mirrors. You should al-
ways fold in the exterior mirrors if you are
driving through an automatic car wash.
This will help prevent damage.
Folding exterior mirrors back out to the ex-
tended position*
–
Turn the knob to position L or R to return
the exterior mirrors to their original posi-
tion ›››
.
WARNING
●
Conv
ex or aspheric mirrors increase the
field of vision however the objects appear
smaller and further away in the mirrors. If you
use these mirrors to estimate the distance to
vehicles behind you when changing lane, you
could make a mistake. Risk of accident.
●
If pos
sible, use the rear vision mirror to es-
timate distances to vehicles behind you.
●
Make sure that you do not get your finger
trapped between the mirror and the mirror
base when folding back the mirrors. Risk of
injury!
For the sake of the environment
The exterior mirror heating should be switch-
ed off
when it i
s no longer needed. Other-
wise, it is an unnecessary fuel waste.
Note
●
If the electric
al adjustment ever fails to op-
erate, the mirrors can be adjusted by hand by
lightly pressing the edge of the mirror glass.
●
In vehicles with electric exterior mirrors,
the following points should be observed: if,
due to an external force (e.g. being knocked
while manoeuvring), the adjustment of the
mirror housing is altered, the mirror will have
to be fully folded electrically. Do not readjust
the rear vision mirror housing by hand, as
this will interfere with the mirror adjuster
function.
●
The rear vision mirrors can be adjusted sep-
arately or simultaneously, as described
above.
●
The fold-in function on the exterior mirrors
will not activate at speeds over 40 km/h
(25 mph).
126
Seats and head restraints
Seats and head restraints
Adju
s
tin
g the seat and head re-
straints
Adjusting the front seats
Read the additional information carefully
›››
page 12
WARNING
The safe driving chapter contains important
information, tip
s, suggestions and warnings
that you should read and observe for your
own safety and the safety of your passengers
››› page 56.
WARNING
●
Never adju
st the driver or front passenger
seat while the vehicle is in motion. While ad-
justing your seat, you will assume an incor-
rect sitting position. Risk of accidents. Adjust
the driver or front passenger seat only when
the vehicle is stationary.
●
To reduce the risk of injury to the driver and
front passenger in case of a sudden braking
or an accident, never drive with the backrest
tilted towards the rear. The maximum protec-
tion of the seat belt can be achieved only
when the backrests are in an upright position
and the driver and front passenger have prop-
erly adjusted their seat belts. The further the
backrests are tilted to the rear, the greater
the risk of
injury due to improper positioning
of the belt web!
●
Exercise caution when securing the seat
height into forwards/backwards position. In-
juries can be caused if the seat height is ad-
justed without due care and attention.
●
To move the seat forwards and backwards,
pull upwards and not sideways on the lever,
as the force exerted on it in that direction
could damage it.
Folding and lifting the backrest of the
fr
ont
se
ats
3 Applies to vehicles with 3 doors:
Fig. 132 Front seats: lever for folding down
the b
ac
k
rest.
Read the additional information carefully
›
›
›
page 12
Vehicles without the Easy-Entry function
–
To fold the backrest, pull the lever
1
up-
w
ar
d
s and push the backrest forwards.
–
To unfold the backrest, push it back.
Vehicles with the Easy-Entry function
–
To fold the backrest, pull the lever
1
up-
w
ar
d
s and push the backrest forwards. You
can push the seat forwards at the same
time to make entry to the rear seats easier.
–
To unfold the backrest, first move the seat
completely back.
The Easy-Entry function facilitates the access
to the vehicle rear seats. Before lifting the
backrest, return the seat to the original posi-
tion. The seat inserts when the backrest is lif-
ted.
127
Technical dataAdviceOperationEmergenciesSafety
Operation
Adjusting or disassembling the head
r
e
s
traints
Fig. 133 Adjusting and removing the head re-
s
tr
aints.
Read the additional information carefully
›
›
›
page 12
Adjusting height (front seats)
–
Press the button on the side and pull up-
wards to the desired position.
–
To lower the head restraint, press the but-
ton and push head restraint downwards.
–
Make sure that it engages securely into one
of its positions.
Adjusting height (rear seats)
–
Press the button on the side and pull up-
wards to the desired position.
–
To lower the head restraint, press the but-
ton and push head restraint downwards.
–
Make sure that the head restraint engages
securely in one of its positions ››› page 60.
Removing the head restraint
–
Push the head restraint up as far as it will
go.
–
Press the button ››› Fig. 133 (arrow).
–
Pull head restraint out of fitting without re-
leasing the button.
Fitting the head restraint
–
Insert the head restraint into the guides on
the corresponding backrest.
–
Push head restraint down.
–
Adjust the head restraint to suit body size
››› page 60.
WARNING
●
Never drive if
the head restraints have been
removed. Risk of injury.
●
Never drive if the head restraints are in an
unsuitable position (the lowest position) as
there is a risk of serious injury.
●
After refitting the head restraint, you must
always adjust it properly for height to achieve
optimal protection.
●
Please observe the safety warnings in ›››
in Correct adjustment of front head restraints
on page 60
.
Note
●
To fit and r
emove the rear head restraints,
gently tilt the seat backrest forwards.
●
When fitting the head restraints again, in-
sert the tubes as far as possible into the
guides without pressing the button.
Seat functions
Heated se
ats*
Fig. 134 Front seat heating switch.
The front seat cushions and backrests can be
he
at
ed el
ectrically.
–
Press the corresponding switch ››› Fig. 134
to switch on the seat heating.
–
Press once to connect the heating at maxi-
mum force. The two LEDs illuminate
››› Fig. 134. After 15 minutes of high
128
Seats and head restraints
intensity, the upper LED goes out, the sys-
t
em i
s
deactivated for 2 minutes and is
then reactivated at low intensity (the lower
LED remains on permanently).
–
Press the switch again to set the heating to
minimum force. (The lower LED lights up).
–
To disconnect the heating, press the switch
again.
CAUTION
To avoid damaging the heating elements,
ple
ase do not kneel on the seat or apply
sharp pressure at a single point to the seat
cushion and backrest.
Note
The seats are only heated electrically when
the engine is
running.
Folding down the back seat
Fig. 135 Folding up the rear seat cushion.
Fig. 136 Button for unlocking the rear back-
r
e
s
t.
Folding seat down
–
Remove the head restraint ›
›
›
page 128.
–
Pull the front edge of the seat cushion
››› Fig. 135
1
upwards in the direction of
the arr
o
w
.
–
Lift the cushion
2
forwards in the direc-
tion of
the arr
o
w.
–
Pull the release button ››› Fig. 136 in the di-
rection of the arrow and fold the backrest
forwards.
–
Insert the head restraints in the spaces on
the rear of the seat cushion which are visi-
ble when the seat cushion is lowered.
Folding seat forward
–
Remove the head restraints from the
spaces in the seat cushion.
–
Lift the backrest, and before securing it, re-
place the head restraints in the seat cush-
ion, and then click the seat correctly onto
the locking rails.
–
Once the backrest is locked, pull on the
central seat belt or directly on the backrest
to check that the backrest has properly en-
gaged in position.
–
Check that the position lever is in neutral
position.
–
Lower the cushion and push it backwards
below the seat belt buckles.
–
Press the front part of the cushion down-
wards.
On split rear seats*, the backrest and cush-
ion can be lowered and raised respectively in
two sections.
»
129
Technical dataAdviceOperationEmergenciesSafety
Operation
WARNING
●
Plea
se be careful when folding back the
backrest! Injuries can be caused if the seat
height is adjusted without due care and at-
tention.
●
Do no trap or damage seat belts when rais-
ing the backrest.
●
After raising the backrest, check it has en-
gaged properly in position. Do this by pulling
on the central seat belt or directly on the
backrest and check that the position lever is
in the neutral position.
●
The three point automatic seat belt only
works correctly when the backrest of the cen-
tral seat is correctly engaged.
Transport and practical
equipment
Pr
actic
a
l equipment
Glove compartment
Fig. 137 Passenger side: glove compartment.
Fig. 138 Glove compartment: storage com-
p
ar
tment
for instruction manual.
The compartment can be opened by pulling
the l
ev
er ›
›› Fig. 137.
This compartment can hold documents in A4
format, a water bottle of 1.5 L, etc.
Depending on the vehicle equipment, the CD
player is located in the glove compartment.
Separate operating instructions are enclosed
for this equipment in the corresponding In-
struction Manual.
WARNING
Always keep the storage compartment cover
closed whi
le the vehicle is in motion in order
to reduce the risk of injury caused by a sud-
den braking or by an accident.
Storage compartment on the driver
s
ide
Fig. 139 Compartment on the driver side
130
Transport and practical equipment
There is a storage compartment on the driver
s
ide
St
or
age compartment under the front
seats*
Fig. 140 Storage compartment under the
right
fr
ont
passenger seat.
To open
–
The compartment is opened by pulling on
the l
ev
er and a
ssisting it with your hand.
To close
–
Press the cover inwards until the closed
drawer “clicks” into position.
Note
The storage drawer will hold a maximum
weight of
1.5 kg.
Storage pocket in the seat*
Fig. 141 Storage pocket.
There is a storage pocket on the rear of the
fr
ont
se
ats.
Storage compartment in front door
panel*
In this storage compartment a 1.5l water bot-
tl
e, et
c
. can be stored.
Front drink holder*
Fig. 142 Front drink holders in the centre con-
so
l
e.
In the central console, in front of the gear lev-
er
, ther
e ar
e two drinks holders ››› Fig. 142.
WARNING
●
Do not put
hot drinks in the drink holders.
During sudden or normal driving manoeuvres,
when braking suddenly or in case of an acci-
dent, the hot drink could spill. Risk of scald-
ing.
●
Never use rigid materials (for example,
glass or ceramic), since they could cause in-
jury in the case of an accident.
●
When travelling, the drinks holder should
always be closed to prevent risk in the event
of sudden breaking or accident.
131
Technical dataAdviceOperationEmergenciesSafety
Operation
Rear drink holder*
Fig. 143 Drinks holder in the centre console.
On the rear part of the centre console, behind
the h
andbr
ak
e, there is a drink holder* in-
stalled ››› Fig. 143.
This drinks holder has a capacity for a bottle
of up to 1 litre.
Front ashtray*
Fig. 144 Front ashtray.
Opening and closing the ashtray
–
To open the ashtray, lift the cover
›
›
›
Fig. 144.
–
To close, push the cover down.
Emptying the ashtray
–
Extract the ashtray and empty it.
WARNING
Never put paper in the ashtray. Hot ash could
ignite the paper in the a
shtray and cause a
fire.
Cigarette lighter*
Fig. 145 Lighter.
–
Press on the cigarette lighter ›
›
›
Fig. 145 to
activate it ›››
.
–
Wait for the lighter to spring out.
–
Pull out the cigarette lighter and light the
c
ig
ar
ette on the glowing coil.
WARNING
●
Improper use of
the cigarette lighter can
lead to serious injuries or start a fire.
●
Using the lighter carefully. Carelessness or
negligence when using the cigarette lighter
can cause burns and serious injuries.
●
The lighter only works when the ignition is
turned on or the engine is running. To avoid
the risk of fire, never leave children alone in-
side the vehicle.
132
Transport and practical equipment
Electrical power socket
Fig. 146 Front power socket.
The 12 Volt cigarette lighter power socket can
al
so be u
sed f
or other electrical components
with a power rating of up to 120 Watt. When
the engine is switched off, however, the vehi-
cle battery will discharge. For further informa-
tion see ››› page 187.
WARNING
The power sockets and the connected acces-
sories w
ill only operate when the ignition is
on or when the engine is running. Improper
use of the sockets or electrical accessories
can lead to serious injuries or cause a fire. To
avoid the risk of injury, never leave children
alone inside the vehicle.
CAUTION
Always use the correct type of plugs to avoid
damagin
g the sockets.
Note
●
The use of el
ectrical appliances with the
engine switched off will cause a battery dis-
charge.
●
Before using any electrical accessories, see
the instructions in ››› page 187.
Luggage compartment
Loa
ding the luggage compartment
Fig. 147 Position heavy items as far forward
a
s
po
ssible.
All luggage and other loose objects must be
s
af
ely
secured in the luggage compartment.
Unsecured objects which shift back and forth
could affect safety or driving characteristics
of the vehicle by shifting the centre of gravity.
–
Distribute the load evenly in the luggage
compartment.
–
Place heavy objects as far forward as possi-
ble in the luggage compartment
››› Fig. 147.
–
Place the heavy objects first.
–
Secure heavy objects to the fitted fastening
rings* ››› page 134.
–
Secure loose loads with a luggage net* or
with non-elastic straps secured to the fas-
tening rings*.
WARNING
●
Loose lug
gage and other objects in the lug-
gage compartment could cause serious inju-
ries.
●
Always stow objects in the luggage com-
partment and secure them with the fastening
rings*.
●
During sudden manoeuvres or accidents,
loose objects can be thrown forward, injuring
vehicle occupants or even third parties. This
increased risk of injury will be further in-
creased if a loose object is struck by an inflat-
ing airbag. If this happens, objects may
shoot outward like a missile. Risk of fatal in-
jury.
●
Always keep all objects in the luggage com-
partment and use appropriate grips to secure
them, particularly in the case of heavy ob-
jects.
●
Never exceed the allowed axle weights or
allowed maximum weight. If said weights are
exceeded, the driving characteristics of the
»
133
Technical dataAdviceOperationEmergenciesSafety
Operation
vehicle may change, leading to accidents,
injuries and d
amage to the vehicle.
●
Please note that the centre of gravity may
shift when transporting heavy objects; this
may affect vehicle handling and lead to an ac-
cident. Therefore, it is essential to adjust
your speed and driving style accordingly, to
avoid accidents.
●
Never leave your vehicle unattended, espe-
cially when the rear lid is open. Children
could climb into the luggage compartment,
closing the door behind them; they will be
trapped and run the risk of death.
●
Never allow children to play in or around
the vehicle. Close and lock all the doors and
rear lid when you leave the vehicle. Before
you lock the vehicle, make sure that there are
no adults or children in the vehicle.
●
Please observe the notes on the ››› page 56.
CAUTION
Hard objects on the rear shelf could chafe
agains
t the wires of the heating element in
the heated rear window and cause damage.
Note
●
The tyre pr
essure must be adjusted accord-
ing to the load. When necessary check the
tyre pressures on the label located on the in-
side fuel tank flap ››› page 210.
●
Air circulation in the vehicle helps reduce
fogging of the windows. Used air escapes
through ventilation slits in the side trim of
the luggag
e compartment. Ensure that the
ventilation slots are never covered.
●
Straps for securing the load to the fasten-
ing rings* are commercially available from ac-
cessory shops.
Fastening rings*
Fig. 148 Location of fastening rings in lug-
g
ag
e c
ompartment.
There may be four fastening rings included in
the lug
g
ag
e compartment for fastening lug-
gage and other objects ››› Fig. 148 (arrows).
–
Always use suitable and undamaged straps
to secure luggage and other objects to the
fastening rings ›››
in Loading the lug-
g
ag
e c
ompartment on page 133.
–
Pull up the fastening rings to attach the
straps.
Example: An object weighing 4.5 kg is lying
unsecured in the vehicle. During a frontal col-
lision at a speed of 50 km/h (31 mph), this
object generates a force corresponding to 20
times its weight. That means that the effec-
tive weight of the object increases to approxi-
mately 90 kg. You can imagine the severity of
the injuries which might be sustained if this
“object” strikes an occupant as it flies
through the interior of the vehicle. This in-
creased risk of injury will be further increased
if a loose object is struck by an inflating air-
bag.
WARNING
●
If piece
s of baggage or other objects are se-
cured to the fastening rings with inappropri-
ate or damaged retaining cords, injuries
could result in the event of braking manoeu-
vres or accidents.
●
Never secure a child seat on the fastening
rings.
134
Transport and practical equipment
Rear shelf
Fig. 149 Rear shelf.
Removing the shelf
–
Unhook the loops ›
›
›
Fig. 149
B
from
hou
s
in
gs
A
.
–
Extract the cover from its slot, in its rest po-
s
ition and p
u
ll outwards.
WARNING
Do not place heavy or hard objects on the
rear shelf
, because they will endanger the ve-
hicle occupants in case of sudden braking.
CAUTION
●
Befor
e closing the rear lid, ensure that the
rear shelf is correctly fitted.
●
An overloaded luggage compartment could
mean that the rear shelf is not correctly seat-
ed and it may be bent or damaged.
●
If the lugg
age compartment is overloaded,
remove the tray.
Note
●
En
sur
e that, when placing items of clothing
on the luggage compartment cover, rear visi-
bility is not reduced.
Roof rack/roof luggage rack*
Intr
oduction
Please observe the following points if you in-
t
end t
o c
arry loads on the roof:
●
For safety reasons, only luggage racks and
accessories supplied by SEAT Official Serv-
ices are recommended.
●
It is essential that you follow the assembly
instructions included with the bars exactly,
being especially careful to position front and
rear luggage compartment cover bars on the
special housings in the longitudinal bars.
You must also respect their position accord-
ing to the direction of travel indicated in the
assembly manual. Not following these in-
structions may damage the bodywork.
●
Pay special attention to the tightening tor-
que of the attachment bolts and check them
following a short journey. If necessary, re-
tighten the bolts and check them at regular
intervals.
●
Distribute the load evenly. A maximum load
of 40 kg is permitted for each roof rack sys-
tem support bar, the load must be distrib-
uted evenly along the entire length. However,
the maximum load permitted for the entire
roof (including the support system) of 75 kg
must not be exceeded nor the total weight
recommended for the entire vehicle. See the
“Technical Data” section.
●
When transporting heavy or large objects
on the roof, any change in the normal vehicle
behaviour due to a change in the centre of
gravity or an increased wind resistance must
be taken into account. For this reason, a suit-
able speed and driving style must be used.
●
On vehicles fitted with a sliding/tilting sun-
roof*, make sure it does not hit the load on
the roof upon opening.
135
Technical dataAdviceOperationEmergenciesSafety
Operation
Attach the cross bars of the roof carri-
er sy
s
t
em
Fig. 150 Ibiza model: attachment points for
the r
oof
r
ailings for the roof carrier system.
Fig. 151 Ibiza SC model: attachment points
f
or the r
oof
railings for the roof carrier system.
The crossbars are the basis of a series of spe-
c
i
al
roof carrier systems. For safety reasons,
special fixtures must be used to safely trans-
port luggage, bicycles, skis, surf boards or
boats on the roof. Suitable accessories can
be acquired at SEAT dealerships.
Always secure the crossbars and the roof car-
rier system properly. Always take the assem-
bly instructions that come with the crossbars
and the roof carrier system in question into
account.
Ibiza Model
The front and rear attachment points
1
and
2
are only visible when the doors are open
›
›
›
Fig. 150.
Ibiza SC Model
The front attachment points
1
are only visi-
b
l
e when the door
s are open; the rear attach-
ment points
3
are marked on the top edge
of
the s
ide w
indow with arrow heads
››› Fig. 151.
WARNING
Incorrect attachment and use of the cross-
bars
and the roof carrier system may cause
the whole system to detach from the roof and
cause an accident and injuries.
●
Always take the manufacturer assembly in-
structions into account.
●
Use only crossbars and the roof carrier sys-
tem when they are in perfect condition and
are properly secured.
●
Secure the crossbars and the roof carrier
system properly.
●
Check thr
eaded joints and attachments
travelling and if necessary tighten them after
you have travelled a short distance. When
making long trips, check the threaded joints
whenever you stop for a rest.
●
Always fit the special roof carrier systems
correctly for wheels, skis and surfboards, etc.
●
Do not modify or repair the crossbars or
roof carrier system.
Note
Always read the assembly instructions that
c
ome with the c
rossbars and the roof carrier
system carefully and keep them in the vehi-
cle.
136
Air conditioning
Air conditioning
He
atin
g,
ventilation and cool-
ing
General notes
Read the additional information carefully
›››
page 39
Pollution filter
The pollution filter (a combined particulate
filter and active carbon filter) serves as a bar-
rier against impurities in the outside air, in-
cluding dust and pollen.
For the climate control system to work with
maximum efficiency, the pollution filter must
be replaced at the specified intervals in the
Maintenance Programme.
If the filter loses efficiency prematurely due
to use in areas reaching very high pollution
levels, the pollen filter must be changed
more frequently than stated in the Service
Schedule.
WARNING
Reduced visibility through the windows in-
cre
ases the risk of serious accidents.
●
Always ensure that all windows are free of
ice and snow, and that they are not fogged,
so as to maintain good visibility of everything
outside.
●
The m
aximum heat output required to de-
frost windows as quickly as possible is only
available when the engine has reached its
normal running temperature. Only drive when
you have good visibility.
●
Always ensure that you use the heating
system, fresh air system, air conditioner and
the heated rear window to maintain good visi-
bility to the outside.
●
Never leave the air recirculation on for a
long period of time. If the cooling system is
switched off and air recirculation mode
switched on, the windows can mist over very
quickly, considerably limiting visibility.
●
Switch air recirculation mode off when it is
not required.
WARNING
Stuffy or used air will increase fatigue and re-
duce driver c
oncentration possibly resulting
in a serious accident.
●
Never leave the fresh air fan turned off or
use the air recirculation for long periods of
time; the air in the vehicle interior will not be
refreshed.
CAUTION
●
If y
ou suspect that the air conditioner is
damaged, switch it off with the
A/C
button to
prevent further damage and have it checked
by a s
pecialised workshop.
●
Repairs to the air conditioner require spe-
cialist knowledge and special tools. There-
fore, we recommend you to take the vehicle
to a specialised workshop.
Note
●
If
the humidity and t
emperature outside the
vehicle are high, condensation can drip off
the evaporator in the cooling system and
form a pool underneath the vehicle. This is
normal and does not indicate a leak.
●
Keep the air intake slots in front of the
windscreen free of snow, ice and leaves to en-
sure heating and cooling are not impaired,
and to prevent the windows from misting
over.
●
The air from the vents flows through the ve-
hicle interior and is extracted by slots in the
luggage compartment designed for this pur-
pose. Therefore, you should avoid obstruct-
ing these slots with any kind of object.
●
The air conditioner operates most effective-
ly with the windows and the sliding/tilting
sunroof* closed. However, if the temperature
inside the vehicle is excessive because of the
sun, the air inside can be cooled faster by
opening the windows for a short time.
●
Do not smoke while air recirculation mode
is on, as smoke drawn into the air condition-
ing system leaves residue on the evaporator,
producing a permanent unpleasant odour.
»
137
Technical dataAdviceOperationEmergenciesSafety
Operation
●
At low out
side temperatures, the compres-
sor switches off automatically and cannot be
switched on even with the
AUTO
button.
●
It is advisable to turn on the air condition-
ing at l
east once a month, to lubricate the
system gaskets and prevent leaks. If a de-
crease in the cooling capacity is detected, a
Technical Service should be consulted to
check the system.
●
To ensure correct operation, the grilles on
both sides of the screen must not be obstruc-
ted.
●
When the engine is
under extreme strain,
switch off the compressor for a moment.
Economic use of the air conditioning
When the air conditioning is switched on, the
compre
ssor consumes engine power and has
influence on fuel consumption. Consider the
following points in order to have the system
operating in the minimum possible time.
●
If the v
ehicle interior has overheated due to
an excessive solar radiation, it is best to
open the windows or doors to allow the hot
air to escape.
●
While in motion, the air conditioning
should not be switched on if the windows or
the sunroof* are open.
Air outlets
Fig. 152 Air vents
138
Air conditioning
Air distribution
Symbol ››› page 139
C
Main air output through out-
lets
1, 2
5
1, 2, 5
3, 4
Outlets
3
and
4
can be closed or opened
separat
ely using the slats and the air flow di-
rected as required.
Heating and fresh air
Contro
ls
Fig. 153 Heating controls on the dash panel.
●
U
se t
urn c
ontrols
A
,
B
and
C
›
›› Fig. 153
t
o a
djust the temperature, blower speed and
air distribution.
●
Press the
D
button to switch air recircula-
tion mode on or off
.
When the f
unction is ac-
tivated, a warning light on the button is
turned on.
Temperature
Switch
A
adjusts temperature. The desired
t
emper
at
ure inside the vehicle cannot be
lower than the ambient temperature. Maxi-
mum heat output, which is needed to defrost
the windows quickly, is only available when
the engine has reached its operating temper-
ature.
Blower
The air flow can be set at four speeds with
switch
B
. The blower should always be set
at
the lo
w
est speed when driving slowly.
Air distribution
Control
C
for setting the flow of air in the re-
quir
ed dir
ection.
– Air distribution towards the windscreen
in order to demist. For safety reasons, it is
not recommended to switch air recirculation
on.
– Air distribution to upper body.
– Air distribution to footwell
– Air distribution to the windscreen and
the footwell.
WARNING
●
For y
our safety, the windows should never
be fogged up or covered with snow or ice.
This is essential to ensure good visibility.
Please familiarise yourself with the correct
operation of the heating and ventilation sys-
tem, including the demist/defrost functions
for the windows.
Note
●
Plea
se consider the general notes
››› page 137.
Air recirculation
Air recirculation prevents unpleasant smells
fr
om ent
erin
g the interior.
Connecting the recirculation
In any position of rotary switch
C
except
th
a
w:
●
Pr
ess button
D
›
›
›
Fig. 153 and the lamp in
the button will illuminate.
Disconnecting the recirculation
●
If the lamp is on, press button
D
and the
l
amp w
i
ll go off, indicating that the entry of
outside air has been activated.
»
139
Technical dataAdviceOperationEmergenciesSafety
Operation
If the rotary switch
C
›
›› Fig. 153
i
s in the
thaw position, the recirculation flap will al-
ways be open and air will always enter from
the outside.
If the rotary switch
C
is switched from any
po
s
ition t
o the thaw position, recirculation
will be automatically deactivated.
WARNING
●
In air recir
culation mode, no cold air from
the outside enters the vehicle interior. The
windows can quickly fog over if the heating is
switched off. Therefore, never leave the air re-
circulation mode switched on for a long time
(risk of accident).
Vehicle ventilation or heating
Ventilating the vehicle interior
–
Turn the temperature selector
›
›
›
Fig. 153
A
anticlockwise.
–
Turn blower switch
B
to any of the head
settin
g
s
1-4.
–
Set the airflow to the desired direction us-
ing air distribution control
C
.
–
Open the relevant air outlets.
Interior heating
–
Turn the temperature selector ›
›
›
Fig. 153
A
clockwise to select the desired tempera-
t
ur
e.
–
T
urn blower switch
B
to any of the head
settin
g
s
1-4.
–
Set the airflow to the desired direction us-
ing air distribution control
C
.
–
Open the relevant air outlets.
D
efr
o
sting the windscreen
–
Turn the temperature selector ››› Fig. 153
A
clockwise to reach the maximum tem-
per
at
ur
e.
–
Turn the blower switch
B
to setting 4.
–
Turn air distribution control to .
–
Close outlet
3
.
–
Open and turn outlet
4
towards the side
w
indo
w
s.
Keeping the windscreen and the side win-
dows demisted
–
Turn the temperature selector ››› Fig. 153
A
to the heating area.
–
Turn blower switch
B
to any of the head
settin
g
s
2-3.
–
Turn air distribution control to .
–
Close outlets
3
–
Open and t
urn outl
ets
4
towards side win-
do
w
s.
Onc
e the windows are demisted and as a pre-
ventive measure, the control
C
can be set in
po
s
ition
, thus obtaining greater comfort
while preventing the windows from misting
again.
Heating
Maximum heat output, which is needed to
defrost the windows quickly, is only available
when the engine has reached its operating
temperature.
Note
Remember that the temperature of the engine
cool
ant should be optimum to ensure that the
heating system functions correctly (except in
vehicles fitted with additional heating*).
140
Air conditioning
Air conditioning*
C
ontr
o
ls
Fig. 154 Air conditioning controls on the
d
a
sh p
anel.
Temperature selector ›
›
›
page 141
Blower control. There are four speed set-
tings for the blower. At low speed, it is
recommended to set the blower to a mini-
mum of 1 to improve the intake of fresh
air.
Air distribution control ››› page 141
Air recirculation button
›
›
› p
age 142
A/C
button – Switches on the cooling
sy
s
t
em ››› page 141
The air conditioning system only works when
the engine is running and the fan is switched
on.
A
B
C
D
E
●
U
s
in
g the rotary switches
A
,
B
and
C
››› Fig. 154 y
ou c
an a
djust temperature, blow-
er speed and air distribution.
●
To switch a function on or off, press the ap-
propriate button
D
or
E
. When the function
i
s
activ
ated, a red warning light on the but-
ton is turned on.
To demist the windscreen
●
Turn air distribution to .
●
Turn the fan control to one of the two levels
depending on the speed required.
●
Rotate the temperature control to the de-
sired level of comfort.
●
Close outlets
3
●
Open and turn outlets
4
towards side win-
do
w
s.
WARNING
For your safety, the windows should never be
fogg
ed up or covered with snow or ice. This is
essential to ensure good visibility. Please fa-
miliarise yourself with the correct operation
of the heating and ventilation system, includ-
ing the demist/defrost functions for the win-
dows.
Note
Please consider the general notes.
Vehicle interior heating or cooling
sy
s
t
em
Interior heating
–
Turn off the cooling system using the
›››
Fig. 154
A/C
button (the button light
turns
off).
–
Turn the temperature selector
A
to set the
desir
ed temperature inside the vehicle.
–
Turn the blower switch to any of the set-
tings 1-4.
–
Set the air distribution control
C
to the air
flo
w c
onfigur
ation desired:
(towards the
w
ind
s
creen),
(towards the chest),
(towards the footwell) and
(towards the
w
ind
s
creen and footwell areas).
Interior cooling
–
Turn off the cooling system using the
A/C
button (the button light turns on).
–
Turn the temperature control switch until
the de
s
ir
ed interior temperature is reached.
–
Turn the blower switch to any of the set-
tings 1-4.
–
Set the air distribution control to the air
flow configuration desired:
(towards the
w
ind
s
creen),
(towards the chest),
(towards the footwell) and
(towards the
w
ind
s
creen and footwell areas).
»
141
Technical dataAdviceOperationEmergenciesSafety
Operation
Heating
M
ax
imum he
at output, which is needed to
defrost the windows quickly, is only available
when the engine has reached its operating
temperature.
Coolant system
When the air conditioning is switched on, the
temperature and the air humidity go down.
This way, if the outside humidity is extreme,
the air conditioning prevents the misting of
the windows and therefore, comfort is im-
proved.
If the air conditioning does not work, this
may be due to the following reasons:
●
The engine is stationary.
●
The fan blower is switched off.
●
The outside temperature is lower than ap-
proximately +3°C (+37°F).
●
The air conditioning system compressor
has been temporarily switched off because of
an increased engine coolant temperature.
●
The air conditioner fuse is faulty.
●
Another fault in the vehicle. Have the air
conditioning checked by a specialised work-
shop.
Air recirculation
Air recirculation prevents unpleasant smells,
e.g. when pa
ssing through a tunnel or in
queuing traffic, from entering the interior.
If the rotary switch
C
››› Fig. 154 i
s in the
thaw position, the recirculation flap will al-
ways be open (button light off).
If the rotary switch
C
is switched from any
position t
o the thaw position, recirculation
will be automatically deactivated.
Connecting the recirculation
In any position of rotary switch
C
except
th
a
w:
●
Pr
ess button
D
›
›
› Fig. 154
, the switch's
lamp will light up, indicating that air recircu-
lation inside the vehicle has been activated.
Disconnecting the recirculation
In any position of rotary switch
C
except
th
a
w:
●
Pr
ess button
D
again and the button's
l
amp w
i
ll go off, indicating that air recircula-
tion from the outside has been activated.
In the thaw position of rotary switch
C
, the
entr
y
of
air into the vehicle interior is always
from the outside.
WARNING
In air recirculation mode, no cold air from the
outside ent
ers the vehicle interior. If the air
conditioner is switched off, the windows can
quickly mist over. Therefore, never leave the
air recirculation mode switched on for a long
time (risk of accident).
Note
●
When engagin
g reverse gear, the air recir-
culation is connected automatically to pre-
vent the entrance of exhaust gases in the ve-
hicle on travelling backwards. The control
lamp on the button
does not light up.
●
If the temperature control is turned to the
col
dest setting (blue point) and the
A/C
but-
ton is
on, the “Air recirculation” function is
automatically activated in order to cool the
vehicle faster using less energy, and its func-
tion control lamp will light up.
●
If the function is not deactivated by press-
ing the button, it will deactivate after approx-
imately 20 minutes.
142
Air conditioning
Climatronic*
Gener
a
l
notes
Fig. 155 Climatronic: controls.
Read the additional information carefully
›
›
›
page 39
Climatronic automatically maintains a com-
fortable temperature. To do so, it automati-
cally regulates the supplied air temperature
and the blower and air distribution levels.
The system also allows for the effect of sun-
light, so there is no need for manual adjust-
ment. It also has a humidity sensor that
helps to automatically demist the wind-
screen.
Automatic operations ››› page 144 guaran-
tee maximum comfort any time of year.
Climatronic description
Cooling only works if the following conditions
are met:
●
The engine is running
●
the outside temperature is above +2°C
(+36°F);
●
A/C
18
›
›› Fig. 155
sw
itched on.
Starting the Climatronic
The corresponding function will be switched
on when a button is pressed, turning on the
air conditioning if it was switched off, with
the exception of button
17
›
›
› Fig. 155
(recir-
culation).
Switching off the Climatronic
●
Turn control
10
to the left until the seg-
ments
of
c
olumn
9
›
›› Fig. 155
sw
itch off.
●
After 1 second has elapsed, turn the control
again to switch off the display.
In order to ensure engines subject to heavy
loads are cooled, the air conditioning com-
pressor is switched off in the event of high
coolant temperatures.
Recommended setting for all seasons of the
year
●
Set the required temperature. We recom-
mend +22 °C (72°F).
»
143
Technical dataAdviceOperationEmergenciesSafety
Operation
●
Pr
e
s
s the
AUTO
button
13
›
›› Fig. 155
.
●
Adju
st vents 3 and 4 ››› page 138 so that
the air flow is directed slightly upwards.
Change between degrees Centigrade and de-
grees Fahrenheit
Keep the
AUTO
and
A/C
›
›› Fig. 155
b
uttons
held down for 2 seconds at the same time.
The data is displayed on the screen in the
units required.
Note
●
A vi
sit to the specialised service once a
year is recommended to clean the Climatronic
system.
●
The interior temperature sensor
11
››› Fig. 155 is at
the bottom. Do not cover it
with stickers or the like, as this could have a
negative effect on Climatronic operations.
Automatic mode
Automatic mode is used to maintain a con-
s
t
ant
temperature and demist the windows
inside the vehicle.
Switching on automatic mode
●
Set the interior temperature between +16°C
(+64°F) and +29°C (+84°F).
●
Adjust vents 3 and 4
›››
page 138 so that
the air flow is directed slightly upwards.
●
Press the
AUTO
button
13
›
›› Fig. 155
and
AUTO di
splayed on the screen.
Automatic mode is switched off by pressing
the air distribution buttons or increasing or
decreasing the blower speed. However, the
temperature remains regulated.
Adjusting the temperature
●
When you switch on the ignition, control
1
››› Fig. 155 can be used t
o set the required in-
terior temperature.
It is possible to select interior temperatures
from +16°C (+64°F) to +29°C (+84°F). In this
range the temperature is regulated automati-
cally. If a temperature below +16°C (+64°F) is
selected, “LO” is displayed on the screen. If a
temperature above +29°C (+84°F) is selected,
“HI” is displayed on the screen. At both ex-
tremes, Climatronic works at maximum cool-
ing or heating power, respectively. The tem-
perature is not regulated.
In the event of prolonged, irregular distribu-
tion of the air flow from the outlets (particu-
larly the footwells) and significant differen-
ces in temperature, e.g. on leaving the vehi-
cle, sensitive people may catch cold.
Air recirculation
Air recirculation prevents unpleasant smells,
e.g. when pa
ssing through a tunnel or in
queuing traffic, from entering the interior.
Switching on air recirculation mode
●
Press button
17
››› Fig. 155 and the
symbol is displayed on the screen.
Switching off air recirculation mode
●
Press button
17
›
›
› Fig. 155
and the
symbol disappears from the screen.
WARNING
Read and observe the safety warnings ›››
in
General
notes on page 137.
Note
If air recirculation mode remains on for 15 mi-
nutes, the
symbol will start to flash on
the screen to indicate prolonged air recircula-
tion. If air recirculation is not switched off,
the symbol will continue to flash for about 5
minutes.
Blower selection
Climatronic automatically regulates blower
s
peed ac
c
ording to the interior temperature.
144
Driving
It is possible, however, to set the blower
s
peed t
o s
uit requirements.
●
Turn control
10
›
›› Fig. 155
c
ounter-clock-
wise (to lower the speed) or clockwise (to in-
crease the speed).
Climatronic will switch off when the blower
switches off.
WARNING
Read and observe the safety warnings ›››
in
General
notes on page 137.
Windscreen defrost
Switching on windscreen defrosting
●
Press the button
12
›
›
›
Fig. 155.
Switching off windscreen defrosting
●
Press button
12
›
›
›
Fig. 155 several
times or press the
AUTO
button.
The t
emper
at
ure is regulated automatically.
The air output is increased from vents 1 and
2
›››
page 138.
Driving
Ad
dr
e
ss
Introduction
The power steering is not hydraulic but elec-
tromech
anical. The advantage of this steer-
ing is that it foes not need flexible hydraulic
pipes, hydraulic oil, pump, filter or other
parts. The electromechanical system saves
fuel. Whereas a hydraulic system needs con-
tinuous oil pressure, electromechanical
steering only needs power when it is used.
In vehicles with electromechanical steering,
the assisted steering function automatically
adjusts according to vehicle speed, steering
wheel torque and wheel orientation. The
power steering only works when the engine
is running.
WARNING
If the power steering does not work, you will
need much more s
trength to turn the wheel.
This has a considerable effect on vehicle
safety.
●
The power steering only works when the
engine is running.
●
Never allow the vehicle to move when the
engine is switched off.
●
Never remove the key from the ignition
while the vehicle is moving. The steering lock
could be engaged and vehicle steering would
not work.
Note
The ignition of the vehicle being towed must
be sw
itc
hed on to prevent the steering wheel
from locking and also to allow the use of the
turn signals, horn, windscreen wipers and
washers.
Control lamp
The control lamp should light up for a few
sec
ond
s
when the ignition is switched on. It
should go out once the engine is started.
It lights up red
The electromechani-
cal steering is dam-
aged.
Have the steering checked im-
mediately by a specialised work-
shop.
It lights up yellow
Electromechanical
steering operation
is limited.
See a specialised workshop im-
mediately and have the steering
checked.
If the yellow warning lamp does
not light up again after the en-
gine is restarted and the vehicle
has travelled a short distance,
you do not need to take it to a
specialised workshop.
»
145
Technical dataAdviceOperationEmergenciesSafety
Operation
It lights up yellow
The 12-volt battery
was disconnected
and has been recon-
nected.
Take the vehicle for a short run
at 15-20 km/h (9-12 mph).
It flashes yellow
The steering column
is tight.
Turn the wheel a little to both
sides.
The steering column
does not unlock or
lock.
Remove the key from the ignition
and switch the ignition back on.
If necessary, check the messag-
es displayed on the instrument
panel display.
Do not drive on if the steering
column remains locked after the
ignition has been switched on.
Seek specialist assistance.
WARNING
If the warning lamps and the corresponding
mess
ages are ignored when they light up, the
vehicle may stall in traffic and cause acci-
dents and severe injuries.
●
Never ignore the warning lamps or messag-
es.
●
Stop the vehicle at the next opportunity
and in a safe place.
Note
Failure to heed the control lamps and corre-
sponding t
ext messages when they light up
may result in damage to the vehicle.
Information relating to different vehi-
cle pr
ocesses.
In order to make the vehicle more difficult to
ste
al, you should always lock the steering be-
fore leaving the vehicle.
Mechanical steering lock
The steering column is locked when the key
is removed from the ignition lock and the ve-
hicle is stationary.
Activating the steering lock
●
Park the vehicle
›››
page 149.
●
Remove the ignition key.
●
Turn the steering wheel slightly until the
steering lock has engaged.
Deactivating the steering lock
●
Turn the steering wheel slightly to release
the lock.
●
Insert the key in the ignition lock.
●
Hold the steering wheel in this position
and switch on the ignition.
Electromechanical steering
In vehicles with electromechanical steering,
the assisted steering function automatically
adjusts according to vehicle speed, steering
wheel torque and wheel orientation. The
power steering only works when the engine
is running.
You should take into account that you will
need considerably more power than normal
to steer the vehicle if the power steering is
not working correctly or at all.
Power-assisted steering
Power-assisted steering helps the driver in
critical situations. In counter-steering, it as-
sists by applying additional torque ›››
.
WARNING
Power-assisted steering, together with the
ESC, helps
the driver to control vehicle steer-
ing in critical situations. However, the driver
is ultimately responsible for steering the ve-
hicle at all times. Power-assisted steering
does not remove this responsibility.
146
Driving
Starting and stopping the en-
gine
Ignition k
ey
po
sitions
Fig. 156 Ignition key positions.
Read the additional information carefully
›
›
›
page 21
Ignition switched off, steering lock
1
In this position ›
›
›
Fig. 156, the ignition and
the engine are OFF and the steering may be
locked.
For the Steering lock to operate without the
ignition key, turn the steering wheel until it
locks with an audible sound. You should al-
ways lock the steering wheel when you leave
your vehicle. This will help prevent vehicle
theft ›››
.
Switching the ignition or the glow plug sys-
t
em on
2
Turn the ignition key to this position and re-
l
e
a
se it. If the key cannot be turned or it is
difficult to turn from position
1
to position
2
, move the steering wheel from one side to
the other; thi
s
w
ill release it.
Starting
3
The engine is started when the key is in this
po
s
ition. El
ectrical devices with high power
consumption are switched off temporarily at
the same time.
Each time that the vehicle is restarted, the ig-
nition key must be turned to position
1
. The
r
epetitiv
e s
tart prevention lock of the igni-
tion prevents possible damage to the starter
motor if the engine is already running.
WARNING
●
The ignition key mu
st NOT be removed from
the lock until the vehicle comes to a stand-
still. Otherwise, the steering could be imme-
diately blocked- Risk of accident!
●
Always remove the key from the ignition
when leaving the vehicle, even if only for a
short period. This is especially important if
children or disabled people are left alone in
the vehicle. They could accidentally start the
engine or work electrical equipment such as
the electric windows, resulting in an acci-
dent.
●
Unsuper
vised use of the key could start the
engine or any electrical system, such as the
electric windows. This could result in serious
injury.
CAUTION
The starter motor will only work when the en-
gine i
s s
topped (ignition key position
3
).
Electronic immobiliser “SAFE”
The electronic immobiliser prevents unau-
thori
sed per
son
s from driving the vehicle.
Inside the key there is a chip that deactivates
the electronic immobiliser automatically
when the key is inserted into the ignition.
The electronic immobiliser will be activated
again automatically as soon as you pull the
key out of the ignition lock.
The engine can only be started using a genu-
ine SEAT key with its correct code.
If the following message* is shown on the in-
strument panel display: SAFE, the vehicle
cannot be started.
The engine can, however, be started if the
appropriate coded SEAT genuine key is used.
»
147
Technical dataAdviceOperationEmergenciesSafety
Operation
Note
A perfect operation of the vehicle is ensured
if genuine
SEAT keys are used.
Starting petrol engines
The engine can only be started using a genu-
ine SEA
T key with its correct code.
–
Move the gearbox lever to the neutral posi-
tion and depress the clutch pedal thor-
oughly and hold it in this position for the
starter to turn the engine on.
–
Turn the ignition key to the starting posi-
tion
›››
page 147.
–
Let go of the ignition key as soon as the en-
gine starts; the starter motor must not run
on with the engine.
After starting a very hot engine, you may
need to slightly press down the accelerator.
When starting a cold engine, it may be a little
noisy for the first few seconds until oil pres-
sure has built up in the hydraulic valve com-
pensators. This is quite normal, and no cause
for concern.
If the engine does not start immediately,
switch the starter off after 10 seconds and try
again after half a minute. If the engine still
does not start, the fuel pump fuse should be
checked
›››
page 80, Fuses.
WARNING
●
Never st
art or run the engine in unventila-
ted or closed rooms. The exhaust gases con-
tain carbon monoxide, an odourless and col-
ourless poisonous gas. Risk of fatal acci-
dents. Carbon monoxide can cause loss of
consciousness and result in death.
●
Never leave the vehicle unattended if the
engine is running.
●
Never use “cold start sprays”, they could
explode or cause the engine to run at high
revs. Risk of injury.
CAUTION
●
When the engine is
cold, you should avoid
high engine speeds, driving at full throttle
and over-loading the engine. Risk of engine
damage.
●
The vehicle should not be pushed or towed
more than 50 metres to start the engine. Un-
burnt fuel could enter the catalytic converter
and damage it.
●
Before attempting to push-start or tow a ve-
hicle in order to start it, you should first try to
start it using the battery of another vehicle.
Please observe and follow the notes on the
›››
page 52, How to jump start.
For the sake of the environment
Do not warm-up the engine by running the
engine with the
vehicle stationary. Start off
immediately, driving gently. This helps the
engine reach operating temperature faster
and reduce
s emissions.
Starting diesel engines
The engine can only be started using a genu-
ine SEA
T key with its correct code.
–
Move the gearbox lever to the neutral posi-
tion and depress the clutch pedal thor-
oughly and hold it in this position for the
starter to turn the engine on.
–
Turn the ignition key to position ›››
Fig. 156
2
. The warning lamp w
i
l
l light for en-
gine pre-heating.
–
When the lamp turns off, turn the ignition
key to position
3
to start the engine. Do
not
pr
e
ss the accelerator.
–
Release the ignition key as soon as the en-
gine starts. The starter motor should not
turn at the same time.
When starting a cold engine, it may be a little
noisy for the first few seconds until oil pres-
sure has built up in the hydraulic valve com-
pensators. This is quite normal, and no cause
for concern.
If there are problems starting the engine, see
the ›››
page 52.
148
Driving
Glow plug system for the diesel engine
T
o av
oid u
nnecessary discharging of the bat-
tery, do not use any other major electrical
equipment while the glow plugs are pre-heat-
ing.
Start the engine as soon as the glow plug
warning lamp goes out.
Starting a diesel engine after the fuel tank
has been completely run dry
If the fuel tank has been completely run dry,
it may take longer than normal (up to one mi-
nute) to start a diesel engine after refuelling.
This is because the fuel system must elimi-
nate air first.
WARNING
Observe the safety warnings ›››
in Starting
petrol
engines on page 148.
CAUTION
●
When the engine is
cold, you should avoid
high engine speeds, driving at full throttle
and over-loading the engine. Risk of engine
damage.
●
The vehicle should not be pushed or towed
more than 50 metres to start the engine. Un-
burnt fuel could enter the catalytic converter
and damage it.
●
Before attempting to push-start or tow a ve-
hicle in order to start it, you should first try to
start it using the battery of another vehicle.
Please observe and follow the notes on the
›››
page 52, How to jump start.
For the sake of the environment
Do not warm-up the engine by running the
en
gine with the
vehicle stationary. You
should drive off as soon as you start the en-
gine. This helps the engine reach operating
temperature faster and reduces emissions.
Switching off the engine
–
Stop the vehicle.
–
Turn the ignition key to position ›
›
›
Fig. 156
1
.
Af
t
er sw
itching the engine off, the radiator
fan may run on for up to 10 minutes. It is also
possible that the fan turns itself on once
more if the coolant temperature increases
due to the heat accumulated in the engine
compartment or due to its prolonged expo-
sure to solar radiation.
WARNING
●
Never swit
ch the engine off until the vehi-
cle is completely stationary.
●
The brake servo works only when the en-
gine is running. With the engine switched off,
more strength is needed to brake. As normal
brake operation cannot be performed, risk of
accident
s and serious injury may exist.
●
The steering lock can be immediately
blocked once the key is removed from the ig-
nition. The vehicle cannot be steered. Risk of
accident.
●
Power-assisted steering does not work
when the engine is off, and more strength is
needed to turn the wheel.
●
If the key is removed from the ignition lock
the steering lock could be engaged and vehi-
cle steering would not work.
CAUTION
When the engine has been running under a
heavy lo
ad for a long period, heat can accu-
mulate in the engine compartment and cause
engine damage. For this reason, idle the en-
gine for approximately 2 minutes before
switching it off.
Braking and parking
Br
ak
in
g capacity and braking distance
The efficiency of the brakes depends directly
on the br
ak
e p
ad wear. This wear depends to
a great extent on the conditions under which
the vehicle is operated and the way the vehi-
cle is driven. If you often drive in town, drive
short distances or have a sporty driving style,
we recommend that you have the thickness
»
149
Technical dataAdviceOperationEmergenciesSafety
Operation
of your brake pads checked by technical serv-
ic
e
s
more frequently than recommended in
the Maintenance Programme.
If you drive with wet brakes, for example, af-
ter crossing areas of water, on days of heavy
rainfall or even after washing the car, the ef-
fect of the brakes is reduced as the brake
discs are wet or even frozen (in winter): in
this case, the brakes should be “dried” by
pressing the brake pedal several times.
WARNING
Longer braking distances and faults in the
brake sy
stem increase the risk of accidents.
●
New brake pads must be run in and do not
have the correct friction during the first
200 km. This reduced braking capacity may
be compensated for by pressing on the brake
pedal a little harder, which also applies when
the brake pads have to be changed further
on.
●
If brakes are wet or frozen, or if you are
driving on roads which have been salted,
braking power may be lower than normal.
●
On steep slopes, if brakes are excessively
used, they will overheat. Before driving down
a long steep slope, it is advisable to reduce
speed and change down into a lower gear or
range (depending on the type of transmis-
sion). Thus, make use of engine braking and
relieve the brakes.
●
Never let the brakes “drag” by applying
light pressure. Continuous braking will cause
the brakes to overheat and the braking dis-
tance w
ill increase. Apply and then release
the brakes alternately.
●
Never let the vehicle run with the engine
switched off. The braking distance is in-
creased considerably when the brake servo is
not active.
●
If the brake fluid loses its viscosity and is
subjected to heavy use, vapour bubbles can
form in the brake system. This reduces the ef-
ficiency of the brakes.
●
Non-standard or damaged front spoilers
could restrict the airflow to the brakes and
cause them to overheat. Before purchasing
accessories please observe the relevant in-
structions ››› page 187, Modifications.
●
If a brake system circuit fails, the braking
distance will be increased considerably. Con-
tact a specialised workshop immediately and
avoid unnecessary journeys.
Control lamp
Situations in which the warning lamp lights
up *
●
the brake fluid level is too low
›
›
›
page 206.
●
there is a fault in the brake system.
This warning lamp can light up together with
the ABS system warning lamp.
WARNING
●
If the brak
e warning lamp does not go out
or if it lights up when driving, the brake fluid
level in the reservoir is too low so there is a
risk of an accident ››› page 206, Brake fluid.
Stop the vehicle and do not drive on. Obtain
technical assistance.
●
If the brake warning lamp lights up to-
gether with the ABS lamp this could be
due to an ABS fault. This could cause the rear
wheels to lock quickly when you brake. This
could cause the rear to break away. Risk of
skidding. Stop the vehicle and seek technical
assistance.
Handbrake
Fig. 157 Handbrake between the front seats.
The handbrake should be applied firmly to
pr
ev
ent
the vehicle from accidentally rolling
away. Always apply the handbrake when you
leave your vehicle and when you park.
150
Driving
Applying the handbrake
–
Pull the handbrake lever up firmly
›
›
›
Fig. 157.
Releasing the handbrake
–
Pull the lever up slightly and press the re-
lease knob in the direction of the arrow
››› Fig. 157 and guide the handbrake lever
down fully ›››
.
A
lw
a
ys pull the handbrake all the way up, so
there is less risk of driving off with it still en-
gaged ›››
.
The h
andbr
ak
e warning lamp lights up
when the handbrake is applied and the igni-
tion switched on. The warning lamp turns off
when the handbrake is released.
WARNING
●
Never use the h
andbrake to stop the vehi-
cle when it is in motion. The braking distance
is considerably longer, because braking is
only applied to the rear wheels. Risk of acci-
dent!
●
If the handbrake is only partially released,
this will cause the rear brakes to overheat,
which can impair the function of the brake
system and could lead to an accident. This al-
so causes premature wear on the rear brake
pads.
CAUTION
Always apply the handbrake before you leave
the vehic
le. Put it in 1st gear as well. In vehi-
cles with an automatic gearbox, place the
gear lever in position P.
Parking
The handbrake should always be firmly ap-
plied when the v
ehicle is parked.
Always note the following points when park-
ing the vehicle:
–
Use the brake pedal to stop the vehicle.
–
Apply the handbrake.
–
Put it in 1st gear.
–
Switch the engine off and remove the key
from the ignition. T
urn the steering wheel
slightly to engage the steering lock.
–
Always take you keys with you when you
leave the vehicle
›››
.
Ad
dition
a
l notes on parking the vehicle on
gradients:
Turn the steering wheel so that the vehicle
rolls against the kerb if it started to roll.
●
If the vehicle is parked facing downhill,
turn the front wheels so that they point to-
wards the kerb.
●
If the vehicle is parked facing uphill, turn
the front wheels so that they point away from
the kerb.
●
Secure the vehicle as usual by applying the
handbrake firmly and putting it in 1st gear.
WARNING
●
Take me
asures to reduce the risk of injury
when you leave your vehicle unattended.
●
Never park where the hot exhaust system
could ignite inflammable materials, such as
dry grass, low bushes, spilt fuel etc.
●
Never allow vehicle occupants to remain in
the vehicle when it is locked. They would be
unable to open the vehicle from the inside,
and could become trapped in the vehicle in
an emergency. In the event of an emergency,
locked doors will delay assistance to vehicle
occupants.
●
Never leave children alone in the vehicle.
They could set the vehicle in motion, for ex-
ample, by releasing the handbrake or the
gearbox lever.
●
Depending on weather conditions, it may
become extremely hot or cold inside the vehi-
cle. This can be fatal.
151
Technical dataAdviceOperationEmergenciesSafety
Operation
Braking and stability systems
El
ectr
onic
Stability Control (ESC)*
This Electronic Stability System reduces the
risk of
skidding and improves the vehicle's
stability and ability to hold the road.
The Electronic Stability Control (ESC) contains
the electronic differential lock (EDL) and the
traction control system (ASR). The ESC works
together with the ABS. Both control lamps
will light up if the ESC or ABS systems are
faulty.
The ESC system is started automatically
when the engine is started.
The ESC system is always active and cannot
be switched off. With the Easy Connect sys-
tem it is only possible to deactivate the ASR
or else select Sport mode.
The ASR can be deactivated when wheel spin
is desirable
›››
page 153.
For example:
●
When driving with snow chains.
●
When driving in deep snow or on loose sur-
face
s.
●
When the vehicle is stuck, to rock it back-
wards and forwards.
Press the button to switch the ASR back on
when you no longer need wheel spin.
Electronic Stability Control (ESC)*
The ESC reduces the risk of skidding by brak-
ing the wheels individually.
The system uses the steering wheel angle
and road speed to calculate the changes of
direction desired by the driver, and constant-
ly compares them with the actual behaviour
of the vehicle. When irregularities occur, for
example, if the vehicle begins to skid, the
ESC brakes the appropriate wheel automati-
cally.
The forces acting on the braked wheel bring
the vehicle back to a stable condition. If the
vehicle tends to oversteer (the rear end
slides out), the system will act on the front
wheel on the outside of the turn.
Control lamp
There are two control lamps for the electronic
stability control. The lamp provides infor-
mation concerning function and disconnec-
tion status.
Both control lamps light up together when
the ignition is switched on and should turn
off after approximately 2 seconds. This is the
time taken for the function check.
This programme includes the ABS, EDL and
ASR. It also includes emergency braking as-
sistance (BAS).
The control lamp has the following func-
tions:
●
It flashes whilst driving when the ASR/ESC
is activated.
●
It will light up if there is a fault in the ESC.
●
As the ESC operates in conjunction with the
ABS, the ESC light will also come on if a fault
should occur in the ABS.
If the ESC control lamp lights up and stays
on after the engine is started, this may mean
that the control system has temporarily
switched off the ESC. In this case the ESC can
be reactivated by switching the ignition off
and then on again. If the control lamp goes
out, this means the system is fully functional.
The lamp provides information about the
disconnection status of the system:
●
It stays lit when the ASR is disconnected on
pressing the switch or if we select ESC
Sport mode, only by means of Easy Connect.
WARNING
●
Do not for
get that the electronic stability
control ESC cannot defy the laws of physics.
This should be kept in mind, particularly on
slippery and wet roads and when towing a
trailer.
●
Always adapt your driving style to suit the
condition of the roads and the traffic situa-
tion. The greater safety provided by the ESC
should not encourage you to run any risks.
152
Driving
CAUTION
●
To ens
ure that the ESC works correctly, all
four wheels must be fitted with the same
tyres. Any differences in the rolling radius of
the tyres can cause the system to reduce en-
gine power when this is not desired.
●
Any modifications made to the vehicle (for
example, to the engine, brake system, run-
ning gear or to the combination of wheels
and tyres) may affect the operation of the
ABS, EDL, ESC and ASR.
Traction control system (ASR)*
The traction control system prevents the driv-
en wheel
s
fr
om spinning when the vehicle is
accelerating. This system always includes
ABS.
Description and operation of the traction
control system during acceleration (ASR)
On front-wheel drive vehicles, the ASR sys-
tem intervenes, reducing engine power and
preventing the driven wheels from slipping
during acceleration. The system works in the
entire speed range in conjunction with ABS.
If a failure occurs in the ABS, the ASR will al-
so stop working.
TCS helps the car to start moving, accelerate
and climb a gradient in slippery conditions
where this may otherwise be difficult or even
impossible.
The ASR automatically switches on when the
engine is started. If necessary, it could be
connected or disconnected by means of the
Easy Connect system.
When the ASR is off, the warning lamp lights
up . The ASR should normally be left on.
Only in exceptional circumstances, when
wheel spin is required, can they be turned off
using the ESC button, for example:
●
With compact temporary spare wheel.
●
When using the snow chains.
●
When driving in deep snow or on soft ter-
rain.
●
When the vehicle is bogged-down, to free it
“by rocking it.”
The ASR should be switched on again as
soon as possible.
Control lamp
There are two control lamps for the traction
control system: and . Both control lamps
light up together when the ignition is switch-
ed on and should turn off after approximately
2 seconds. This is the time taken for the func-
tion check.
The lamp has the following function:
●
It flashes when the ASR is working if the ve-
hicle is moving.
If the system is deactivated or if it has any
fault, the warning lamp will remain lit. The
warning lamp will also light up if a fault
should occur in the ABS because the ASR op-
erates in conjunction with the ABS. For fur-
ther information, see ››› page 153.
The lamp provides information about the
disconnection status of the system:
●
It stays lit when the ASR is disconnected
via Easy Connect.
By means of Easy Connect, the ASR function
is reactivated and the warning lamp switched
off.
WARNING
●
Remember that
not even the ASR can defy
the laws of physics. This should be kept in
mind, particularly on slippery and wet roads
and when towing a trailer.
●
Always adapt your driving style to suit the
condition of the roads and the traffic situa-
tion. The greater safety provided by the ASR
should not encourage you to run any risks.
CAUTION
●
To ens
ure that the ASR works correctly,
identical tyres should be fitted on all four
wheels. Any differences in the rolling radius
of the tyres can cause the system to reduce
engine power when this is not desired.
»
153
Technical dataAdviceOperationEmergenciesSafety
Operation
●
Any modific
ations made to the vehicle (for
example, to the engine, brake system, run-
ning gear or to the combination of wheels
and tyres) may affect the operation of the
ABS and ASR.
Connecting/disconnecting ESC and
ASR
The ESC is switched on automatically when
the engine is
started, and only works when
the engine is running and includes the ABS,
EDS and ASR systems.
The ASR and ESC function should only be
switched off in situations in which traction is
insufficient, among others:
●
When driving in deep snow or on surfaces
that ar
e not very firm.
●
To “free” the vehicle if it gets stuck.
Then switch the ASR and ESC function back
on.
Depending on finishes and versions, it is
possible either to disconnect only the ASR or
else activate ESC Sport mode.
ESC in “Sport” mode
Sport mode can be connected via the Easy
Connect ››› page 99 system menu. The ability
of the ESC to stabilise the vehicle is limited;
the traction control system (ASR) becomes
disabled ›››
.
The c
ontr
o
l lamp lights up. For vehicles
with a driver information system*, the driver
will be shown the electronic stability
control (ESC) option: sport.
Warning! Limited stability.
Disable ESC “Sport” mode
Through the Easy Connect system menu
››› page 99. The warning lamp will switch
off. For vehicles with a driver information sys-
tem*, the driver will be shown the elec-
tronic stability control (ESC)
option: on.
Disable ASR
The Easy Connect system menu is used to
switch off the ASR ››› page 99. The traction
control system will be disabled.
The control lamp lights up. For vehicles
with a driver information system* the driver
will be informed that ASR is disabled.
Activate ASR
The Easy Connect system menu ››› page 99 is
used to switch on the ASR. The traction con-
trol system will be enabled.
The control lamp switches off. For vehicles
with a driver information system* the driver
will be informed that ASR is enabled.
●
Activate or deactivate the ASR or ESC func-
tion in the Easy Connect system by means of
the button
and the function buttons
Set
up
and
E
SC
System
.
WARNING
You should switch on the ESC Sport mode on-
ly if the tr
affic conditions and your driving
ability allow you to do so safely: risk of skid-
ding!
●
With ESC in Sport mode, the stabilising
function will be limited to allow for a sportier
drive. The driving wheels could spin and the
vehicle could skid.
Note
If the ASR is disconnected or the ESC’s Sport
mode is sel
ected, cruise control* will be
switched off.
Electronic differential lock (EDS)*
The EDL operates along with the ABS in vehi-
c
l
e
s equipped with Electronic Stability Con-
trol (ESC)*.
EDL helps the vehicle to start moving, accel-
erate and climb a gradient in slippery condi-
tions where this may otherwise be difficult or
even impossible.
It uses the ABS sensors to monitor the speed
of the driven wheels.
154
Driving
At speeds of up to approximately 80 km/h
(50 mph), it
i
s
able to balance out differences
in the speed of the driven wheels of approxi-
mately 100 rpm/min caused by a partially
slippery road surface. It does this by braking
the wheel which has lost traction and distrib-
uting more driving force to the other driven
wheel via the differential.
To prevent the disc brake of the braking
wheel from overheating, the EDL cuts out au-
tomatically if subjected to excessive loads.
The vehicle will continue to function normally
without EDL. For this reason, the driver is not
informed that the EDL has been switched off.
The EDL will switch on again automatically
when the brake has cooled down.
Control lamp
A malfunction in the EDL is indicated by the
ABS control lamp ››› page 155. Take the
vehicle to a specialised workshop as soon as
possible.
WARNING
●
When accel
erating on a slippery surface,
for example on ice and snow, press the accel-
erator carefully. Despite EDL, the driven
wheels may start to spin. This could impair
the vehicle's stability.
●
Always adapt your driving style to suit road
conditions and the traffic situation. Do not let
the extra safety afforded by EDL tempt you in-
to taking any risks when driving, this can
cause ac
cidents.
CAUTION
Modifications to the vehicle (e.g. to the en-
gine, the br
ake sy
stem, running gear or any
components affecting the wheels and tyres)
could affect the efficiency of the EDL
››› page 187.
Hydraulic Brake Assist (HBA)*
The function (Hydraulic Brake Assist HBA) is
on
ly
inc
luded in vehicles with ESC.
In an emergency, most drivers brake in time,
but not with maximum force. This results in
unnecessarily long braking distances.
This is when the brake assist system comes
into action. When pressing the brake pedal
rapidly, the assistant interprets it as an emer-
gency. It very quickly builds up the full brake
pressure so that the ABS can be activated
more quickly and efficiently, thus reducing
braking distance.
Do not reduce the pressure on the brake ped-
al, since the brake assist system switches off
automatically as soon as you release the
brake.
Automatic hazard warning lights activation
The brake lights flash automatically to indi-
cate that the vehicle is braking suddenly or in
an emergency situation. If the emergency
braking continues until the vehicle comes to
a standstill, the hazard warning lights will
then come on and the brake lights will re-
main on permanently from that moment. The
warning lights will automatically switch off
when the vehicle begins to move again or
when the "warning" light button is pressed.
WARNING
●
The risk of
accident is higher if you drive
too fast, if you do not keep your distance from
the vehicle in front, and when the road sur-
face is slippery or wet. The increased acci-
dent risk cannot be reduced by the brake as-
sist system.
●
The brake assist system cannot defy the
laws of physics. Slippery and wet roads are
dangerous even with the brake assist system!
Therefore, it is essential that you adjust your
speed to suit the road and traffic conditions.
Do not let the extra safety features tempt you
into taking any risks when driving.
Anti-lock brake system (ABS)
The anti-lock brake (ABS) system prevents
the wheel
s
fr
om locking during braking and
is an important part of the vehicle's active
safety system.
»
155
Technical dataAdviceOperationEmergenciesSafety
Operation
How the ABS works
If
one of
the wheel
s turns too slowly in rela-
tion to the vehicle's speed, and is close to
locking, the system will reduce the braking
pressure to this wheel. The driver is made
aware of this control process by a pulsating
of the brake pedal and audible noise. This is
a deliberate warning to the driver that one or
more of the wheels is tending to lock and the
ABS control function has intervened. In this
situation it is important to keep the brake
pedal fully depressed so the ABS can regu-
late the brake application. Do not “pump”.
If you brake hard on a slippery road surface,
the best possible control is retained as the
wheels do not lock.
However, ABS will not necessarily guarantee
shorter braking distances in all conditions.
Braking distance could even be further if you
brake on gravel or on fresh snow on a slip-
pery surface.
Control lamp
The control lamp lights up for a few sec-
onds when the ignition is switched on. It
goes out again after the system has run
through an automatic test sequence.
There is a fault in the ABS if:
●
The control lamp does not light up when
the ignition is switched on.
●
The control lamp does not go out again af-
ter a few seconds.
●
The control lamp lights up when the vehicle
is moving.
The vehicle can still be braked in the normal
way, without the ABS function. Take the vehi-
cle to a specialised workshop as soon as
possible.
If there is a fault in the ABS, the ESC* and the
tyre pressure control lamp will also light up.
Brake system fault
If the ABS warning lamp lights up together
with the brake warning lamp , there is a
fault in the ABS function and in the brake
system ›››
.
WARNING
●
The anti-lock br
ake system cannot defy the
laws of physics. Slippery and wet roads are
dangerous even with ABS! If you notice that
the ABS is working (to counteract locked
wheels under braking), you should reduce
speed immediately to suit the road and traffic
conditions. Do not let the extra safety fea-
tures tempt you into taking any risks when
driving.
●
The effectiveness of ABS is also determined
by the tyres fitted ››› page 210.
●
If the running gear or brake system is modi-
fied, the effectiveness of the ABS could be se-
verely limited.
WARNING
●
Befor
e opening the bonnet, read and ob-
serve the warnings ››› page 198, Working in
the engine compartment.
●
If the brake system warning lamp should
light up together with the ABS warning lamp
, stop the vehicle immediately and check
the brake fluid level in the reservoir
››› page 206, Brake fluid. If the brake fluid
level has dropped below the “MIN” mark you
must not drive on. Risk of accident. Obtain
technical assistance.
●
If the brake fluid level is correct, the fault in
the brake system may have been caused by a
failure of the ABS system. This could cause
the rear wheels to lock quickly when you
brake. This could cause the rear to break
away. Risk of skidding. Stop the vehicle and
seek technical assistance.
Electronic differential lock (XDS)*
When taking a curve, the driveshaft differen-
ti
al
mec
hanism allows the outer wheel to turn
at a higher speed than the inner wheel. In
this way, the wheel that is turning faster (out-
er wheel) receives less drive torque than the
inner wheel. This may mean that in certain
situations the torque delivered to the inner
wheel is too high, causing the wheels to
spin. On the other hand, the outer wheel is
receiving a lower drive torque than it could
transmit. This causes an overall loss of lateral
156
Driving
grip on the front axle, resulting in understeer
or “l
en
g
thening” of the trajectory.
The XDS system can detect and correct this
effect via the sensors and signals of the ESC.
Via the ESC, the XDS will brake the inside
wheel and counter the excess driving torque
of that wheel. This means that the driver's
desired trajectory is much more precise.
The XDS system works in combination with
the ESC and is always active, even when ASR
traction control is disconnected or the ESC is
in Sport mode.
Brake servo
The brake servo increases the pressure you
ap
p
ly
to the brake pedal. It works only when
the engine is running.
If the brake servo is not functioning, e.g. due
to a malfunction, or if the vehicle is being
towed, you will have to press the brake pedal
considerably harder to make up for the lack
of servo assistance.
WARNING
The braking distance can also be affected by
extern
al factors.
●
Never let the vehicle coast with the engine
switched off. Failure to follow this instruction
could result in an accident. The braking dis-
tance is increased considerably when the
brake ser
vo is not active.
●
If the brake servo is not working, for exam-
ple when the vehicle is being towed, you will
have to press the brake pedal considerably
harder than normal.
Hill driving assistant*
This function is only included in vehicles with
ESC.
The hil
l driving assistant helps the driver to
move off and upward on a hill when the vehi-
cle is stationary.
The system maintains brake pressure for ap-
proximately two seconds after the driver
takes his foot off the brake pedal to prevent
the vehicle from lurching backward when it is
started. During these 2 seconds, the driver
has enough time to release the clutch pedal
and accelerate without the vehicle moving
and without having to use the handbrake,
making start-up easier, more comfortable
and safer.
These are the basic operation conditions:
●
being on a ramp or hill/slope,
●
doors closed,
●
vehicle completely stationary,
●
engine running and foot on the brake,
●
beside
s having a gear engaged or being in
neutral for manual gear change and with the
selector lever at position S, D or R for an au-
tomatic gearbox.
This system is also active when reversing up-
hill.
WARNING
●
If y
ou do not start the vehicle immediately
after taking your foot off the brake pedal, the
vehicle may start to roll back under certain
conditions. Depress the brake pedal or use
the hand brake immediately.
●
If the engine stalls, depress the brake ped-
al or use the hand brake immediately.
●
When following a line of traffic uphill, if you
want to prevent the vehicle from rolling back
accidentally when starting off, hold the brake
pedal down for a few seconds before starting
off.
Note
The Official Service or a specialist workshop
can tel
l you if your vehicle is equipped with
this system.
157
Technical dataAdviceOperationEmergenciesSafety
Operation
Manual gearbox
Driv
in
g w
ith manual gearbox
Read the additional information carefully
›››
page 37
Certain versions of the model may include a
6-speed manual gearbox, and its diagram is
shown on the gearbox lever.
The reverse gear can only be engaged when
the car is stationary. When the engine is run-
ning and before engaging this gear, wait
about 6 seconds with the clutch pressed
down thoroughly in order to protect the gear-
box.
The reverse lights switch on when the reverse
gear is selected and the ignition is on.
WARNING
●
When the engine is
running, the vehicle
will start to move as soon as a gear is engag-
ed and the clutch released.
●
Never select the reverse gear when the ve-
hicle is in motion. Risk of accident.
Note
●
Do not re
st your hand on the gear lever
while driving. The pressure of your hand
could cause premature wear on the selector
forks in the gearbox.
●
When chan
ging gear, you should always
depress the clutch fully to avoid unnecessary
wear and damage.
●
Do not “slip” the clutch to hold the vehicle
on a hill. This causes premature wear and
damage to the clutch.
●
Do not leave your foot on the clutch pedal;
although the pressure may seem insignifi-
cant, it can cause the premature wear of the
clutch plate. Use the foot rest when you do
not need to change gear.
Gear-change indicator
3 Valid for vehicles: with a manual gearbox
The r
ecommended gear for saving fuel is in-
dicated on the dash screen of certain vehi-
cles during driving.
Display Meaning
The optimal gear is selected.
Changing to a higher gear is recommended.
Changing to a lower gear is recommended.
Information regarding the “cleanliness” of
the die
sel
p
articulate filter
The exhaust system manager detects that the
diesel particulate filter is nearly saturated
and contributes to self-cleaning by recom-
mending the optimal gear. For this purpose,
it might be necessary to drive momentarily
with a high rpm ››› page 167.
WARNING
The gear change indicator is only an auxiliary
function and in no c
ase should be a substi-
tute for careful driving.
●
The responsibility of choosing the correct
gear depending on the situation (e.g. over-
taking, driving up or down a slope or towing a
trailer) lies with the driver.
For the sake of the environment
Selecting the correct gear can help to save
fuel.
Note
The recommended gear display is switched
off when the clut
ch pedal is pressed.
Automatic gearbox*
Driv
in
g pr
ogrammes
Read the additional information carefully
›
›
›
page 38
The automatic gearbox has got two gearbox
programmes.
158
Driving
Selecting the normal programme
–
Put the selector lever into position D.
Sel
ectin
g the s
port programme
–
Put the selector lever into position S.
If you select the normal programme, D, you
will drive in the economy mode, i.e. the pro-
gramme is designed to reduce fuel consump-
tion. The gearbox changes up into a higher
gear as soon as possible and down into a
lower gear as late as possible.
If you select the sport programme, S, you will
drive in a sporty mode, i.e. a programme in
which shifts into high gears are postponed in
order to use the full power of the engine.
Selector lever positions
Read the additional information carefully
›
›
›
page 38
Selector lever positions
The gear selected is displayed on the side of
the selector lever and on the display
1)
in the
combi-instrument. The currently selected
gear for the automatic gearbox will also be
shown on the display.
Tiptronic gear indicator
If the automatic gearbox is shifted manually,
the selected gears are shown on the screen
at all times
1)
.
P - parking lock
When the selector lever is in this position,
the driven wheels are locked mechanically.
Position P on the lever must only be selected
if the vehicle is stationary.
To move selector lever from position P, the
locking button on the selector lever handle
must be pressed and the brake pedal de-
pressed at the same time while the ignition is
switched on.
To put the selector lever in position P, simply
press the lock button down and, if necessary,
depress the brake pedal down.
R - Reverse gear
The reverse gear is engaged in this position.
Reverse gear must be engaged only when the
vehicle is stationary and the engine is idling.
To move the selector lever to position R,
press the lock button down and, at the same
time, press the brake pedal down, with the
ignition switched on.
With the selector lever in position R and the
ignition switched on the following occurs:
●
Reverse lights light up.
●
The air conditioner automatically changes
the air recirculation mode.
●
The wiper starts if the windscreen washer is
on.
●
The parking distance warning system*
switches on.
N - Neutral (idling)
If this position is selected, the gearbox is in
neutral. Power is not transmitted to the
wheels and the engine does not have a brak-
ing function.
Never use the N position to drive down a long
hill. There is no engine braking and the
brakes are subjected to excessive stain.
You could damage the automatic gearbox if
you drive down hills with the gearbox lever in
position N and the engine switched off.
»
1)
Vehicles with the basic level of equipment do not
show the pos
ition of the gear selector lever on the
screen.
159
Technical dataAdviceOperationEmergenciesSafety
Operation
D - Drive (forward)
In thi
s
po
sition the gearbox automatically
changes to a lower or higher gear, according
to the engine's requirements, the driving
style and speed. The braking effect of the en-
gine when driving downhill is very limited
when the selector is in this position. The in-
strument panel display shows the selected
gear as well as the selector lever in position
D.
When travelling at speeds lower than 5 km/h
(3 mph) or when the vehicle is stationary,
press the brake pedal to change the selector
lever from position N to position D.
S - Standard driving position (Sport pro-
gramme)
When the selector lever is in position S, it will
automatically change up into a higher gear
later, and change down into a low gear, if
compared with position D. This way, it is pos-
sible to take full advantage of the engine re-
serve power, depending on the engine de-
mand, driving style and speed. The braking
effect of the engine when driving downhill is
very limited. On the instrument panel display
the selected gear is shown as well as the se-
lector lever to position S.
To select gear range S, press the lock button
on the selector lever.
WARNING
●
As a driver
, you should never leave your ve-
hicle if the engine is running and a gear range
is engaged. If you have to leave your vehicle
while the engine is running, you must apply
the parking brake and put the selector lever
in position P.
●
If the engine is running and if D or R is en-
gaged, you will need to hold the car on the
foot brake. The car will creep forward as the
power transmission is not fully interrupted
even when the engine is idling.
●
Never accelerate when moving the selector
lever or you may cause an accident.
●
Never move the selector lever to R or P
when driving. Risk of accident!
●
Before driving down a long, steep slope, it
is advisable to reduce speed and change into
a lower gear.
●
If you stop the vehicle up hill, always hold
the foot brake strongly depressed down to
stop it from rolling back.
●
Never allow the brake to rub and do not use
the brake pedal too often or for long periods.
Constant braking will cause the brakes to
overheat and will considerably reduce the
brake effect. This increases the braking dis-
tance and could cause the brake system to
fail.
●
Never allow the car to roll down a gradient
with the gear in neutral N, or in selector lever
position D, even if the engine is not running.
●
If the v
ehicle moves with no control, an ac-
cident and serious injury may occur.
WARNING
Never switch the engine off until the vehicle
i
s s
tationary. You could lose control of your
vehicle. This could cause an accident and se-
rious injury.
●
The airbags and belt tensioners do not
work when the ignition is switched off.
●
The brake servo does not work with the en-
gine off. You need more force to stop the vehi-
cle.
●
Power steering does not work when the en-
gine is not running. That is why it is much
more difficult to turn the steering wheel.
●
Never remove the key from the ignition if
the vehicle is in motion. The steering lock
could suddenly engage, and you would not be
able to steer the vehicle.
CAUTION
If you allow the vehicle to move when the en-
gine is sw
itched off or with the selector lever
in position “N”, take your foot off the acceler-
ator and wait until the engine starts idling
before returning to position “D”.
160
Driving
Selector lever lock
Fig. 158 Automatic gearbox
The selector lever lock in position P or N pre-
v
ents
g
ears from being engaged inadvertent-
ly, which would cause the vehicle to move.
The selector lever lock is released as follows:
–
Switch the ignition on.
–
Press and hold the brake pedal and press
the selector lever lock on the left of the se-
lector lever at the same time ››› Fig. 158.
The warning lamp on the instrument panel
lights up when the brake pedal should be ap-
plied. This is essential when the selector lev-
er is taken from the P or N positions.
Level lock only engages with the vehicle sta-
tionary at a speed of up to 5 km/h (3 mph).
At speeds of over 5 km/h (3 mph) the selec-
tor lever lock is automatically deactivated in
position N.
The selector lever lock is not engaged if the
selector lever is moved quickly through posi-
tion N (e.g. when shifting from R to D). This
makes it possible, for instance, to “rock” the
vehicle backwards and forwards if it is stuck
in snow or mud. The selector lever lock en-
gages automatically if the brake pedal is not
depressed and the lever is in position N for
more than about 1 second.
Selecting gears manually with Tip-
tronic mode*
Fig. 159 Changing gear with Tiptronic.
Fig. 160 Steering wheel with paddle levers
for autom
atic gearbox.
The Tiptronic system allows the driver to se-
l
ect
g
ears manually.
Changing gear with the selector lever
–
Press the selector lever from position D to
the right into the tiptronic selector gate.
–
Lightly press the selector lever forward
››› Fig. 159
+
to change up to a higher
g
e
ar
.
–
Lightly press the selector lever backward
››› Fig. 159
-
to change down to a lower
g
e
ar
.
Changing gear with the steering wheel pad-
dle levers*
–
Press the right paddle lever
+
towards the
s
t
eerin
g wheel to change up ››› Fig. 160.
–
Press the left paddle lever
-
towards the
s
t
eerin
g wheel to change down ››› Fig. 160.
»
161
Technical dataAdviceOperationEmergenciesSafety
Operation
Using the paddle levers on the steering
wheel,
y
ou c
an access manual driving mode
regardless of the pre-selected driving mode.
General information about driving in tiptron-
ic mode
When accelerating, the automatic gearbox /
DSG automatic gearbox goes into a higher
gear a little before the engine reaches its
maximum permitted revolutions.
If a lower gear is selected, the automatic
gearbox / DSG automatic gearbox will only
change down when the engine cannot go
over its maximum permitted revolutions.
If “tiptronic” is selected whilst the vehicle is
in motion and the automatic gearbox / DSG
automatic gearbox is in third gear and selec-
tor lever position D, “tiptronic” mode will
then also be in third gear.
Changing gears in the normal or sport pro-
gramme using the steering wheel paddle lev-
ers
If the paddle levers ››› Fig. 160 are used in
the normal or sport programme, the system
switches temporarily to “tiptronic” mode. To
exit “Tiptronic” mode again, press the right
paddle lever
+
towards the steering wheel
f
or ap
pr
oximately one second. You will also
leave “tiptronic” mode if the paddle levers
are not moved for a certain time.
Note
●
The gear p
addle levers on the steering
wheel can be operated with the selector lever
in any position and with the vehicle in mo-
tion.
Driving tips
The gearbox changes gear ratios automatical-
ly as
the vehicle moves.
Starting
–
Start the engine with the selector lever in
position
P or N.
Driving
–
Press and hold the brake pedal.
–
Holding down the lock button (button on
the selector lever), select R or D.
–
Release the lever and wait a little for the
gearbox to engage the gear (a slight move-
ment can be felt).
–
Release the brake and press the accelerator
›››
in Selector lever positions on
p
ag
e 160
.
Stopping briefly
–
If stopping for a short time, keep the vehi-
cle stationary by pressing the foot brake
hard to prevent the vehicle moving back-
wards on a slope or “creeping” forwards,
e.g. at traffic lights. The selector lever does
not need to be put into the positions P or N
for this.
–
Do not press the accelerator.
Parking
–
Press and hold the brake pedal until the ve-
hicle comes to a standstill ›››
in Selector
l
ev
er po
sitions on page 160.
–
Apply the handbrake.
–
By pressing the lock button down, move
the selector lever to P and release the lock
button.
Driving up and down hills
–
Press the selector lever from position “D”
to the right into the tiptronic selector gate.
–
Lightly press the selector lever back to
change down.
Holding the car on a hill
–
The brake must be always pressed down to
prevent the vehicle from “rolling back-
wards” ›››
in Selector lever positions on
p
ag
e 160
. Do not try to prevent the vehicle
from “rolling backwards” by increasing the
engine speed while a range of gears is se-
lected.
162
Driving
Starting the vehicle up hills
–
Apply the handbrake.
–
With a selected gear, accelerate slowly and
at
the s
ame time, r
elease the handbrake.
The steeper the slope, the lower the needed
gear. This increases the braking effect of the
engine. For example, when driving down a
very steep slope in third gear. If the engine
brake effect is not enough, the vehicle will
speed up. The automatic gearbox automati-
cally changes up to prevent the engine over-
revving. Use the foot brake to reduce speed
and change into 3rd gear using Tiptronic*
›››
in Selector lever positions on page 160.
Y
our
v
ehicle has an automatic interlock
which prevents the selector lever from being
put into a position for driving forwards or in
reverse from positions P or N if the brake
pedal is not depressed.
The ignition key cannot be removed unless
the selector lever is in position P.
Control lamp “Pressing brake pedal”
When the warning lamp next to the selector
lever lights up, press the brake pedal. This is
necessary when the automatic gearbox selec-
tor lever is moved out of positions P or N. A
text message or instructions to perform nec-
essary operations may appear on the instru-
ment panel.
CAUTION
●
If y
ou stop the vehicle up hills, do not at-
tempt to stop it from rolling back by depress-
ing the accelerator when a gear has been se-
lected. Otherwise, the automatic gearbox
may overheat causing damage. Pull the hand-
brake up or fully depress the brake pedal to
prevent the vehicle from rolling away.
●
If you allow the vehicle to roll when the en-
gine is not running, or with the selector lever
in position N, a lack of lubrication in the auto-
matic gearbox will damage it.
Kick-down feature
This feature allows maximum acceleration.
If
y
ou press the accelerator down thoroughly,
the gearbox automatically changes down, de-
pending on speed and engine speed, into a
lower gear to take full advantage of give the
vehicle maximum acceleration.
The gearbox does not change gear until the
engine reaches the maximum determined en-
gine speed for the gear.
WARNING
You could lose control of the vehicle if you ac-
celer
ate on slippery road surfaces. Risk of se-
rious injury.
●
Be particularly careful when using the kick-
down features on slippery road surfaces. With
a fast acceleration, the vehicle could lose
traction and skid.
●
Y
ou should use the kick-down feature only
when traffic and weather conditions allow it
to be used safely.
Gearbox malfunctions
Gearbox: Fault! Stop the ve-
hicle and place the lever in the
position P.
There is
a fault in the gearbox. Stop the vehi-
cle in a safe place and do not continue driv-
ing. Seek specialist assistance.
Gearbox: System fault! You
may continue driving.
Have the fault corrected by a specialised
workshop without delay.
Gearbox: System fault! You
can continue driving with re-
strictions. Reverse gear disa‐
bled
Take the vehicle to a specialised workshop
and have the fault repaired without delay.
Gearbox: System fault! You
can continue driving in D until
switching off the engine
»
163
Technical dataAdviceOperationEmergenciesSafety
Operation
Stop the vehicle in a safe place well away
fr
om mo
v
ing traffic. Seek specialist assis-
tance.
Gearbox: too hot. Adapt your
driving accordingly
Continue driving at moderate speeds. When
the warning lamp switches off, you can con-
tinue driving in a normal manner.
Gearbox: press the brake and
engage a gear again.
If the fault was caused by a gearbox with a
high temperature, this driver message will be
displayed when the gearbox has cooled
again.
Run-in and economical driving
Running in a new engine
The engine needs to be run in over the first
1,500 km (900 mi
l
e
s).
Up to 1000 kilometres (600 miles)
–
Do not drive at speeds of more than 2/3
the maximum speed.
–
Do not accelerate hard.
–
Avoid high engine revolutions.
–
Do not tow a trailer.
From 1000 to 1500 kilometres (600 to 900
miles)
–
Speeds can be gradually increased to the
maximum road speed or maximum permis-
sible engine speed (rpm).
During its first few hours of running, the in-
ternal friction in the engine is greater than
later on, when all the moving parts have bed-
ded in.
For the sake of the environment
If the engine is run in gently, its life will be in-
cre
ased and its oil consumption reduced.
Tyre and brake pad run-in
New tyres should be run-in carefully for the
fir
s
t
500 km (300 miles). New brake pads
should be run-in carefully for the first 200 km
(125 miles).
During the first 200 km (125 miles), you can
compensate for the reduced braking effect by
applying more pressure to the brake pedal. In
case of a sharp braking, the braking distance
will be longer with new brake pads than with
brake pads which have been run-in.
WARNING
●
At firs
t, new tyres do not give maximum
grip, and require running-in. This may cause
an accident. Drive particularly carefully in the
first
500 km (300 miles).
●
New brake pads must be “run in” and do
not have the correct friction properties during
the first 200 km (125 miles). However, the re-
duced braking capacity may be compensated
by pressing on the brake pedal a little harder.
Environmental compatibility
Environmental protection is a top priority in
the design, c
hoice of materials and manufac-
ture of your new SEAT.
Constructive measures to encourage recy-
cling
●
Joints and connections designed for easy
dismantlin
g.
●
Modular construction to facilitate disman-
tling.
●
Increased use of single-grade materials.
●
Plastic parts and elastomers are marked in
accordance with ISO 1043, ISO 11469 and
ISO 1629.
Choice of materials
●
Use of recycled materials.
●
Use of compatible plastics in the same part
if its components are not easily separated.
●
Use of recycled materials and/or materials
originating from renewable sources.
164
Driving
●
R
eduction of
volatile components, includ-
ing odour, in plastic materials.
●
Use of CFC-free coolants.
Ban on heavy metals, with the exceptions
dictated by law (Annex II of ELV Directive
2000/53/EC): cadmium, lead, mercury, hexa-
valent chromium.
Manufacturing methods
●
Reduction of the quantity of thinner in the
protective wax for cavities.
●
Use of plastic film as protection during ve-
hicle transport.
●
Use of solvent-free adhesives.
●
Use of CFC-free coolants in cooling sys-
tems.
●
Recycling and energy recovery from resi-
dues (RDF).
●
Improvement in the quality of waste water.
●
Use of systems for the recovery of residual
heat (thermal recovery, enthalpy wheels,
etc.).
●
The use of water-soluble paints.
Economical and environmentally-
friendly driving
Fuel consumption, environmental pollution
and w
e
ar t
o the engine, brakes and tyres de-
pends in large part on your driving style. By
adopting an economical driving style and an-
ticipating the traffic situation ahead, you can
easily reduce fuel consumption by 10-15%.
Some tips on how to help you reduce pollu-
tion while saving money are listed below.
Active cylinder management (ACT
®
)
Depending on the equipment, the vehicle
may have active cylinder management
(ACT
®
).
The active cylinder management (ACT
®
) may
automatically deactivate some of the engine
cylinders if the driving situation does not re-
quire too much power. When it is switched
off, no fuel is injected into these cylinders,
hence total fuel consumption may be re-
duced. The number of active cylinders can be
seen on the instrument panel display
›››
page 30.
Drive anticipating the traffic situation
A vehicle uses most fuel when accelerating.
When you anticipate situations, you have to
brake less often and, thus, accelerate less. If
it is possible, let the vehicle roll with a gear
engaged, for example, if you see a red light
ahead. The braking effect achieved in this
way helps to reduce the wear of brakes and
tyres; emissions and fuel consumption are
reduced to zero (disconnection due to iner-
tia).
Change gear early to save energy
An effective way of saving fuel is to change
up quickly through the gears. Running the
engine at high rpm in the lower gears uses
an unnecessary amount of fuel.
Manual gearbox: shift up from first to second
gear as soon as possible. We recommend
that, whenever possible, you change to a
higher gear upon reaching 2000 rpm. Follow
the “recommended gear” indication that ap-
pears on the instrument panel ››› page 158.
Avoid driving at high speed
We advise you not to drive at the top speed
permitted by the vehicle. Fuel consumption,
exhaust emissions and noise levels all in-
crease very rapidly at higher speeds. Driving
at moderate speeds will help to save fuel.
Avoid idling
It is worthwhile switching off the engine
when waiting in a traffic jam, at level cross-
ings or at traffic lights with a long red phase.
The fuel saved after only 30 - 40 seconds is
greater than the amount of fuel needed to re-
start the engine.
The engine takes a long time to warm up
when it is idling. Mechanical wear and pollu-
tant emissions are also especially high dur-
ing this initial warm-up phase. It is therefore
best to drive off immediately after starting
»
165
Technical dataAdviceOperationEmergenciesSafety
Operation
the engine. Avoid running the engine at high
s
peed.
P
eriodic
maintenance
Periodic maintenance work guarantees that,
before beginning a journey, you will not con-
sume more than the required amount of fuel.
A well-serviced engine gives you the benefit
of improved fuel efficiency as well as maxi-
mum reliability and an enhanced resale val-
ue.
A badly serviced engine can consume up to
10% more fuel than necessary.
Avoid short journeys
To reduce the consumption and emission of
polluting exhaust gases, the engine and the
exhaust gas filtration systems should reach
the optimum operating temperature.
With the engine cold, fuel consumption is
proportionally higher. The engine does not
warm up and fuel consumption does not nor-
malise until having driven approximately four
kilometres (2.5 miles). This is why we recom-
mend avoiding short trips whenever possi-
ble.
Maintain the correct tyre pressures
Bear in mind that keeping the tyres at an ad-
equate pressure saves fuel. If the tyre pres-
sure is just one bar (14.5 psi/100 kPa) too
low, fuel consumption can increase by as
much as 5%. Due to the greater rolling resist-
ance, under-inflation also increases tyre wear
wear and impairs handling.
The tyre pressures should always be checked
when the tyres are cold.
Do not use winter tyres all year round as they
increase fuel consumption by up to 10%.
Avoid unnecessary weight
Given that every kilo of extra weight will in-
crease the fuel consumption, it is advisable
to always check the luggage compartment to
make sure that no unnecessary loads are be-
ing transported.
A roof rack is often left in place for the sake
of convenience, even when it is no longer
needed. At a speed of 100 km/h (62 mph)
and 120 km/h (75 mph) your vehicle will use
about 12% more fuel as a result of the extra
wind resistance caused by the roof rack even
when it is not in use.
Save electricity
The engine activates the alternator, which
produces electricity. With the need for elec-
tricity, fuel consumption also increases. Be-
cause of this, always turn off electrical devi-
ces when you do not need them. Examples of
devices that use a lot of electricity are: the
blower at high speeds, the rear window heat-
ing or the seat heaters*.
Note
●
If y
our vehicle has Start-Stop, it is not rec-
ommended that you switch this function off.
●
It is recommended that you close the win-
dows when driving at more than 60 km/h
(37 mph).
●
Do not drive with your foot resting on the
clutch pedal,, as the pressure can make the
plate spin, more fuel will be used and it can
burn the clutch plate lining, causing a serious
fault.
●
Do not hold the car on a hill with the clutch,
use the foot brake or hand brake, using the
latter to start. The fuel consumption will be
lower and you will prevent the clutch plate
from being damaged.
●
On descents, use the engine brake, chang-
ing to the gear that is more suitable for the
slope. Fuel consumption will be “zero” and
the brakes will not suffer.
Engine management and ex-
h
au
s
t gas purification system
Introduction
WARNING
●
Becau
se of the high temperatures which
can occur in the exhaust purification system
(catalytic converter or diesel particulate fil-
ter), do not park the vehicle where the
166
Driving
exhaust can come into contact with flamma-
ble m
aterials under the car (e.g. on grass or
at the forest edge). Fire hazard!
●
Do not apply wax underneath the vehicle
around the area of the exhaust system: Fire
hazard!
Note
While the control lamps , , or r
e-
main lit, ther
e may be engine problems, fuel
consumption may increase and the engine
may lose power.
Catalytic converter
To maintain the useful life of the catalytic
c
on
v
erter
–
Use only unleaded petrol with petrol en-
gines, as lead damages the catalytic con-
verter.
–
Do not let the fuel get too low in the tank.
–
For engine oil changes, do not replenish
with too much engine oil ››› page 203, Top-
ping up engine oil.
–
Never tow the vehicle to start it, use jump
leads if necessary ›››
page 52.
If you notice misfiring, uneven running or
loss of power when the vehicle is moving, re-
duce speed immediately and have the vehi-
cle inspected at the nearest specialised
workshop. In general, the exhaust warning
lamp will light up when any of the described
symptoms occur ››› page 98. If this happens,
unburnt fuel can enter the exhaust system
and escape into the environment. The cata-
lytic converter can also be damaged by over-
heating.
CAUTION
Never run the fuel tank completely dry be-
cause the irr
egularity of the fuel supply may
cause ignition problems. This allows unburnt
fuel to enter the exhaust system, which could
cause overheating and damage the catalytic
converter.
For the sake of the environment
Even when the emission control system is
workin
g perfectly, there may be a smell of
sulphur from the exhaust gas under some
conditions. This depends on the sulphur con-
tent of the fuel used. Quite often the problem
can be solved by changing to another brand
of fuel.
Diesel engine particulate filter*
Fig. 161 Vehicle data sticker on back cover of
the M
aint
en
ance Programme.
Your vehicle is fitted with a DPF (Diesel Partic-
u
l
at
e Filter) if the vehicle data sticker (back
cover of the “Maintenance Programme”) lists
the code PR 7GG ››› Fig. 161.
The diesel engine particulate filter eliminates
most of the soot from the exhaust gas sys-
tem. Under normal driving conditions, the fil-
ter cleans itself. If this is not possible (for ex-
ample, multiple short trips) the filter will be
obstructed by soot and the diesel engine
particulate filter warning lamp will light up.
This does not represent a fault, it is a warning
that indicates that the filter has not been
able to regenerate automatically and that you
must perform a cleaning cycle, as indicated
below.
»
167
Technical dataAdviceOperationEmergenciesSafety
Operation
Accumulation of soot in the diesel engine
p
ar
tic
ulate filter*
If the control lamp lights up you should
help the filter clean itself by driving in the ap-
propriate manner.
To do this, drive about 15 minutes in fourth
or fifth gear (automatic gearbox: S gear
range) at a minimum speed of 60 km/h
(37 mph), with the engine running at approxi-
mately 2,000 rpm. In this way, the soot build
up in the filter is burned. When cleaning is
successful, the control lamp turns off.
If the lamp does not turn off, or the three
lamps turn on (particulate filter , fault in
the emission control system and glow
plugs ), drive the vehicle to a specialised
workshop and have the fault repaired at the
earliest opportunity.
WARNING
Always drive according to the road weather
conditions, the t
errain and traffic. Driving rec-
ommendations should never lead to illegal
manoeuvres in surrounding traffic.
CAUTION
●
Your v
ehicle is not designed to use biodie-
sel fuel. Never, under any circumstances re-
fuel with biodiesel. The use of biodiesel fuel
could damage the engine and the fuel sys-
tem. The addition of biodiesel to diesel by
the diesel producer in accordance with stand-
ard EN 590 is authorised and will not cause
damag
e to the engine or the fuel system.
●
Using diesel fuel with a high sulphur con-
tent may significantly reduce the useful life of
the diesel particulate filter. Your Technical
Service will be able to tell you which coun-
tries have diesel with a high sulphur content.
Engine management*
This warning lamp monitors the engine man-
agement sy
stem for petrol engines.
The warning lamp (Electronic Power Con-
trol) lights up when the ignition is switched
on while system operation is being verified. It
should go out once the engine is started.
If there is a fault in the electronic engine
management system while you are driving,
this warning lamp will light up. Take the vehi-
cle to a specialised workshop as soon as
possible and have the engine checked.
Emission control system*
Control lamp fl
a
she
s:
When there is misfiring that can damage the
catalytic converter. Reduce speed and drive
carefully to the nearest specialised workshop
to have the engine checked.
The control lamp lights up:
If a fault has developed during driving which
has reduced the quality of the exhaust gas
(e.g. lambda probe fault). Reduce speed and
drive carefully to the nearest specialised
workshop to have the engine checked.
Engine pre-heating/fault system*
The warning lamp lights up to show that the
glow plug
s are preheating the diesel engine.
The control lamp lights up
If the control lamp lights up when the en-
gine is started it means that the glow plugs
are preheating. The engine can be started
straight away when the lamp switches off.
Control lamp flashes
If a fault develops in the engine management
system while you are driving, the glow plug
system lamp will flash . Take the vehicle to
a specialised workshop as soon as possible
and have the engine checked.
168
Driving
Driving tips
Driv
in
g abr
oad
To drive abroad, the following must be taken
into con
sideration:
●
For vehicles fitted with a catalytic converter
ensure that unleaded petrol is available for
the journey. See the chapter “Refuelling”. Au-
tomobile organisations will have information
about service station networks selling unlea-
ded fuel.
●
In some countries, it is possible that your
car model i
s not sold, and therefore some
spare parts are not available or the technical
services may only be able to carry out limited
repairs.
SEAT importers and distributors will gladly
provide information about the technical prep-
aration that your vehicle requires and also
about necessary maintenance and repair
possibilities.
Adhesive strips for headlights
In countries where vehicles drive on the other
side of the road to your home country, the
asymmetric dipped beam may dazzle drivers
of oncoming vehicles.
To prevent dazzling, you must apply stickers
to certain parts of the headlight lenses. Fur-
ther information is available at any Technical
Service.
In vehicles with adaptive headlights, the ro-
tation system must previously be disconnec-
ted. To do this, please go to a specialised
workshop.
Driving on flooded roads
To prevent damage to the vehicle when driv-
ing through w
ater, for example, along a floo-
ded road, please observe the following:
●
The water should never come above the
lower edg
e of the bodywork.
●
Drive at pedestrian speed.
WARNING
After driving through water, mud, sludge,
etc., the br
aking effect can be delayed slight-
ly due to moisture build-up on the discs and
brake pads. Applying the brakes carefully
several times will remove the moisture and
restore the full braking effect.
CAUTION
●
Driving thr
ough flooded areas may severely
damage vehicle components such as the en-
gine, transmission, running gear or electrical
system.
●
Whenever drivin
g through water, the Start-
Stop system* must be switched off
››› page 170.
Note
●
Chec
k the depth of
the water before enter-
ing the flooded zone.
●
Do not stop in the water, drive in reverse, or
stop the engine in any situation.
●
Note that vehicles travelling in the opposite
direction may splash water that could exceed
the maximum permitted water height for your
vehicle.
●
Avoid driving through salt water (corro-
sion).
169
Technical dataAdviceOperationEmergenciesSafety
Operation
Driver assistance systems
St
ar
t
-Stop System*
Description and operation
The Start-Stop function stops the engine
when the vehic
le is stopped and starts it au-
tomatically when required.
Vehicles with a manual gearbox
–
When the vehicle is stopped, put it into
neutral and r
elease the clutch pedal. The
engine will switch off. The warning lamp
will appear on the instrument panel dis-
play.
–
When the clutch pedal is pressed the en-
gine will start up again. The warning lamp
will switch off.
Vehicles with an automatic gearbox
–
Use the foot brake to bring the vehicle to a
stop and keep the brake pedal pressed
down with your foot. The engine will switch
off. The warning lamp will appear in the
display.
–
When you take your foot off the brake pedal
the engine will start up again. The warning
lamp will switch off.
Start-Stop function conditions
●
The driver seat belt must be buckled.
●
The bonnet must be closed.
●
The engine must be at operating tempera-
ture.
●
The steering wheel must be straight.
●
The vehicle must be on flat ground.
●
The vehicle must not be in reverse.
●
A trailer must not be connected.
●
The temperature of the interior must be
within the comfort limits (
A/C
button should
be sel
ect
ed).
●
The w
indscreen de-mist function must be
off.
●
If in an increase in airflow is not requested.
●
The temperature must not be set to HI or
LO.
●
The driver door must be closed.
●
The diesel particulate filter must not be in
regeneration mode, for diesel engines.
●
The battery charge must not be low for the
next start.
●
Battery temperature must be between -1°C
(+30°F) and +55°C (+131°F).
Start-Stop function interruption
In the following situations, the Start-Stop
function will be interrupted and the engine
will automatically start:
●
The vehicle starts moving.
●
The brake pedal is pressed several times in
a row.
●
The battery has been discharged excessive-
ly.
●
The Start-Stop System is manually deacti-
vated.
●
The windscreen de-mist function is turned
on.
●
The temperature of the interior exceeds the
comfort limits (
A/C
button).
●
If the airflow is increased by more than 3
pr
e
s
ses.
●
Temperature setting HI or LO is selected.
●
The engine coolant temperature is insuffi-
cient.
●
The alternator is faulty, for example the V-
belt has ruptured.
●
If any of the conditions described in the
previous section are not fulfilled.
When the engine is turned off by the Start-
Stop function, this is displayed on the instru-
ment panel.
If the Start-Stop system is not switched on,
the warning lamp will appear on the instru-
ment panel.
170
Driver assistance systems
WARNING
Never allow the vehicle to move with the en-
gine off for an
y reason. You could lose control
of your vehicle. This could cause an accident
and serious injury.
●
The brake servo does not work with the en-
gine off. You need more force to stop the vehi-
cle.
●
Power steering does not work when the en-
gine is not running. That is why it is much
more difficult to turn the steering wheel.
●
Turn off the Start-Stop system when driving
through water (fording streams, etc.).
Note
●
For v
ehicles with the Start-Stop function
and a manual gearbox, when the engine is
started, the clutch must be pressed.
●
When the conditions for the Start-Stop
function are not fulfilled, the instrument pan-
el displays the Start-Stop indicator dimmed.
●
If the steering wheel is turned more than
270°, it will not be possible to start the vehi-
cle again. To start the vehicle, straighten the
steering wheel so that it is turned less than
270°.
●
There are different versions of the dash
panel; the display of indications on the
screen may differ.
Activating and deactivating the Start-
St
op f
u
nction
Fig. 162 The Start-Stop function button.
Every time the ignition is switched on, the
St
ar
t
-Stop function is automatically activa-
ted.
Manually deactivating the Start-Stop func-
tion
–
Press the
›
›
› Fig. 162
button located on
the centre console. When the Start-Stop
function is switched off, the warning lamp
comes on.
–
If the Start-Stop function is operating then
the engine starts immediately.
Switching the Start-Stop function on manual-
ly
–
Press the
›
›› Fig. 162
b
utton located on
the centre console. The warning lamp will
switch off.
Fatigue detection (break rec-
ommendation)*
Introduction
›››
table on page 2
The Fatigue detection informs the driver
when their driving behaviour shows signs of
fatigue.
WARNING
Do not let the comfort afforded by the Fatigue
detection sys
tem tempt you into taking any
risks when driving. Take regular breaks, suffi-
cient in length when making long journeys.
●
The driver always assumes the responsibil-
ity of driving to their full capacity.
●
Never drive if you are tired.
●
The system does not detect the tiredness of
the driver in all circumstances. Consult the in-
formation in the section ››› page 172, System
limitations.
»
171
Technical dataAdviceOperationEmergenciesSafety
Operation
●
In some situation
s, the system may incor-
rectly interpret an intended driving manoeu-
vre as driver tiredness.
●
No warning is given in the event of the ef-
fect called microsleep!
●
Please observe the indications on the in-
strument panel and act as is necessary.
Note
●
F
atigue detection h
as been developed for
driving on motorways and well paved roads
only.
●
If there is a fault in the system, have it
checked by a specialised workshop.
Function and operation
Fig. 163 On the instrument panel display: fa-
tigue det
ection symbo
l
.
Fatigue detection determines the driving be-
h
av
iour of
the driver when starting a journey,
making a calculation of tiredness. This is
constantly compared with the current driving
behaviour. If the system detects that the driv-
er is tired, an audible warning is given with a
sound and an optic warning is shown with a
symbol and complementary message on the
instrument panel display ››› Fig. 163. The
message on the instrument panel display is
shown for approximately 5 seconds, and de-
pending on the case, is repeated. The system
stores the last message displayed.
The message on the instrument panel display
can be switched off by pressing the
button on the windscreen wiper lever or the
b
utt
on
on the multi function steering
wheel
›
›
›
page 25.
The message can be recalled to the instru-
ment panel display using the multifunction
display ›››
page 25.
Conditions of operation
Driving behaviour is only calculated on
speeds above about 65 km/h (40 mph) up to
around 200 km/h (125 mph).
Switching on and off
Fatigue detection can be activated or deacti-
vated in the Easy Connect system with the
button
and the function button
››› page 99. A mark indicates that the adjust-
ment
has been activated.
System limitations
The Fatigue detection h
as certain limitations
inherent to the system. The following condi-
tions can limit the Fatigue detection or pre-
vent it from functioning.
●
At speeds below 65 km/h (40 mph)
●
At speeds above 200 km/h (125 mph)
●
When cornering
●
On roads in poor condition
●
In unfavourable weather conditions
●
When a sporty driving style is employed
●
In the event of a serious distraction to the
driver
Fatigue detection will be restored when the
vehicle is stopped for more than 15 minutes,
when the ignition is switched off or when the
driver has unbuckled their seat belt and
opened the door.
In the event of slow driving during a long pe-
riod of time (below 65 km/h, 40 mph) the
system automatically re-establishes the tired-
ness calculation. When driving at a faster
speed the driving behaviour will be recalcula-
ted.
172
Driver assistance systems
Parking aid
Gener
a
l
information
Various systems are available to help you
when parkin
g or manoeuvring in tight
spaces, depending on the equipment fitted
on your vehicle.
The rear parking aid is an audible assistant
that warns about obstacles located behind
the vehicle ››› page 174.
During parking, Parking System Plus assists
the driver by visually and audibly warning
them about obstacles detected in front and
behind the vehicle ››› page 174.
WARNING
●
Alwa
ys pay attention, also when looking
straight ahead, to traffic and the vehicle sur-
roundings. The assistance systems are not a
replacement for driver awareness. When in-
serting or removing the vehicle from a park-
ing space, or when performing similar ma-
noeuvres the driver always assumes the re-
sponsibility.
●
Adapt your speed and driving style at all
times to suit visibility, weather, road and traf-
fic conditions.
●
The ultrasound sensors have blind spots in
which obstacles and people are not regis-
tered. Pay special attention to children and
animals.
●
Alwa
ys keep visual control of the vehicle
surroundings: use the mirrors for additional
help.
CAUTION
Parking Aid functions may be negatively af-
f
ected b
y different factors that may lead to
damage to the vehicle or its immediate sur-
rounds:
●
Under certain circumstances, the system
does not detect or display certain objects:
–
Objects such as chains, trailer draw bars,
fences, posts and thin trees.
–
Objects that are located above the sen-
sors, such as protrusions in a wall.
–
Objects with certain surfaces or struc-
tures, such as wire mesh fences or pow-
der snow.
●
Certain surfaces of objects and garments
do not reflect the ultrasound sensors' sig-
nals. The system cannot detect, at least cor-
rectly, these objects or people wearing such
clothes.
●
Ultrasound sensor signals may be affected
by external sound sources. In certain circum-
stances this may prevent them from detect-
ing people or objects.
●
Please note that low obstacles detected by
the system may no longer be registered by
the sensors as the car moves closer, so the
system will not give any further warning. In
certain circumstances, objects such as high
kerbs that could damage the bottom of the
vehicl
e are not detected either.
●
If the first warning from the ParkPilot is ig-
nored, the vehicle could suffer considerable
damage.
●
The knocks or damage on the radiator
grille, bumper, wheel arch and vehicle under-
body can adjust the orientation of the sen-
sors. This can affect the parking aid function.
Have the function checked by a specialised
workshop.
Note
●
In cert
ain situations, the system can give a
warning even though there is no obstacle in
the detected area, e.g:
–
with rough or cobbled floors or ground
with long grass;
–
with external ultrasound sources, such as
cleaning vehicles or other vehicles;
–
In downpours, intense snow or dense ex-
haust gases;
–
if the registration plate (front or rear) is
not properly affixed to the bumper sur-
face;
–
or in locations such as the brow of a hill.
●
In order to guarantee good system opera-
tion, keep the ultrasound sensors clean, free
of snow or ice, and do not cover them with
adhesives or other objects.
●
If you use high-pressure or vapour equip-
ment to clean the ultrasound sensors, apply
»
173
Technical dataAdviceOperationEmergenciesSafety
Operation
it directly only very briefly and always from a
dist
ance of more than 10 cm.
●
Retrofitting of accessories to the vehicle,
such as a bicycle rack, may interfere with the
operation of the Parking Aid.
●
In order to familiarise yourself with the sys-
tem, it is advised that you practice parking in
an area or car park that is free from traffic.
There must be good weather and light condi-
tions.
●
The volume and tone of the warnings can
be modified, in addition to the indications
››› page 177.
●
In vehicles without a driver information
system, these parameters can be modified in
a SEAT Official Service or in a specialised
workshop.
●
Please observe information on towing a
trailer ››› page 177.
●
The display on the Easy Connect screen
shows a slight time delay.
Rear parking aid*
The rear Parking Aid assists the driver in
p
ark
in
g by means of audible warning
sounds.
Description
There are sensors integrated in the rear
bumper. When the sensors detect an obsta-
cle, you are alerted by audible warnings.
Make particularly sure that the sensors are
not covered by adhesives, residues and the
like, as this could affect the system's opera-
tion. Cleaning instructions ››› page 191.
The approximate measurement range of the
rear sensors is:
side area 0.60 m
central area 1.60 m
As you approach the obstacle, the time inter-
val betw
een the audible warnings will be re-
duced. When you reach around 0.30 m the
warning will be constant: Do not continue to
move forward (or backward)
›››
in General
inf
orm
ation on p
age 173,
›››
in General in-
f
orm
ation on p
age 173 !
If you maintain separation from the obstacle,
the volume of the warning begins to reduce
after four seconds (does not affect the tone
of the constant warning).
Activating/Deactivating
When engaging reverse gear, the parking aid
is automatically switched on. This is con-
firmed with a short warning.
On disengaging reverse gear, the Parking Aid
system is disconnected immediately.
Parking system plus*
Fig. 164 Represented area.
Parking system plus assists you audibly and
v
i
s
ually when parking.
There are sensors integrated in the front and
rear bumpers. When they detect an obstacle,
you are alerted by audible warnings and visu-
ally on the Easy Connect system.
In the event of danger of a frontal collision,
the audible warnings come from the front of
the vehicle, and in the event of the danger of
a rear-end collision they come from the rear.
Make particularly sure that the sensors are
not covered by adhesives, residues and the
like, as this could affect the system's opera-
tion. Cleaning instructions ››› page 191.
The approximate measurement range of the
sensors is:
1.20 m
A
174
Driver assistance systems
0.60 m
1.60 m
0.60 m
As
y
ou approach the obstacle, the time inter-
val between the audible warnings will be re-
duced. When you reach around 0.30 m the
warning will be constant: do not continue to
move forward (or backward)!
If you maintain separation from the obstacle,
the volume of the warning begins to reduce
after four seconds (does not affect the tone
of the constant warning).
Parking Aid operation
Fig. 165 Centre console: parking aid button.
Manual connection of Parking Aid
●
Press the
b
utt
on
once.
B
C
D
Manual disconnection of Parking Aid
●
Press the b
utt
on
again.
Manual disconnection of Parking Aid display
(the audible sounds remain active)
●
Press a button on the main menu of the fac-
tory-assembled infotainment system.
●
OR: press the BACK function button.
Automatic connection of Parking Aid
●
Engage reverse gear or turn the selector
lever to position R.
●
OR: If the vehicle approaches an obstacle
that is in its forwards path at a speed below
10 km/h (6 mph) ››› page 175, Automatic ac-
tivation. The obstacle is detected as of a dis-
tance of approx. 95 cm if the automatic con-
nection is activated in the infotainment sys-
tem. A reduced display is shown.
Automatic disconnection of Parking Aid
●
Move the selector lever to position P.
●
OR: accelerate to more than approx.
10 km/h (6 mph) forward.
Temporary suppression of sound in Parking
Aid
●
Press the function button found on the
steering wheel.
Change from reduced view to full view
●
Engage reverse gear or turn the selector
lever to position R.
●
OR: press the car icon in reduced view.
If necessary, switch to the rear-assist image
(Rear View Camera “RVC”)
●
Engage reverse gear or turn the selector
lever to position R.
●
OR: Press the RVC function button.
A short confirmation signal will be heard and
the button symbol will light up yellow when
the system is switched on.
Automatic activation
Fig. 166 Miniature indication of automatic ac-
tiv
ation
When the Parking System Plus is switched on
aut
om
atic
ally, a miniature of the vehicle will
»
175
Technical dataAdviceOperationEmergenciesSafety
Operation
be displayed and the segments will be
sho
wn on the l
ef
t side of the screen
››› Fig. 166.
Automatic activation occurs when slowly ap-
proaching an obstacle located in front of the
vehicle. It only operates every time the speed
is reduced below approximately 10 km/h (6
mph) for the first time.
If the parking aid is switched off using the
button, the following actions must be carried
out in order for it to automatically switch on:
●
Switch off the ignition and switch it on
again.
●
OR: accelerate above 10 km/h (6 mph) be-
fore reducing speed below this number
again.
●
OR: place the selector lever in position P
and then move it from this position.
●
OR: switch on and off the automatic activa-
tion in the Easy Connect system menu.
The automatic activation with parking aid
miniature indication can be switched on and
off from the Easy Connect system menu
›››
page 24:
●
Switch the ignition on.
●
Select:
CAR
button > Settings > Parking
and manoeuvring.
●
Select the Automatic activation op-
tion.
When the f
u
nction button check box is
activated , the function is on.
If the system has been activated automatical-
ly, an audible sound warning will only be giv-
en when obstacles in front are at a distance
of less than 50 cm.
CAUTION
The automatic connection of the Parking Aid
only w
orks when you are driving slowly. If
driving style is not adapted to the circum-
stances, an accident and serious injury or
damage may be caused.
Segments of the visual indication
Fig. 167 Parking Aid display on the Easy Con-
nect
sy
s
tem screen.
The distance of separation from the obstacle
c
an be e
s
timated using the segments around
the vehicle.
The optical indication of the segments works
as follows:
a white segment is dis-
played when the obstacle is not within
the vehicle's trajectory or the direction
of travel is in the opposite direction to
its location, and it is more than 30 cm
from the vehicle.
obstacles located in the
vehicle's trajectory and which are more
than 30 cm away from the vehicle are
displayed in yellow.
obstacles that are less than
30 cm away from the vehicle are dis-
played in red.
Moreover, with the SEAT Media System
Plus/Navi System radios, a yellow trail indi-
cates the vehicle's expected journey based
on the steering wheel angle.
Whenever the obstacle is located in the vehi-
cle’s direction of travel, the corresponding
audible warning will sound.
As the vehicle approaches an obstacle, the
segments are displayed closer to the vehicle.
When the penultimate segment is displayed,
this means that the vehicle has reached the
collision zone. In the collision zone, the ob-
stacles are represented in red, including
those out of the path. Do not continue to
move forward (or backward)
›››
in General
inf
orm
ation on p
age 173,
›››
in General in-
f
orm
ation on p
age 173 !
White segments:
Yellow segments:
Red segments:
176
Driver assistance systems
Adjusting the display and audible
w
arnin
g
s
The settings for the display and audible
warning
s are controlled via the Easy Con-
nect*.
Automatic activation
on – activates the Automatic activa-
tion option ››› page 175.
off – deactivates the Automatic ac-
tivation option ››› page 175.
Front volume*
Volume in the front and rear area.
Front sound settings/sharpness*
Frequency (tone) of the sound in the front
area.
Rear volume*
Volume in the rear area.
Rear sound settings/sharpness*
Frequency (tone) of the sound in the rear
area.
Adjust volume
With the parking aid switched on, the active
audio/video source volume will be reduced
to the intensity of the selected setting.
Error messages
When the Parking Aid is activated or when it
is sw
itched on, if a message reporting a Park-
ing aid error is displayed on the instrument
panel, there is a fault in the system.
If the fault doesn't disappear before discon-
necting the ignition, next time that parking
aid is engaged in reverse, it will not be indi-
cated.
Parking System Plus*
If there is a fault in the parking aid system a
message will appear on the instrument panel
indicating the error. In addition the key
LED will blink.
If there is a fault in a sensor, the symbol is
displayed on the Easy Connect display in
front of/behind the vehicle. If a rear sensor is
faulty, only the obstacles in the areas
A
and
B
are displayed
›
›
›
Fig. 164. If a front sensor
is faulty, only the obstacles in the areas
C
and
D
are displayed.
Hav
e the f
au
lt corrected by a specialised
workshop without delay.
Towing bracket
In vehicles equipped with a towing bracket
dev
ic
e fr
om the factory, when the trailer is
connected electrically, the Parking Aid rear
sensors will not be activated when reverse
gear is engaged, when the selector lever is
turned to position R or when the button is
pressed.
Parking System Plus
The distance to possible obstacles at the rear
of the vehicle will not be displayed on the
screen and nor will it be indicated by means
of audible sound signals.
The Easy Connect system screen will only dis-
play objects detected at the front, and the ve-
hicle's trajectory will be hidden.
Rear Assist “Rear View Cam-
era”*
Operating and safety warnings
WARNING
●
The Rear As
sist does not make it possible
to precisely calculate the distance from ob-
stacles (people, vehicles, etc.) and nor can it
overcome the system's own limits, hence us-
ing it may cause serious accidents and inju-
ries if used negligently or without due care.
The driver should be aware of his/her sur-
roundings at all times to ensure safe driving.
●
The camera lens expands and distorts the
field of vision and displays the objects on the
»
177
Technical dataAdviceOperationEmergenciesSafety
Operation
screen in a different, vague manner. The
perception of
distances is also distorted by
this effect.
●
Some objects may, due to the resolution of
the display screen - not be displayed in a sat-
isfactory manner or may not be displayed at
all. Take special care with thin posts, fences,
railings or trees that might not be displayed
on screen and could damage the vehicle.
●
The rear assist has blind spots where it is
not possible to represent people or objects
(small children, animals and certain objects
cannot be detected in its field of vision). Mon-
itor the vehicle's surrounding area at all
times.
●
Keep the camera lens clean, free of ice and
snow, and do not cover it.
●
The system is not a replacement for driver
awareness. Supervise the parking operation
at all times, as well as the vehicle's surround-
ing area. Adapt your speed and driving style
at all times to suit visibility, weather, road
and traffic conditions.
●
Do not be distracted from the traffic by
looking at the screen.
●
The images on the rear assist screen are
only two-dimensional. Due to a lack of spatial
depth, protruding parts or holes in the road,
for example, are more difficult to detect or
may not be seen at all.
●
Vehicle load modifies the representation of
the orientation lines displayed. The width
represented by the lines diminishes with ve-
hicle load. Pay special attention to the vehi-
cle's surroundings when the inside of the ve-
hicle of the luggage compartment is carrying
a heavy lo
ad.
●
In the following situations, the objects or
other vehicles shown in the navigation sys-
tem display appear to be further away or
closer than they really are: Pay special atten-
tion:
–
On moving from a horizontal plane to a
slope.
–
On moving from a slope to a horizontal
plane.
–
If the vehicle is heavily loaded at the
rear.
–
When the vehicle approaches objects
that are not on the ground surface or are
jutting out from it. These objects may al-
so be outside the camera's angle of vi-
sion when reversing.
Note
●
It is
important to take great care and pay
special attention if you are not yet familiar
with the system.
●
Rear assist will not be available if the vehi-
cle's rear lid is open.
Instructions for use
Fig. 168 On the rear bumper: location of the
r
e
ar a
ssist camera
›››
table on page 2
A camera on the rear bumper aids the driver
during reverse parking or manoeuvring
››› Fig. 168. The camera image is viewed to-
gether with orientation lines projected by the
system on the Infotainment system screen.
The bottom of the screen displays part of the
bumper corresponding to the number plate
area that will be used as reference by the
driver.
Rear assist settings:
Rear assist offers the user the possibility to
change the image's brightness, contrast and
colour settings.
To change these settings:
●
Park the vehicle in a safe place.
178
Driver assistance systems
●
Ap
p
ly
the parking brake.
●
Switch the ignition on.
●
If necessary, switch on the Infotainment
system.
●
Engage reverse gear or turn the selector
lever to position R.
●
Press the function button displayed on
the right of the image.
●
Make the desired adjustments on the menu
by pressing the –/+ function buttons or by
moving the corresponding scroll button.
Necessary conditions for parking and ma-
noeuvring with the rear assist
The system should not be used in the follow-
ing cases:
●
If the image displayed is not very reliable or
is distorted, for example low visibility or dirty
lens.
●
If the area behind the vehicle is not dis-
played very clearly or is incomplete.
●
If the vehicle is heavily loaded at the rear.
●
If the position and installation angle of the
camera have been changed, e.g. after a rear-
end collision. Have the system checked by a
specialised workshop.
Familiarising yourself with the system
To familiarise yourself with the system, the
orientation lines and their function, SEAT rec-
ommends practising parking and manoeu-
vring with the rear assist in a place without
too much traffic or in a car park when there
are good weather and visibility conditions.
Cleaning the camera lens
Keep the camera lens clean and clear of snow
and ice:
●
Moisten the lens using a normal alcohol-
based glass cleaning product and clean the
lens with a dry cloth.
●
Remove snow using a small brush.
●
Use de-icing spray to remove any ice.
CAUTION
●
Never use abr
asive cleaning products to
clean the camera lens.
●
Do not use hot or warm water to remove ice
or snow from the camera lens. Doing so could
damage the camera.
Parking and manoeuvring with the
r
e
ar a
ssist
Fig. 169 Display on the Infotainment system
s
c
r
een: orientation lines.
Switching the system on and off
●
The rear assist will switch on when the igni-
tion i
s
on or the en
gine running, on engaging
reverse gear (manual gearbox) or on chang-
ing the selector lever to the R position (auto-
matic gearbox).
●
The system switches off 8 seconds after
disengaging reverse gear (manual gearbox)
or removing the selector lever from the R po-
sition (automatic gearbox). The system will
also disconnect immediately after the igni-
tion is switched off.
●
The camera will stop transmitting images
above the speed of 15 km/h (9 mph) with re-
verse engaged.
»
179
Technical dataAdviceOperationEmergenciesSafety
Operation
In combination with the Parking System Plus
›
›
›
page 173, the camera image will cease to
be transmitted immediately when reverse
gear is disengaged or when the selector lever
is moved from the R position, and the optical
information provided by the Parking Aid sys-
tem will be displayed.
Also in combination with the system, the rear
assist image can also be concealed:
●
By pressing one of the Infotainment system
buttons on the display.
●
OR: By pressing the miniature vehicle that
appears on the left of the screen (which
switches to the full-screen mode of the Park-
ing System Plus's optical system).
If you wish to display the rear assist image
again:
●
Disengage reverse, or change the selector
lever's position, engage reverse again or
move the selector lever to position R.
●
OR: Press the RVC function button
1)
Meaning of the orientation lines
››› Fig. 169
Side lines: extension of the vehicle (the
approximate width of the vehicle plus the
rear view mirrors) on the road surface.
End of the side lines: the area marked in
green ends approximately 2 m behind
the vehicle on the road surface.
Intermediate line: indicates a distance of
approximately 1 m behind the vehicle on
the road surface.
Red horizontal line: indicates a safe dis-
tance of approximately 40 cm at the rear
of the vehicle on the road surface.
Parking manoeuvre
●
Place the vehicle in front of the parking
space and engage reverse gear (manual
gearbox) or move the selector to the R posi-
tion (automatic gearbox).
●
Reverse slowly, and turn the steering wheel
so that the side orientation lines lead to-
wards the parking space.
●
Guide the vehicle into the parking space so
that the side orientation lines run parallel to
it.
1
2
3
4
Cruise speed* (cruise control -
GRA)
Oper
ation
Fig. 170 Turn signal and main beam head-
light
l
ev
er: switch and rocker switch for the
cruise control.
Read the additional information carefully
›
›
›
page 34
The CCS is able to maintain the set speed in
the range from approx. 30 km/h (19 mph) to
180 km/h (112 mph).
Once the speed setting has been saved, you
may take your foot off the accelerator.
1)
WARNING: the RVC (Rear
View Camera) function
button will only be activated and available when the
reverse gear is engaged or the selector lever is set to
position R.
180
Driver assistance systems
When the cruise control is on and a speed is
pr
ogr
ammed, the indic
ator on the instru-
ment panel* is lit.
If the cruise control system is switched off,
the symbol is switched off. The system will
also be switched off fully when the 1st gear
is engaged.*
Switching on the cruise control system
●
Move the switch ››› Fig. 170
1
towards the
l
ef
t
to ON.
Setting speed
●
Briefly press the lower part of the rocker
switch SET– ››› Fig. 170
2
once when you
h
av
e r
eached the speed you wish to set.
When you release the rocker switch, the cur-
rent speed is set and held constant.
Switching off the cruise control system
●
Move the control
1
towards the right to
OFF or t
urn the ignition off
if
the vehicle is
stationary.
WARNING
It could be dangerous to use the cruise con-
trol
system if it is not possible to drive at con-
stant speed.
●
Do not use the cruise control system when
driving in dense traffic, on roads with lots of
bends or on roads with poor conditions (with
ice, slippery surfaces, loose grit or gravel), as
this c
ould cause an accident.
●
Always switch the cruise control system off
after using it in order to avoid involuntary
use.
●
It is dangerous to use a set speed which is
too high for the current road, traffic or weath-
er conditions. Risk of accident.
Note
The cruise control cannot maintain a constant
s
peed when des
cending downhill. It will in-
crease due to its own weight. Use the foot
brake to slow the vehicle.
Adjusting the stored speed*
The speed can be altered without touching
the ac
c
el
erator or the brake.
Setting a higher speed
●
Press the upper part of the rocker switch
RES+ ››› Fig. 170
2
to increase the speed.
The
v
ehic
le will continue to accelerate as
long as you keep the rocker switch pressed.
When you release the switch, the new speed
is stored.
Setting a lower speed
●
Press the lower part of the rocker switch
SET– ››› Fig. 170
2
to reduce the speed. The
vehicle will automatically reduce its speed for
a
s
lon
g as you keep the switch pressed.
When you release the switch, the new speed
is stored.
When you increase speed with the accelera-
tor and then release the pedal, the system
will automatically restore the set speed. This
will not be the case, however, if the vehicle
speed exceeds the stored speed by more
than 10 km/h (6 mph) for longer than 5 mi-
nutes. The speed will have to be stored
again.
Cruise control is switched off if you reduce
speed by depressing the brake pedal. Reacti-
vate the control by pressing once on the up-
per part of the rocker switch RES+ ››› Fig. 170
2
.
Temporary deactivation of cruise con-
tr
o
l*
The cruise control system will be switched off
in the f
o
l
lowing situations:
●
if the brake pedal is depressed,
●
if the clutch pedal is depressed,
●
if the vehicle is accelerated to over
180 km/h (112 mph),
●
when the lever
1
is moved in the direction
of
OFF w
ithout
being fully engaged.
»
181
Technical dataAdviceOperationEmergenciesSafety
Operation
To resume cruise control, release the brake or
c
lut
c
h pedal or reduce the vehicle speed to
less than 180 km/h (112 mph) and press
once on the upper part of the rocker switch
RES+ ››› Fig. 170
2
.
Complete system deactivation
Vehicles with a manual gearbox
The syst
em is completely turned off by mov-
ing the control ››› Fig. 170
1
all the way to
the right hand s
ide (set into the OFF posi-
tion), or when the vehicle is stationary,
switching off the ignition.
Vehicles with an automatic gearbox
To completely disengage the system, the se-
lector lever must be placed in one of the fol-
lowing positions: P, N, R or 1 or with the vehi-
cle stopped and the ignition turned off.
“SEAT Drive Profile” system
Function and oper
ation
Fig. 171 In the centre console: button to ad-
ju
s
t
the "SEAT Drive Profile" system
The “SEAT Drive Profile” system modifies the
s
u
s
pension system's characteristics and
power steering behaviour.
you can choose between 2 different settings
with different characteristics.
CONVEN-
IENCE
Balanced setting, suitable, e.g. for day-to-
day use.
SPORT
This gives the vehicle sporty characteristics
and is suitable for a sporty driving style.
Settings can be changed when the vehicle is
s
t
ation
ary or in movement. When a “SEAT
Drive Profile” setting is changed it is activa-
ted immediately.
Selecting the system setting
●
If necessary, switch on the ignition.
●
To select SPORT mode, press the
››› Fig. 171 b
utt
on u
ntil it lights up.
The CONVENIENCE mode is active when the
button is not lit. The set mode remains
sel
ect
ed af
ter the ignition is switched off.
CUPRA vehicle version
The modes of operation for the CUPRA are
Normal and Sport rather than Comfort and
Sport. The vehicle always starts up in Nor-
mal. The last selection does not remain once
the vehicle is turned off.
WARNING
Adjusting the “SEAT Drive Profile” modifies
driving pr
operties. The “SEAT Drive Profile”
system should never encourage you to take
risks.
●
Adapt your speed and driving style at all
times to suit visibility, weather, road and traf-
fic conditions.
WARNING
If the warning lamps and the corresponding
mess
ages are ignored when they light up, the
vehicle may stall in traffic and cause acci-
dents and severe injuries.
●
Never ignore the warning lamps or messag-
es.
182
Towing bracket device and trailer
●
Stop the v
ehicle at the next opportunity
and in a safe place.
CAUTION
Failure to heed the control lamps and corre-
s
ponding t
ext messages when they light up
may result in damage to the vehicle.
Note
If the “SEAT Drive Profile” system presents a
fault, the
symbol appears on the instrument
panel, with the message Fault: Damping
setting.
Indication on the display and warning
l
amp
There is a fault in the “SEAT Drive Pro-
file” suspension.
See a specialised workshop immediately and have the
“SEAT Drive Profile” suspension checked.
If the yellow warning lamp does not light up again after
the engine is restarted and the vehicle has travelled a
short distance, you do not need to take it to a special-
ised workshop.
Some warning and control lamps will light up
briefly
when the ignition i
s
switched on to
check certain functions. They will switch off
after a few seconds.
WARNING
If the warning lamps and the corresponding
mess
ages are ignored when they light up, the
vehicle may stall in traffic and cause acci-
dents and severe injuries.
●
Never ignore the warning lamps or messag-
es.
WARNING
Changing the “SEAT Drive Profile” settings
while the
vehicle is in motion can distract you
from the road and lead to accidents.
CAUTION
Failure to heed the control lamps when they
light up and the corr
esponding messages
may result in damage to the vehicle.
Note
If the “SEAT Drive Profile” system does not
work a
s described in this chapter, have it
checked immediately by a specialised work-
shop.
Towing bracket device and
tr
ai
l
er
Trailer mode
What do you need to bear in mind
when towing a trailer?
Your vehicle may be used to tow a trailer
when fitted with the c
orrect equipment.
If the car is supplied with a factory-fitted tow-
ing bracket it will already have the necessary
technical modifications and meet the statuto-
ry requirements for towing a trailer. If you
wish to retrofit a towing bracket, consult
››› page 185.
Connectors
Your vehicle is fitted with a 12-pin connector
for the electrical connection between the
trailer and the vehicle.
If the trailer has a 7-pin plug you will need to
use an adapter cable. It is available at any
Technical Service.
Trailer weight/drawbar load
Never exceed the authorised trailer weight. If
you do not load the trailer up to the maxi-
mum permitted trailer weight, you can then
climb correspondingly steeper slopes.
»
183
Technical dataAdviceOperationEmergenciesSafety
Operation
The maximum trailer weights listed are only
ap
p
lic
able for altitudes up to 1000 m above
sea level. With increasing altitude the engine
power and therefore the vehicle climbing
ability are impaired because of the reduced
air density. The maximum trailer weight has
to be reduced accordingly. The weight of the
vehicle and trailer combination must be re-
duced by 10% for every further 1000 m (or
part thereof). The gross combination weight
is the actual weight of the laden vehicle plus
the actual weight of the laden trailer. When
possible, operate the trailer with the maxi-
mum permitted drawbar load on the ball joint
of the towing bracket, but do not exceed the
specified limit.
The figures for trailer weights and drawbar
loads that are given on the data plate of the
towing bracket are for certification purposes
only. The correct figures for your specific
model, which may be lower than these fig-
ures for the towing bracket, are given in the
vehicle documentation or in ››› chapter Tech-
nical Data.
Distributing the load
Distribute loads in the trailer so that heavy
objects are as near to the axle as possible.
Loads carried in the trailer must be secured
to prevent them moving.
Tyre pressure
Set tyre pressure to the maximum permissi-
ble pressure shown on the sticker on the in-
side of the fuel tank flap. Set the tyre pres-
sure of the trailer tyres in accordance with the
trailer manufacturer's recommendations.
Exterior mirrors
Check whether you can see enough of the
road behind the trailer with the standard rear
vision mirrors. If this is not the case, you
should have additional exterior mirrors fitted.
Both exterior mirrors should be mounted on
hinged extension brackets. Adjust the mirrors
to give sufficient vision to the rear.
WARNING
Never transport people in a trailer. This could
res
ult in fatal accidents.
Note
●
Tow
ing a trailer places additional demands
on the vehicle. We recommend additional
services between the normal inspection inter-
vals if the vehicle is used frequently for tow-
ing a trailer.
●
Find out whether special regulations apply
to towing a trailer in your country.
Ball coupling of towing bracket*
The ball coupling is provided with instruc-
tions on fittin
g and removing the ball cou-
pling of the towing bracket.
WARNING
The towing bracket ball coupling must be
stor
ed securely in the luggage compartment
to prevent them being flung through the vehi-
cle and causing injury.
Note
●
By l
aw, the ball coupling must be removed
if a trailer is not being towed if it obscures
the number plate.
Driving tips
Driving with a trailer always requires extra
c
ar
e.
W
eight distribution
The weight distribution of a loaded trailer
with an unladen vehicle is very unfavourable.
However, if this cannot be avoided, drive ex-
tra slowly to allow for the unbalanced weight
distribution.
184
Towing bracket device and trailer
Speed
The s
t
ab
ility of the vehicle and trailer is re-
duced with increasing speed. For this reason,
it is advisable not to drive at the maximum
permissible speed in an unfavourable road,
weather or wind conditions. This applies es-
pecially when driving downhill.
You should always reduce speed immediately
if the trailer shows the slightest sign of snak-
ing. Never try to stop the “snaking” by in-
creasing speed.
Always brake in due course. If the trailer has
an overrun brake, apply the brakes gently at
first and then, firmly. This will prevent the
jerking that can be caused by locking of trail-
er wheels. Select a low gear in due course
before going down a steep downhill. This en-
ables you to use the engine braking to slow
down the vehicle.
Reheating
At very high temperatures and during pro-
longed slopes, driving with a low gear and
high engine speed; always monitor whether
the excessive coolant temperature gauge is
activated ››› page 204.
Retrofitting a towing bracket*
Fig. 172 IBIZA/IBIZA SC: attachment points
f
or t
o
wing bracket.
If a towing bracket is to be fitted after the ve-
hic
l
e i
s purchased, this must be completed
according to the instructions of the towing
bracket manufacturer.
The attachment points
A
for the towing
br
ac
k
et are underneath the vehicle.
The distance between the centre of the ball
coupling and the ground should never be
lower than the indicated value, even with a
fully loaded vehicle and including the maxi-
mum drawbar load.
Elevation values for securing the towing bracket:
Fig. 172 IBIZA/IBIZA SC
B
65 mm (minimum)
C
350 mm to 420 mm (fully laden vehicle)
D
959 mm
E
438 mm
F
209 mm
Fitting a towing bracket
●
Driving with a trailer involves an extra effort
f
or the
v
ehicle. Therefore, before fitting a
towing bracket, please contact a Technical
Service to check whether your cooling system
needs modification.
●
The legal requirements in your country
must be observed (e.g. the fitting of a sepa-
rate control lamp).
●
Certain vehicle components, for example
the rear bumper, must be removed and rein-
stalled. The towing bracket securing bolts
must be tightened using a torque wrench,
»
185
Technical dataAdviceOperationEmergenciesSafety
Operation
and a power socket must be connected to the
v
ehic
l
e electrical system. This requires speci-
alised knowledge and tools.
●
Figures in the illustration show the eleva-
tion value and the attachment points which
must be considered if you are retrofitting a
towing bracket.
WARNING
The towing brackets should be fitted at a spe-
cia
lised workshop.
●
If the towing bracket is incorrectly instal-
led, there is a serious danger of accident.
●
For your own safety, please observe the tow
bracket manufacturer's instructions.
CAUTION
●
If the pow
er socket is incorrectly installed,
this could cause damage to the vehicle elec-
trical system.
Note
●
SEAT r
ecommends that the towing hooks
be fitted at a specialised workshop. In certain
versions this may entail fitting a heat insulat-
ing plate, which is why it is recommended
that you go to a SEAT Dealer. In the event that
the plate is not installed correctly, SEAT is ex-
empt from any liability.
●
Due to the specific design of the exhaust,
the fitting of a conventional towing hook is
not recommended for some sportier versions.
Plea
se consult your Technical Service.
186
Care and maintenance
Advice
C
ar
e and m
aintenance
Accessories and modifications
to the vehicle
Accessories, replacement of parts and
modifications
Your vehicle is designed to offer a high
s
t
and
ard of active and passive safety.
Before purchasing accessories and parts,
and before making technical changes to your
vehicle, we recommend that you consult your
Technical Service.
SEAT dealerships will be happy to provide
you with the latest information about the
use, legal requirements and recommenda-
tions from the manufacturer regarding acces-
sories and spare parts.
We recommend you use only SEAT Approved
Accessories
®
and SEAT Approved Spare
Parts
®
. This way, SEAT can guarantee that
the product in question is suitable, reliable
and safe. SEAT Technical Services have the
necessary experience and facilities to ensure
that parts are correctly and professionally in-
stalled.
Despite a continuous observation of the mar-
ket, SEAT is not able to assess the reliability,
safety and suitability of parts that SEAT has
not approved. For this reason, SEAT cannot
assume responsibility for any non-genuine
parts used, even if these parts have been ap-
proved by an official testing agency or are
covered by an official approval certificate.
Any retro-fitted equipment which has a direct
impact on the driver's control of the vehicle,
such as a cruise control system or electroni-
cally-controlled suspension, must be ap-
proved by SEAT for use in your vehicle and
bear the e mark (the European Union's au-
thorisation symbol).
If any additional electrical devices are fitted
which do not serve to control the vehicle it-
self, such as refrigerator boxes, laptops or
ventilator fans, they must bear the CE mark
(European Union manufacturer conformity
declaration).
WARNING
Accessories, for example telephone holders
or cup hol
ders, should never be fitted on the
covers, or within the working range, of the
airbags. Otherwise, there is a danger of in-
jury if the airbag is triggered in an accident.
Modifications
Modifications must always be carried out ac-
cordin
g to our specifications. Unauthorised
modifications to the electronic components
or software in the vehicle may cause malfunc-
tions. Due to the way the electronic compo-
nents are linked together in networks, other
indirect systems may be affected by the
faults. This can seriously impair safety, lead
to excessive wear of components, and also
invalidate your vehicle registration docu-
ments.
SEAT Technical Services cannot be held liable
for any damage caused by modifications
and/or work incorrectly performed. For this
reason, we recommend having all work per-
formed by a SEAT Technical Service using
SEAT
®
Original Spare Parts.
WARNING
Any type of work or modification performed
incorrectly
on your vehicle can lead to mal-
functions and can cause accidents.
Roof aerial*
The vehicle can be fitted with a foldable* and
anti-thef
t* r
oof
aerial which can be folded
backwards, for example when going through
an automatic car wash.
»
187
Technical dataAdviceOperationEmergenciesSafety
Advice
To fold
Un
s
c
rew the aerial rod, tilting it backwards
into a horizontal position and then screw in
again.
To return to working position
Continue in the reverse order to the previous
instruction.
CAUTION
If an automatic car wash tunnel is used, be-
fore ent
ering the tunnel, put the aerial down
parallel to the roof and do not tighten to
avoid damage.
Mobile phones and two-way radios
SEAT has approved for your vehicle the use of
mo
b
i
le telephones and two-way radios pro-
viding under the following conditions:
●
The external aerial should be correctly in-
stalled.
●
The transmitting power should be a maxi-
mum 10 watts.
The optimal reach of the equipment is only
achieved with an external aerial.
First consult your Technical Service if you
wish to use a mobile telephone or a two-way
radio with a transmitting power output in ex-
cess of 10 watts. Here you will receive infor-
mation concerning the technical possibilities
for retrofitting this equipment.
Mobile telephones and two-way radios
should be only fitted by a specialised work-
shop, for example a SEAT dealership.
WARNING
●
Alwa
ys concentrate primarily on driving. If
you are distracted while driving you could
have an accident.
●
Never attach the telephone mountings to
the surfaces covering the airbag units or
within the range of the airbags. There is a
high danger of injury if the airbag is trig-
gered.
●
Using your mobile telephones or two-way
radios in the vehicle without an external aer-
ial, electromagnetic radiation in the vehicle
could exceed authorised limits. This also may
occur to external aerials that have not been
correctly installed.
CAUTION
Failure to consider the above-mentioned con-
ditions c
ould cause the electronics to mal-
function. The most common causes of faults
are:
●
no external aerial,
●
external aerial incorrectly installed,
●
transmitting power output in excess of 10
watts.
Note
Please observe the operating instructions of
your mob
ile telephone/two-way radio.
Care and cleaning
General
notes
Vehicle maintenance
Regu
lar care and washing help to maintain
the value of the vehicle. This may also be one
of the requirements for acknowledging war-
ranty claims in the event of bodywork corro-
sion or paint defects.
The best way to protect your vehicle against
the harmful effects of the environment is
through correct maintenance and frequent
washing. The longer substances such as in-
sect remains, bird droppings, resinous tree
sap, road dirt, industrial deposits, tar, soot or
road salt and other aggressive materials re-
main on the vehicle, the more damage they
do to the paintwork. High temperatures, for
instance in strong sunlight, further intensify
the corrosive effect.
After winter, a period when salt is put on the
roads, it is important to have the underside
of the vehicle washed thoroughly.
188
Care and maintenance
Products for vehicle maintenance
C
ar
-c
are products are available in your Tech-
nical Services. Keep the product instructions
until you have used them up.
WARNING
●
Car-c
are products can be toxic. Because of
this, they must always be kept closed in their
original container. Keep them out of the reach
of children. Failure to comply could result in
poisoning.
●
Always read and observe the instructions
and warnings on the package before using
car-care products. Improper use could cause
health problems or damage the vehicle. The
use of certain products may produce noxious
vapours; they should be used in well ventila-
ted areas.
●
Never use fuel, turpentine, engine oil, nail
varnish remover or other volatile fluids.
These are toxic and highly flammable. Risk of
fire and explosion.
●
Before washing your vehicle, or carrying
out any maintenance, switch the engine off,
apply the handbrake firmly and remove the
key from the ignition.
CAUTION
Never attempt to remove dirt, mud or dust if
the surf
ace of the vehicle is dry. Never use a
dry cloth or sponge for cleaning purposes.
This could damage the paintwork or the win-
dows of your vehicle. Soak dirt, mud or dust
with plenty of water.
For the sake of the environment
●
When purc
hasing car care products, try to
select ones that are not harmful to the envi-
ronment.
●
The waste from car-care products should
not be disposed of with ordinary household
waste. Observe the disposal information on
the package.
Care of the vehicle exterior
Automatic
car wash tunnel
The vehicle paintwork is so durable that the
v
ehic
l
e can normally be washed without
problems in an automatic car wash tunnel.
However, the paintwork wear depends to a
large extent on the kind of the car wash tun-
nel, the brushes used, its water filtering and
the type of cleaning and preservative prod-
ucts.
Before going through a car wash, be sure to
take the usual precautions such as closing
the windows and sunroof. There is nothing to
note apart from that.
If the vehicle has special accessories such as
spoilers or a roof rack or two-way radio aerial,
etc., it is advisable to consult the car wash
tunnel operator first.
After washing, the brakes could take some
time to respond as the brake discs and pads
could be wet, or even frozen in winter. “Dry”
the brakes by braking several times.
WARNING
Water, ice and salt on the brake system can
reduce br
aking effectiveness. Risk of acci-
dent.
CAUTION
Before putting the vehicle through the car
wash, do not
tighten the aerial if it is folded
because it can be damaged.
Hand-washing
Vehicle washing
–
First soften the dirt and rinse it off with wa-
t
er
.
–
C
lean your vehicle from top to bottom with
a soft sponge, a glove or a brush. Use very
light pressure.
–
Rinse the sponge or glove often with clean
water.
–
Special car shampoo should only be used
for very stubborn dirt.
–
Leave the wheels, sill panels etc. until last,
using a different sponge or glove.
»
189
Technical dataAdviceOperationEmergenciesSafety
Advice
–
Rin
se the
v
ehicle thoroughly with water.
–
Dry the vehicle surface gently with a cha-
mois leather.
–
In cold temperature, dry the rubber seals
and their surfaces to prevent them from
freezing. Apply silicone spray to the rubber
seals.
After washing the vehicle
–
After washing, avoid sudden and sharp
braking. “Dry” the brakes by braking sever-
al times.
WARNING
●
Wash
your vehicle with the ignition switch-
ed off.
●
Protect your hands and arms from cuts on
sharp metal edges when cleaning the under-
body, the inside of the wheel housings etc.
Risk of injury.
●
Water, ice and salt on the brake system can
reduce braking effectiveness. Risk of acci-
dent.
CAUTION
●
Never remo
ve dirt, mud or dust if the vehi-
cle surface is dry. Never use a dry cloth or
sponge for cleaning purposes. This could
scratch the paintwork or glass on your vehi-
cle.
●
Washin
g the vehicle in low temperatures:
when washing the vehicle with a hose, do not
direct water into the lock cylinders or the
gaps around the doors, rear lid, or sunroof.
Risk of freezing.
For the sake of the environment
To protect the environment, the vehicle
shou
ld be w
ashed only in specially provided
wash bays, to prevent toxic, oil-laden waste
water from entering the sewer system. In
some places, washing vehicles outside wash
bays is prohibited.
Note
Do not wash the vehicle in direct sunlight.
Washing the vehicle with a high pres-
s
ur
e c
leaner
Be particularly careful when using a high
pr
e
s
sure cleaner!
–
Always observe the instructions for the
high-pressure cleaner, particularly those
concerning the pressure and the spraying
distance.
–
Increase the spraying distance for soft ma-
terials and painted bumpers.
–
Do not use a high pressure cleaner to re-
move ice or snow from windows
››› page 192.
–
Never use concentrated jet nozzles (“rotat-
ing jets”) ›››
.
–
After washing, avoid sudden and sharp
br
ak
in
g. “Dry” the brakes by braking sever-
al times ››› page 149.
WARNING
●
Never wa
sh tyres with a concentrated jet
(“rotating nozzle”). Even at large spraying
distances and short cleaning times, damage
can occur to the tyres. This may cause an ac-
cident.
●
Water, ice and salt on the brake system can
reduce braking effectiveness. Risk of acci-
dent.
CAUTION
●
Do not use w
ater hotter than +60°C
(+140°F). This could damage the vehicle.
●
To avoid damage to the vehicle, keep a suf-
ficient distance from sensitive materials such
as flexible hoses, plastic, soundproofing ma-
terial, etc. This also applies to bumpers pain-
ted in the colour of the bodywork. The closer
the nozzle is to the surface, the greater the
wear on the material.
190
Care and maintenance
Stickers attached by the factory
Follow these directions to avoid damaging
the stick
ers:
●
Do not use high pressure cleaners.
●
To remove ice or snow from the stickers do
not use window scrapers or ice scrapers.
●
Do not polish the stickers.
●
Do not use dirty cloths or sponges.
●
Preferably wash using a soft sponge and
soft neutral soap.
Sensors and camera lenses
●
Use a small brush to remove snow and a
de-ic
er s
pr
ay to remove ice.
●
Clean the sensors with a solvent-free prod-
uct and a soft, dry cloth.
●
Moisten the camera lens using a standard
alcohol-based glass cleaning agent and
clean the lens with a dry cloth.
CAUTION
●
When you c
lean the vehicle with a pressure
washer:
–
Stay a suitable distance from the sensors
on the front and rear bumpers.
–
Do not clean the camera lenses or sur-
rounding area with the pressure washer.
●
Never use w
arm or hot water to remove
snow and ice from the reverse camera lens,
as it could crack the lens.
●
Never use abrasive cleaning agents on the
lens.
Vehicle paint maintenance
Regular waxing protects the paintwork.
You need to ap
ply wax to your vehicle if water
does not form small drops and run off the
paintwork when it is clean.
Good quality hard wax products are available
at your Technical Service.
Regular wax applications help to protect the
paintwork from environmental contaminants
››› page 188. It is also effective in protecting
against minor scratches.
Even if a wax solution is used regularly in the
vehicle washing tunnel, it is advisable to pro-
tect the paint with a hard wax coating at least
twice a year.
Polishing the paintwork
Polishing is only necessary if the paint has
lo
s
t
its shine, and the gloss cannot be
brought back by applying wax. Polishing
products can be purchased in your Technical
Service.
The vehicle must be waxed after polishing if
the polish used does not contain wax com-
pounds to seal the paint ››› page 191, Vehicle
paint maintenance.
CAUTION
To prevent damage to the paintwork:
●
Do not use polishes and hard wax on pain-
ted par
ts with a matt finish or on plastic
parts.
●
Do not polish your vehicle in a sandy or
dusty environment.
Caring for plastic parts
If normal washing fails to clean plastic parts,
c
l
e
an them with approved solvent-free plas-
tic cleaning and care products.
CAUTION
●
The use of li
quid air freshener directly over
the air vents of the vehicle may damage the
plastic parts if the liquid is accidentally spil-
led.
●
Cleaning products which contain solvents
will damage the material.
191
Technical dataAdviceOperationEmergenciesSafety
Advice
Cleaning of windows and mirrors
Cleaning windows
–
Moisten the windows with commercially
avail
able, alcohol based glass cleaner.
–
Dry the windows with a clean chamois
leather or a lint-free cloth.
Removing snow
–
Use a small brush to remove snow from the
windows and mirrors.
Removing ice
–
Use a de-icer spray.
Use a cl
ean cloth or chamois leather to dry
the windows. The chamois leathers used on
painted surfaces are not suitable to clean
windows because they are soiled with wax
deposits which could smear the windows.
If possible, use a de-icing spray to remove
ice. If you use an ice scraper, push it in one
direction only without swinging it.
Use window cleaner or a silicone remover to
clean rubber, oil, grease and silicone depos-
its off.
Wax deposits can only be removed with a
special cleaner available at your Technical
Service. Wax deposits on the windscreen
could cause the wiper blades to judder. Add-
ing a window cleaner that dissolves wax to
the windscreen washer fluid prevents wiper
blades from juddering, but wax deposits are
not removed.
CAUTION
●
Never use w
arm or hot water to remove
snow and ice from windows and mirrors. This
could cause the glass to crack!
●
The heating element for the rear window is
located on the inner side of the window. To
prevent damage, do not put stickers over the
heating elements on the inside of the win-
dow.
Cleaning windscreen wiper blades
Clean wiper blades improve visibility.
1. Use a soft cloth to remove dust and dirt
fr
om the w
ind
screen wiper blades.
2. Use window cleaner to clean the wind-
screen wiper blades. Use a sponge or a
cloth to remove stubborn dirt.
Care of rubber seals
If rubber seals are well looked after, they will
not
fr
eez
e so quickly.
1. Use a soft cloth to remove dust and dirt
from the rubber seals.
2. Apply a specialist care product to the rub-
ber seals.
The rubber strips on the doors, windows, etc.
will remain pliable and last longer if they are
treated with a suitable rubber care product
from time to time (for example silicone
spray).
Caring for rubber seals will also prevent pre-
mature ageing and leaks. The doors will be
easier to open. If rubber seals are well looked
after, they will not freeze so quickly in winter.
Door lock cylinder
The door lock cylinders can freeze up in win-
t
er
.
T
o de-ice the lock cylinders you should only
use spray with lubricating and anti-corrosive
properties.
Cleaning chrome parts
1. Clean chrome parts with a damp cloth.
2. Polish chrome parts with a soft, dry cloth.
If
thi
s
does not provide satisfying results, use
a specialist chrome cleaning product.
Chrome cleaning products will remove stains
from the surface.
192
Care and maintenance
CAUTION
To prevent scratching chrome surfaces:
●
Never use an abrasive cleaning product on
chrome.
●
Do not
clean or polish chrome parts in a
sandy or dusty environment.
Steel wheel rims
–
Clean steel wheel rims regularly using a
separat
e sponge.
Use an industrial cleaner to remove brake
dust. Any damage to the paint on steel wheel
rims should be repaired before starting to
rust.
WARNING
●
Never wa
sh tyres with a cylindrical jet. Even
at large spraying distances and short clean-
ing times, damage can occur to the tyres.
This may cause an accident.
●
Water, ice and salt on the brake system can
reduce braking effectiveness. Risk of acci-
dent. Directly after washing, avoid sudden
and sharp braking. “Dry” the brakes by brak-
ing several times ››› page 149, Braking ca-
pacity and braking distance.
Alloy wheel rims
Every two weeks
–
Wash salt and brake dust from alloy
wheels.
–
Use an ac
id free detergent to clean the
wheel rims.
Every 3 months
–
Apply a hard wax compound to the wheels.
Alloy wheels require regular attention to pre-
serve their appearance. If road salt and brake
dust are not often removed, the aluminium
finish will be impaired.
Always use an acid-free detergent for alloy
wheel rims.
Car polish or other abrasive agents should
not be used for maintaining the rims. If the
protective coating is damaged, e.g. by flying
stones, the damaged area should be re-
paired immediately.
WARNING
Observe the safety warnings ›››
in Steel
wheel rims on p
age 193.
Vehicle underbody protection
The vehicle underbody is coated to protect it
fr
om c
hemic
al and mechanical damage.
The protective coating can be damaged when
driving. We recommend that you check the
protective coating under the body and on the
running gear, and retouch it if necessary, be-
fore and after the winter season.
We recommend that you go to your Technical
Service to carry out repair work and addition-
al anti-corrosion work.
WARNING
Do not apply underseal or anti-corrosion
coatin
gs to the exhaust pipes, catalytic con-
verter or the heat shields on the exhaust sys-
tem. The heat of the exhaust system or the
engine could cause them to ignite. Risk of
fire.
Cleaning engine compartment
Take special care when cleaning the engine
c
omp
ar
tment.
Anti-corrosion treatment
The engine compartment and the surface of
the power unit are given anti-corrosion treat-
ment at the factory.
Good corrosion protection is particularly im-
portant in winter when the vehicle is fre-
quently driven on salted roads. To prevent
the salt corroding the vehicle, the entire en-
gine compartment should be thoroughly
cleaned before and after winter.
»
193
Technical dataAdviceOperationEmergenciesSafety
Advice
Technical Services h
av
e the pr
oper products
for cleaning and preservation as well as the
necessary workshop equipment. For this rea-
son, we recommend having this work per-
formed by them.
The anti-corrosion protection is usually re-
moved if the engine compartment is cleaned
with grease removing solutions, or if you
have the engine cleaned. On commissioning
this work, ensure that all surfaces, seams,
joints and components in the engine com-
partment are given anti-corrosion treatment.
WARNING
●
When workin
g in the engine compartment,
always observe the safety warnings
››› page 198.
●
Before opening the bonnet, switch the en-
gine off, apply the handbrake firmly and al-
ways remove the key from the ignition.
●
Allow the engine to cool before you clean
the engine compartment.
●
Do not clean, for example, the vehicle un-
derbody, wheel arches or wheel trims without
protecting your hands and arms. You may cut
yourself on sharp-edged metal parts. Failure
to comply could result in injury.
●
Moisture, ice and salt on the brake system
may affect braking effectiveness. Risk of acci-
dent. Directly after washing, avoid sudden
and sharp braking.
●
Never touch the radiator fan. It is tempera-
ture-controlled and could start automatically,
even when the key is removed from the igni-
tion!
For the sake of the environment
Fuel, grease and oil deposits can be removed
when the en
gine is
washed. The polluted wa-
ter must be cleaned in an oil separator. For
this reason, engine washing should be car-
ried out only by a specialised workshop or a
petrol station.
Caring for the vehicle interior
C
l
e
aning plastic parts and the dash
panel
–
Use a clean, damp cloth to clean plastic
p
ar
ts
and the dash panel.
–
If this does not provide satisfactory results,
use a special solvent-free plastic cleaning
product.
WARNING
Never clean the dash panel and the airbag
module s
urface with cleaners containing sol-
vents. Solvents cause the surface to become
porous. If the airbag triggered, plastic parts
could become detached and cause injuries.
CAUTION
Cleaning products which contain solvents will
damag
e the material.
Cleaning wooden trim*
–
Clean the wooden trim with a water-mois-
tened cl
ean cloth.
–
If this does not provide satisfactory results,
use a gentle soap solution.
CAUTION
Cleaning products which contain solvents will
damag
e the material.
Cleaning upholstery and fabric trim
Cloth seat covers and fabric trim on the
door
s, he
a
dlining etc. can be cleaned with a
special interior cleaner or with dry foam and
a soft brush.
Cleaning the radio and climate con-
trols
To clean the radio and/or climate controls,
u
se a sof
t
damp cloth. For more resistant dirt,
a neutral soap solution may be used.
194
Care and maintenance
Cleaning leather*
Normal cleaning
–
Moisten a cotton or woollen cloth with wa-
ter and wipe o
ver the leather surfaces.
Cleaning stubborn stains
–
More stubborn dirt can be removed using a
mild soap solution (pure liquid soap; two
tablespoons diluted in one litre of water)
and a cloth.
–
Do not let the water soak through the leath-
er or soak int
o the seams.
–
Then wipe off with a soft, dry cloth.
Leather maintenance
–
The leather should be treated twice a year
with a special leather-care product, availa-
ble at Technical Services.
–
Apply these products very sparingly.
–
Then wipe off with a soft cloth.
SEAT does everything possible to preserve
the genuine qualities of this natural product.
Due to the natural properties of the specially
selected hides employed, the finished leath-
er has a certain sensitivity to grease and dirt,
etc. so a degree of care is required in every-
day use and when looking after the leather.
Dust and grit in the pores and seams can
scratch and damage the surface. If the vehi-
cle is under solar radiation for long periods,
the leather should be protected to prevent it
from fading. However, slight colour variations
in high-quality natural leather are normal.
CAUTION
●
Do not use so
lvents, wax polish, shoe
cream, spot removers or similar products on
leather.
●
To avoid damage, stubborn stains should
be removed by a specialised workshop.
Seat belt cleaning
A dirty belt may not work properly. Check all
se
at
belts
regularly and keep them clean.
Seat belts cleaning
–
Pull the dirty seat belt right out and unroll
it.
–
Clean dirty seat belts with a gentle soap
solution.
–
Allow it to dry.
–
Do not roll the seat belt up until it is dry.
If large stains form on the belts, the automat-
ic belt retractor will not work correctly.
WARNING
●
Do not use c
hemical cleaning agents on the
seat belts, as this can impair the strength of
the webbing. Ensure that seat belts do not
come into contact with corrosive fluids.
●
Check the condition of the seat belts at reg-
ular intervals. If you notice that the belt web-
bing, fittings, retractor mechanism or buckle
of any of the belts is damaged, the belt must
be replaced by a specialised workshop.
●
Do not attempt to repair a damaged seat
belt yourself. The seat belts must not be re-
moved or modified in any way.
CAUTION
After cleaning, allow seat belts to dry com-
plet
ely before rolling them up. Otherwise, the
belt retractors could become damaged.
195
Technical dataAdviceOperationEmergenciesSafety
Advice
Checking and refilling levels
R
ef
uel
ling
Refuelling
Read the additional information carefully
›››
page 41
If the automatic filler nozzle is operated cor-
rectly, it will switch itself off as soon as the
tank is “full”. Never attempt to fill beyond
this point, as this will fill the expansion
chamber. Fuel may leak out if ambient condi-
tions are warm.
The correct fuel grade for your vehicle is giv-
en on a sticker on the inside of the fuel tank
flap.
WARNING
●
Fuel i
s highly flammable and can cause se-
rious burns and other injuries.
–
Never smoke or come into contact with
sparks when filling the fuel tank of the
vehicle or a spare fuel canister with fuel.
This is an explosion hazard.
–
Follow legal requirements for the use of
spare fuel canisters.
–
For safety reasons we do not recommend
carrying a spare fuel canister in the vehi-
cle. The canister could be damaged in an
accident and leak.
●
If, in ex
ceptional circumstances, you have
to carry a spare fuel canister, please observe
the following:
–
Never fill the spare fuel canister inside
the vehicle or on it. An electrostatic
charge could build up during filling, caus-
ing the fuel fumes to ignite. This could
cause an explosion. Always place the
canister on the ground to fill it.
–
Insert the fuel nozzle into the mouth of
the canister as far as possible.
–
If the spare fuel canister is made of met-
al, the filling nozzle must be in contact
with the canister during filling. This
helps prevent an electrostatic charge
building up.
–
Never spill fuel in the vehicle or in the
luggage compartment. Fuel vapours are
explosive. Danger of death.
CAUTION
●
Fuel s
pills should be removed from the
paintwork immediately.
●
Never run the tank completely dry. Irregular
fuel supply can cause misfiring. As a result,
unburnt fuel could enter the catalytic convert-
er and cause damage.
●
When filling the fuel tank after having run it
completely dry on a vehicle with a diesel en-
gine the ignition must be switched on for at
least 30 seconds before starting the engine.
Subsequently, when you start the engine it
may take longer than normal to start firing
(up to one minute). This is due to the fact that
the fuel sy
stem has to purge itself of air be-
fore starting.
For the sake of the environment
Do not try to put in more fuel after the auto-
m
atic fi
ller nozzle has switched off, this may
cause the fuel to overflow if it becomes warm.
Fuel
T
y
pe
s of petrol
The correct grade of petrol is listed inside the
f
uel
t
ank flap.
The vehicle is equipped with a catalytic con-
verter and must only be run on unleaded pet-
rol. The petrol must comply with European
Standard EN 228 or German standard DIN
51626-1 and must be unleaded. You can re-
fuel with a maximum ethanol proportion of
10 % (E10). The types of petrol are differenti-
ated by their octane rating (RON).
The following titles appear on the corre-
sponding adhesive on the fuel tank flap:
196
Checking and refilling levels
Super unleaded 95 octane or normal 91 oc-
t
ane u
n
leaded petrol
We recommend you use super 95 octane pet-
rol. If this is not available: normal 91 octane
petrol, with a slight decrease in power.
Super unleaded petrol with a minimum of 95
octanes
You should use super petrol with a minimum
of 95 octanes.
If super is not available, in an emergency you
may refuel with normal 91 octane petrol. In
this case only use moderate engine speeds
and a light throttle. Refuel with super as soon
as possible.
Super unleaded 98 octane or super 95 oc-
tane unleaded petrol
We recommend you use super plus 98 octane
petrol. If this is not available: super 95 oc-
tane petrol, with a slight decrease in power.
If super is not available, in an emergency you
may refuel with normal 91 octane petrol. In
this case only use moderate engine speeds
and a light throttle. Refuel with super as soon
as possible.
Petrol additives
The quality of the fuel influences the behav-
iour, power and service life of the engine.
This is why the petrol you use should carry
suitable additives already included by the
petrol industry, free of metals. These addi-
tives will help to prevent corrosion, keep the
fuel system clean and prevent deposits from
building up in the engine.
If good-quality petrol with metal-free addi-
tives is not available or engine problems
arise, the necessary additives must be added
when refuelling ›››
.
Not
al
l
petrol additives have been shown to
be effective. The use of unsuitable petrol ad-
ditives may cause significant damage to the
engine and the catalytic converter. Metal ad-
ditives should never be used. Metal additives
may also be contained in petrol additives for
improving anti-detonation ratings or octane
ratings ›››
.
S
EA
T r
ecommends “genuine Volkswagen
Group Fuel Additives for petrol engines”.
These additives can be bought at SEAT deal-
ers, where information on how to use them
can also be obtained.
CAUTION
●
Do not ref
uel if the filler indicates that the
fuel contains metal. LRP (lead replacement
petrol) fuels contain high concentrations of
metal additives. Using them may damage the
engine!
●
Never refuel with fuels containing a large
proportion of ethanol (for example, E50, E85).
This could damage the fuel system.
●
Just
filling one full tank of leaded fuel or
fuel containing other metal additives would
seriously impair the efficiency of the catalytic
converter.
●
Only use fuel additives that have been ap-
proved by SEAT. Octane boosting or anti-
knock additives may contain metal additives
that could seriously damage the engine or
the catalytic converter. These additives must
not be used.
●
High engine speed and full throttle can
damage the engine when using petrol with an
octane rating lower than the correct grade for
the engine.
Note
●
You ma
y use petrol with a high octane num-
ber than the one recommended for your en-
gine.
●
In those countries where unleaded petrol is
not available, you may refuel with a fuel with
a low lead content.
Diesel fuel
Please note the information on the inside of
the f
uel
t
ank flap.
We recommend the use of diesel fuel which
complies to European standard EN 590. If
diesel fuel which meets European standard
EN 590 is not available, the Cetane number
(CZ) must, at minimum, be 51. If the engine
»
197
Technical dataAdviceOperationEmergenciesSafety
Advice
is equipped with a particulate filter, the sul-
phur c
ont
ent
of the fuel must be below 50
parts per million.
Winter-grade diesel
Summer fuel becomes thicker in winter and it
is more difficult to start the engine. For this
reason, petrol stations in some countries al-
so offer winter diesel with improved fluidity
when cold (winter-grade diesel).
Water in the fuel filter
1)
If your vehicle has a diesel engine and is
equipped with a fuel filter with a water sepa-
rator, the instrument panel may display the
following warning:
Water in the
fuel filter. If this is the case, take the
vehicle to a specialised workshop so that
they can drain the fuel filter.
CAUTION
●
The vehic
le is not designed for the use of
FAME fuel (biodiesel). The fuel system would
be damaged if you used biodiesel.
●
Do not mix fuel additives, the so-called
“thinners”, petrol or similar additives with
diesel fuel.
●
If poor-quality diesel fuel is used, it may be
necessary to drain the fuel filter more fre-
quently than is specified in the Maintenance
Programme. We recommend having this done
by a s
pecialised workshop. If water is allowed
to collect in the filter, this can cause engine
performance problems.
Working in the engine compart-
ment
safety
notes for work in the engine
compartment
Read the additional information carefully
›
›
›
page 10
Before starting any work on the engine or in
the engine compartment:
1. Switch off the engine and remove the key
from the ignition.
2. Apply the handbrake.
3. Move the gear lever to neutral or the selec-
tor lever to position P.
4. Wait for the engine to cool down.
5. Keep children away from the vehicle.
6. Raise the bonnet ››› page 199.
You should not do any work in the engine
compartment unless you know exactly how to
carry out the jobs and have the correct tools!
Have the work carried out by a specialised
workshop if you are uncertain.
All service fluids and consumables, e.g. cool-
ant, engine oil, spark plugs and batteries,
are under constant development. SEAT pro-
vides a constant flow of information to Tech-
nical Services concerning modifications. For
this reason, we recommend you have service
fluids and consumables replaced by a Techni-
cal Service. Please observe the relevant in-
structions ››› page 187. The engine compart-
ment of the vehicle is a hazardous area ›››
.
WARNING
All work on the engine or in the engine com-
partment, e.
g. checking and refilling fluids,
involves the danger of injury and burns, acci-
dents and even fire.
●
Never open the bonnet if you see steam,
smoke or coolant escaping from the engine
compartment. Otherwise, there is a risk of
sustaining burns. Wait until no more steam or
coolant is emitted, then allow the engine to
cool before carefully opening the bonnet.
●
Switch off the engine and remove the key
from the ignition.
●
Apply the handbrake and move the gear
lever to neutral or selector lever to position P.
●
Keep children away from the vehicle.
1)
Valid for the market: Algeria.
198
Checking and refilling levels
●
Never touc
h hot engine parts. There is a
risk of burns.
●
Never spill liquids on a hot engine or on a
hot exhaust gas system. This is a fire hazard.
●
Avoid causing short-circuits in the electri-
cal system, particularly at the points where
the jump leads are attached ›››
page 52.
The battery could explode.
●
Never touch the radiator fan. It is tempera-
ture controlled and could start automatically,
even when the engine has been switched off
and the key removed from the ignition!
●
Never cover the engine with additional in-
sulating materials such as a blanket. Risk of
fire!
●
Do not unscrew the cap on the coolant ex-
pansion tank when the engine is hot. If the
coolant is hot, the cooling system will be
pressurised!
●
Protect face, hands and arms by covering
the cap with a large, thick cloth to protect
against escaping coolant and steam.
●
Always make sure you have not left any ob-
jects, such as cleaning cloths or tools, in the
engine compartment.
●
If you have to work underneath the vehicle,
you must use suitable stands additionally to
support the vehicle, there is a risk of acci-
dent!. A hydraulic jack is insufficient for se-
curing the vehicle and there is a risk of injury.
●
If any work has to be performed when the
engine is started or with the engine running,
there is an additional, potentially fatal, safety
risk from the rotating parts, such as the drive
belts, alternator, radiator fan, etc., and from
the high-vo
ltage ignition system. You should
also observe the following:
–
Never touch the electrical wiring of the
ignition system.
–
Ensure that jewellery, loose clothing and
long hair do not get trapped in rotating
engine parts. Danger of death. Before
starting any work remove jewellery, tie
back and cover hair, and wear tight-fit-
ting clothes.
–
Never accelerate with a gear engaged
without taking the necessary precau-
tions. The vehicle could move, even if the
handbrake is applied. Danger of death.
●
If work has to be carried out on the fuel
system or on electrical components, you
must observe the following safety notes in
addition to the above warnings:
–
Always disconnect the battery from the
on-board network. The vehicle must be
unlocked when this is done, otherwise
the alarm will be triggered.
–
Do not smoke.
–
Never work near naked flames.
–
Always have a fire extinguisher on hand.
WARNING
If the bonnet is not correctly closed, it could
sudden
ly open while driving leaving the driv-
er without visibility. This could result in a se-
rious accident.
●
After c
losing the bonnet, always check that
it is properly secured by the locking mecha-
nism in the lock carrier piece. The bonnet
must be flush with the surrounding body pan-
els.
●
While driving, if you notice that the bonnet
is not correctly closed then stop immediately
and close it correctly.
●
Only open and close the bonnet when there
is nobody within its range.
CAUTION
When topping up service fluids, make sure
not
to mi
stake them. Using the wrong fluids
could cause serious malfunctions and engine
damage!
For the sake of the environment
Service fluids leaks are harmful to the envi-
ronment. F
or this reason you should make
regular checks on the ground underneath
your vehicle. If you find spots of oil or other
fluids, have your vehicle inspected in a speci-
alised workshop.
Opening the bonnet
Read the additional information carefully
›
›
›
page 10
The bonnet is released from inside the vehi-
cle.
»
199
Technical dataAdviceOperationEmergenciesSafety
Advice
Before opening the bonnet ensure that the
w
ind
s
creen wipers are in rest position.
WARNING
Hot coolant can scald!
●
Never open the bonnet if you see steam,
smoke or coo
lant escaping from the engine
compartment.
●
Wait until no more steam, smoke or coolant
is emitted from the bonnet, then carefully
open the bonnet.
●
When working in the engine compartment,
always observe the safety warnings
››› page 198.
Closing the bonnet
–
Slightly lift the bonnet.
–
Release the bonnet stay and replace it in its
s
up
por
t.
–
At a height of approximately 30 cm let it fall
so it locks.
If the bonnet does not close, do not press
downwards. Open it again and let it fall as
mentioned above.
WARNING
If the bonnet is not closed properly, it could
open while
you are driving and completely
obscure your view of the road. Risk of acci-
dent.
●
Aft
er closing the bonnet, always check that
it is properly secured. The bonnet must be
flush with the surrounding body panels.
●
If you notice that the bonnet latch is not se-
cured when the vehicle is moving, stop the
vehicle immediately and close the bonnet
properly. Risk of accident.
200
Checking and refilling levels
Checking levels
Fig. 173 Diagram for the location of the various elements.
Fig. 174 For vehicles with the battery in the
luggag
e compartment.
From time to time, the levels of the different
fluid
s
in the
vehicle must be checked. Never
fill with incorrect fluids, otherwise serious
damage to the engine may be caused.
Coolant expansion tank
Engine oil level dipstick
Engine oil filler cap
Brake fluid reservoir
Vehicle battery
Windscreen washer reservoir
The checking and refilling of service fluids
are carried out on the components men-
tioned above. These operations are descri-
bed in ››› page 198.
Overview
You will find further explanations, instruc-
tions and restrictions on the technical speci-
fications as of ››› page 216.
1
2
3
4
5
6
Note
The layout of parts may vary depending on
the engine.
Engine oil
General
notes
The engine comes with a special, multi-grade
oil th
at can be used all year round.
Because the use of high-quality oil is essen-
tial for the correct operation of the engine
and its long useful life, when topping up or
changing oil, use only those oils that comply
with VW standards.
»
201
Technical dataAdviceOperationEmergenciesSafety
Advice
The specifications (VW standards) set out in
the f
o
l
lowing page should appear on the con-
tainer of the service oil; when the container
displays the specific standards for petrol and
diesel engines together, it means that the oil
can be used for both types of engines.
We recommend that the oil change indicated
in the Maintenance Programme, be per-
formed by a technical service or specialised
workshop.
The correct oil specifications for your engine
are listed in the ›››
page 42.
Service intervals
Service intervals can be flexible (LongLife
service) or fixed (dependent on time/dis-
tance travelled).
If the PR code that appears on the back of the
Maintenance Programme booklet is PR QI6,
this means that your vehicle has the LongLife
service program. If it lists the codes QI1, QI2,
QI3, QI4 or QI7, the interval service is de-
pendent on the time/distance travelled.
Flexible service intervals (LongLife service
intervals*)
Special oils and processes have been devel-
oped which, depending on the characteris-
tics and individual driving profiles, enable
the extension of the oil change service (Long-
Life service intervals).
Because this oil is essential for extending the
service intervals, it must only be used ob-
serving the following indications:
●
Avoid mixing it with oil for fixed service in-
tervals.
●
Only in exceptional circumstances, if the
engine oil level is too low ››› page 203 and
LongLife oil is not available, it is permitted to
top up (once) with oil for fixed service inter-
vals ›››
page 42 (up to a maximum of 0.5
litres).
Fixed service intervals*
If your vehicle does not have the “LongLife
service interval” or it has been disabled (by
request), you may use oils for fixed service
intervals, which also appear in
›››
page 42. In this case, your vehicle
must be serviced after a fixed interval of 1
year/15,000 km (10,000 miles)(whatever
comes first) ››› Booklet Maintenance Pro-
gramme.
●
In exceptional circumstances, if the engine
oil level is too low ››› page 203 and you can-
not obtain the oil specified for your vehicle,
you can add a small quantity of oil conform-
ing to the specification ACEA A2 or ACEA A3
(petrol engines) or ACEA B3 or ACEA B4 (die-
sel engines) (up to 0.5 l).
Vehicles with diesel particulate filter*
The Maintenance Programme states whether
your vehicle is fitted with a diesel particulate
filter.
Only VW 507 00 engine oil, with reduced ash
formation, may be used in diesel engines
equipped with particulate filter. Using other
types of oil will cause a higher soot concen-
tration and reduce the life of the DPF. There-
fore:
●
Avoid mixing this oil with other engine oils.
●
Only in exceptional circumstances, if the
engine oil level is too low ››› page 203 and
you cannot obtain the oil specified for your
vehicle, you can use a small quantity of oil
(once) conforming to the VW 506 00,
VW 506 01, VW 505 00, VW 505 01 or
ACEA B3/ACEA B4 specification. (up to 0.5 l).
Note
Before a long trip, we recommend finding an
engine oil
that conforms to the correspond-
ing VW specifications and recommend keep-
ing it in the vehicle. This way, the correct en-
gine oil will always be available for a top-up if
needed.
Warning lamp
If this warning lamp i
s
r
ed it indicates
that the engine oil pressure is too low.
202
Checking and refilling levels
If this warning symbol starts to flash, and is
ac
c
omp
anied by three audible warnings,
switch off the engine and check the oil level.
If necessary, add more oil ››› page 203.
If the warning lamp flashes although the oil
level is correct, stop driving. Do not even run
the engine at idle speed! Obtain technical as-
sistance.
Checking oil level
If the warning lamp is yellow the engine
oil level should be checked as soon as possi-
ble. Top up the oil at the next opportunity
››› page 203.
Oil level sensor faulty*
If the yellow warning lamp flashes, take
the vehicle to a specialised workshop to have
the oil level sensor checked. Until then it is
advisable to check the oil level every time
you refuel.
Check engine oil level
Fig. 175 Engine oil dipstick.
Read the additional information carefully
›
›
›
page 41
Checking oil level
–
Park the vehicle in a horizontal position.
–
Briefly run the engine at idle speed until
the operating temperature is reached and
then stop.
–
Wait for about two minutes.
–
Pull out the dipstick. Wipe the dipstick with
a clean cloth and insert it again, pushing it
in as far as it will go.
–
Then pull it out again and check the oil lev-
el. Top up with engine oil if necessary.
Depending on how you drive and the condi-
tions in which the vehicle is used, oil con-
sumption can be up to 0.5 l/1000 km. Oil
consumption is likely to be higher for the first
5,000 km. For this reason the engine oil level
must be checked at regular intervals, prefera-
bly when filling the tank and before a jour-
ney.
WARNING
Any work carried out in the engine compart-
ment or on the engine mu
st be carried out
cautiously.
●
When working in the engine compartment,
always observe the safety warnings
››› page 198.
CAUTION
If the oil level is above the area
A
do not
star
t the engine. This could result in damage
to the engine and catalytic converter. Contact
a Technical Service.
Topping up engine oil
Read the additional information carefully
›
›
›
page 41
Before opening the bonnet, read and observe
the warnings
›››
in safety notes for work in
the en
gine c
omp
artment on page 198.
The position of the oil filler opening is shown
in the corresponding engine compartment il-
lustration
›››
page 201.
Engine oil specification
›››
page 42.
»
203
Technical dataAdviceOperationEmergenciesSafety
Advice
WARNING
Oil is highly inflammable! Ensure that no oil
comes
into contact with hot engine compo-
nents when topping up.
CAUTION
If the oil level is above the area
A
do not
star
t the engine. This could result in damage
to the engine and catalytic converter. Contact
a specialised workshop.
For the sake of the environment
The oil level must never be above area
A
.
Otherwi
se oil can be drawn in through the
crankcase breather and escape into the at-
mosphere via the exhaust system.
Changing engine oil
Read the additional information carefully
›
›
›
page 41
The engine oil must be changed at the inter-
vals given in the service schedule.
We recommend that you have the engine oil
changed by a Technical Service.
The oil change intervals are shown in the
Maintenance Programme.
WARNING
Only change the engine oil yourself if you
have the s
pecialist knowledge required!
●
Before opening the bonnet, read and ob-
serve the warnings ››› page 198, safety notes
for work in the engine compartment.
●
Wait for the engine to cool down. Hot oil
may cause burn injuries.
●
Wear eye protection to avoid injuries, such
as acid burns, caused by splashes of oil.
●
When removing the oil drain plug with your
fingers, keep your arm horizontal to help pre-
vent oil from running down your arm.
●
Wash your skin thoroughly if it comes into
contact with engine oil.
●
Engine oil is poisonous! Used oil must be
stored in a safe place out of the reach of chil-
dren.
CAUTION
No additives should be used with engine oil.
This c
ould result in engine damage. Any dam-
age caused by the use of such additives
would not be covered by the factory warranty.
For the sake of the environment
●
Becau
se of disposal problems and the spe-
cial tools and specialist knowledge required,
we recommend that you have the engine oil
and filter changed by a Technical Service.
●
Never pour oil
down drains or into the
ground.
●
Use a suitable container when draining the
used oil. It must be large enough to hold all
the engine oil.
Cooling system
Contro
l lamp
There is a fault if:
●
The l
amp does not go out again after a
f
ew sec
onds.
●
The lamp lights up or flashes while the
vehicle is running, and three acoustic warn-
ing signals are emitted ›››
.
Thi
s
me
ans that either the coolant level is too
low or the coolant temperature is too high.
Coolant temperature too high
If the lamp lights up, stop the vehicle,
turn off the engine and wait for it to cool
down. Check the coolant level.
If the coolant level is correct, the overheating
may be caused by a malfunction of the radia-
tor fan. Check the radiator fan fuse and have
it replaced if necessary ››› page 80.
If the control lamp lights up again after driv-
ing on for a short distance, stop the vehicle
204
Checking and refilling levels
and switch the engine off. C
ont
act
a Techni-
cal Service or a specialised workshop.
Coolant level too low
If the lamp lights up, stop the vehicle,
turn off the engine and wait for it to cool
down. First check the coolant level. If the lev-
el of the coolant is below the “MIN” mark,
top up with coolant liquid ›››
.
WARNING
●
If y
our vehicle is immobilised for technical
reasons, move it to a safe distance from traf-
fic. Turn the engine off, turn the hazard lights
on and place the warning triangle.
●
Never open the bonnet if you can see or
hear steam or coolant escaping from the en-
gine compartment. Risk of scalding. Wait un-
til you can no longer see or hear escaping
steam or coolant.
●
The engine compartment is a dangerous
area. Before carrying out any work in the en-
gine compartment, switch off the engine and
allow it to cool down. Always note the corre-
sponding warnings ››› page 198.
Topping up coolant
Read the additional information carefully
›
›
›
page 42
Top up coolant when the level is below the
MIN (minimum) mark.
Checking coolant level
–
Park the vehicle in a horizontal position.
–
Switch the ignition off.
–
Read off the coolant level on coolant ex-
pansion tank. When the engine is cold, the
coolant level should be between the marks.
When the engine is hot, it may be slightly
above the upper mark.
Topping up coolant
–
Wait for the engine to cool down.
–
Cover the coolant expansion tank cap with
a cloth and carefully unscrew it to the left
›››
.
–
Top up the coolant only if there is still cool-
ant
in the e
xp
ansion tank, otherwise you
could damage the engine. If there is no
coolant in the expansion tank, do not con-
tinue driving. You should obtain professio-
nal assistance ›››
.
–
If there is still some coolant in the expan-
s
ion t
ank, t
op up to the upper mark.
–
Top up with coolant until the level becomes
stable.
–
Screw the cap back on correctly.
Any loss of coolant fluid normally indicates a
leak in the cooling system. Take the vehicle
straight to a specialised workshop to have
the cooling system examined. If there are no
leaks in the engine cooling system, a loss of
coolant can only occur if the coolant boils
and is forced out of the system as a result of
overheating.
WARNING
●
The coolin
g system is under pressure. Do
not unscrew the cap on the coolant expan-
sion tank when the engine is hot: risk of
burns!
●
The antifreeze and coolant fluid can be a
health hazard. Therefore, the antifreeze
should be stored in the original container in a
safe place out of reach of children. Failure to
comply could result in poisoning.
●
If working inside the engine compartment,
remember that, even when the ignition is
switched off, the radiator fan may start up au-
tomatically, and therefore there is a risk of in-
jury.
WARNING
If there is not enough anti-freeze in the cool-
ant sys
tem, the engine may fail leading to se-
rious damage.
●
Please make sure that the percentage of
additive is correct with respect to the lowest
expected ambient temperature in the zone in
which the vehicle is to be used.
●
When the outside temperature is very low,
the coolant could freeze and the vehicle
would be immobilised. In this case, the heat-
ing would not work either and inadequately
dressed passengers could die of cold.
»
205
Technical dataAdviceOperationEmergenciesSafety
Advice
CAUTION
Do not top up the expansion tank with cool-
ant fluid if it
is empty! Air could enter the
cooling system. In this case, stop driving.
Seek specialist assistance. Otherwise, there
is a risk of engine damage.
CAUTION
The original additives should never be mixed
with coo
lants which are not approved by
SEAT. Otherwise, you run the risk of causing
severe damage to the engine and the engine
cooling system.
●
If the fluid in the expansion tank is not pur-
ple but is, for example, brown, this indicates
that the G13 additive has been mixed with an
inadequate coolant. The coolant must be
changed as soon as possible if this is the
case! This could result in serious faults and
engine damage.
For the sake of the environment
Coolants and additives can contaminate the
envir
onment. If any fluids are spilled, they
should be collected and correctly disposed
of, with respect to the environment.
Brake fluid
Chec
k
in
g the brake fluid level
Read the additional information carefully
›››
page 43
The position of the brake fluid reservoir is
shown in the corresponding engine compart-
ment illustration ››› page 201. The brake fluid
reservoir has a black and yellow cap.
The brake fluid level drops slightly when the
vehicle is being used as the brake pads are
automatically adjusted as they wear.
However, if the level goes down noticeably in
a short time, or drops below the “MIN” mark,
there may be a leak in the brake system. A
display on the instrument panel will warn you
if the brake fluid level is too low
›››
page 98.
WARNING
Before opening the bonnet to check the brake
fluid level, r
ead and observe the warnings
››› page 198.
Changing the brake fluid
The Maintenance Programme indicates brake
fluid c
h
an
ge intervals.
We recommend that you have the brake fluid
changed by a Technical Service.
Before opening the bonnet, please read and
follow the warnings ›››
in safety notes for
w
ork
in the en
gine compartment on
page 198 in section “Safety notes for work-
ing in the engine compartment”.
In the course of time, brake fluid becomes
hygroscopic and absorbs water from the am-
bient air. If the water content in the brake flu-
id is too high, the brake system could cor-
rode. This also considerably reduces the boil-
ing point of the brake fluid. Heavy use of the
brakes may then cause a vapour lock which
could impair the braking effect.
Be sure to always use the correct brake fluid.
Only use brake fluid that expressly meets the
VW 501 14 standard.
You can buy VW 501 14 standard brake fluid
in a SEAT dealership or a SEAT Official Serv-
ice. If none is available, use only high-quality
brake fluid that meets DIN ISO 4925 CLASS 4
standards, or USA Standards FMVSS 116 DOT
4.
Using any other kind of brake fluid or one
that is not of a high quality may affect opera-
tion of the brake system and reduce its effec-
tiveness. Never use a brake fluid if the con-
tainer does not state that it complies with VW
501 14, DIN ISO 4925 CLASS 4 standards, or
USA standards FMVSS 116 DOT 4.
206
Checking and refilling levels
WARNING
Brake fluid is poisonous. Old brake fluid im-
pairs
the braking effect.
●
Before opening the bonnet to check the
brake fluid level, read and observe the warn-
ings ››› page 198.
●
Brake fluid should be stored in the closed
original container in a safe place out of reach
of children. There is a toxic risk.
●
Perform the brake fluid change according to
the Maintenance Programme. Heavy use of
the brakes may cause a vapour lock if the
brake fluid is left in the brake system for too
long. This would seriously affect the effec-
tiveness of the brakes and the safety of the
vehicle. This may cause an accident.
CAUTION
Brake fluid damages the vehicle paintwork.
Wipe off an
y brake fluid from the paintwork
immediately.
For the sake of the environment
The brake pads and brake fluid must be col-
lected and di
sposed of according the applica-
ble regulations. The SEAT Technical Service
network has the necessary equipment and
qualified personnel for collecting and dispos-
ing of this waste material.
Windscreen washer reservoir
T
op
pin
g up the windscreen washer
reservoir water
Read the additional information carefully
›››
page 43
The windscreen washer and the headlight
washers are supplied with fluid from the
windscreen washer fluid container in the en-
gine compartment. The container holds ap-
prox. 3 litres; in vehicles with headlight
washers* it holds approx. 4.5 litres.
The tank is in the engine compartment.
Plain water is not enough to clean the wind-
screen and headlights. We recommend that
you always add a product to the windscreen
washer fluid. Approved windscreen cleaning
products exist on the market with high deter-
gent and anti-freeze properties, these may be
added all-year-round. Please follow the dilu-
tion instructions on the packaging.
WARNING
Any work carried out in the engine compart-
ment or on the engine mu
st be carried out
cautiously.
●
When working in the engine compartment,
always observe the safety warnings
››› page 198.
CAUTION
●
Never put
radiator anti-freeze or other addi-
tives into the windscreen washer fluid.
●
Always use approved windscreen cleansing
products diluted as per instructions. If you
use other washer fluids or soap solutions,
the tiny holes in the fan-shaped nozzles
could become blocked.
Vehicle battery
Symbol
s and warnings on handling
the battery
Read the additional information carefully
›
›
›
page 43
Wear eye protection
Battery acid is extremely corrosive. Wear protec-
tive gloves and eye protection!
Fires, sparks, open flames and smoking are pro-
hibited!
A highly explosive mixture of gases is released
when the battery is under charge.
Keep children away from acid and batteries!
»
207
Technical dataAdviceOperationEmergenciesSafety
Advice
WARNING
Always be aware of the danger of injury and
chemica
l burns as well as the risk of accident
or fire when working on the battery and the
electrical system:
●
Wear eye protection. Protect your eyes,
skin and clothing from acid and particles con-
taining lead.
●
Battery acid is extremely corrosive. Wear
protective gloves and eye protection. Do not
tilt the batteries. This could spill acid through
the vents.
●
Rinse battery acid from eyes immediately
for several minutes with clear water. Then
seek medical care immediately. Neutralise
any acid splashes on the skin or clothing
with a soapy solution, and rinse off with plen-
ty of water. If acid is swallowed by mistake,
consult a doctor immediately.
●
Fires, sparks, open flames and smoking are
prohibited. When handling cables and electri-
cal equipment, avoid causing sparks and
electrostatic charge. Never short the battery
terminals. High-energy sparks can cause in-
jury.
●
A highly explosive mixture of gases is re-
leased when the battery is under charge. The
batteries should be charged in a well-ventila-
ted room only.
●
Keep children away from acid and batteries.
●
Before working on the electrical system,
you must switch off the engine, the ignition
and all electrical devices. The negative cable
on the battery must be disconnected. When a
light bu
lb is changed, you need only switch
off the light.
●
Deactivate the anti-theft alarm by unlock-
ing the vehicle before you disconnect the bat-
tery! The alarm will otherwise be triggered.
●
When disconnecting the battery from the
vehicle on-board network, disconnect first
the negative cable and then the positive ca-
ble.
●
Switch off all electrical devices before re-
connecting the battery. Reconnect first the
positive cable and then the negative cable.
Never reverse the polarity of the connections.
This could cause an electrical fire.
●
Never charge a frozen battery, or one which
has thawed. This could result in explosions
and chemical burns. Always replace a battery
which has frozen. A flat battery can also
freeze at temperatures close to 0°C (+32°F).
●
Ensure that the vent hose is always connec-
ted to the battery.
●
Never use a defective battery. This could
cause an explosion. Replace a damaged bat-
tery immediately.
●
For vehicles with the battery in the luggage
compartment: Check that the battery gas
ventilation hose is securely attached.
CAUTION
●
Never dis
connect the battery if the ignition
is switched on or if the engine is running.
This could damage the electrical system or
electronic
components.
●
Do not expose the battery to direct sunlight
over a long period of time, as the intense ul-
traviolet radiation can damage the battery
housing.
●
If the vehicle is left standing in cold condi-
tions for a long period, protect the battery
from “freezing”. If it freezes it will be dam-
aged.
Warning lamp
It lights up
Alternator fault.
The control lamp lights
up when the igni-
tion i
s
switched on. It should go out when the
engine has started running.
If the control lamp lights up while driving,
the alternator is no longer charging the bat-
tery. You should immediately drive to the
nearest specialised workshop.
You should avoid using electrical equipment
that is not absolutely necessary because this
will drain the battery.
208
Checking and refilling levels
Checking the battery electrolyte level
The electrolyte level should be checked regu-
larly in high-mi
leage vehicles, in hot coun-
tries and in older batteries.
–
Open the bonnet and open the battery cov-
er at the front ›››
in safety notes for work
in the engine comp
artment on page 198
›››
in Symbols and warnings on handling
the batter
y on page 208. For vehicles with
the battery under the spare wheel, open
the rear lid and lift the floor covering. The
battery is located next to the spare wheel.
–
Check the colour display in the "magic eye"
on the top of the b
attery.
–
If there are air bubbles in the window, tap
the window gently until they disperse.
The position of the battery is shown in the
corresponding engine compartment diagram
›››
page 201. The location of the battery in
the luggage compartment can be seen in
›››
Fig. 174.
The “magic eye” indicator, located on the top
of the battery changes colour, depending on
the charge state and electrolyte level of the
battery.
There are two different colours:
●
Black: correct charge status.
●
Transparent/clear yellow: the battery must
be replaced. Contact a specialised workshop.
Charging or changing the battery
The battery is maintenance-free and is
check
ed during the inspection service. All
work on the vehicle battery requires special-
ist knowledge.
If you often drive short distances or if the ve-
hicle is not driven for long periods, the bat-
tery should be checked by a specialised
workshop between the scheduled services.
If the battery has discharged and you have
problems starting the vehicle, the battery
might be damaged. If this happens, we rec-
ommend you have the vehicle battery
checked by a Technical Service where it will
be re-charged or replaced.
Charging the battery
The vehicle battery should be charged by a
specialised workshop only, as batteries us-
ing special technology have been installed
and they must be charged in a controlled en-
vironment.
Replacing a vehicle battery
The battery has been developed to suit the
conditions of its location and has special
safety features.
Genuine SEAT batteries meet the mainte-
nance, performance and safety specifications
of your vehicle.
WARNING
●
We rec
ommend you use only maintenance-
free or cycle free leak-proof batteries which
comply with standards T 825 06 and
VW 7 50 73. This standard applies as of
2001.
●
Before starting any work on the batteries,
you must read and observe the warnings
›››
in Symbols and warnings on handling
the batter
y on page 208.
For the sake of the environment
Batteries contain toxic substances such as
sulphuric
acid and lead. They must be dis-
posed of appropriately and must not be dis-
posed of with ordinary household waste.
209
Technical dataAdviceOperationEmergenciesSafety
Advice
Wheels
Wheel
s
and ty
res
General notes
Avoiding damage
–
If you have to drive over a kerb or similar
obs
tacle, drive very slowly and at a right
angle.
–
Keep grease, oil and fuel off the tyres.
–
Inspect the tyres regularly for damage
(cuts, cr
acks or blisters, etc.). Remove any
foreign objects embedded in the treads.
Storing tyres
–
When you remove the tyres, mark them in
order to maintain the same direction of ro-
tation when they are installed again.
–
When removed, the wheels and/or tyres
should be stored in a cool, dry and prefera-
bly dark location.
–
Store tyres in a vertical position, if they are
not fitted on wheel rims.
New tyres
New tyres must be run in
›››
page 164.
The tread depth of new tyres may vary, ac-
cording to the type and make of tyre and the
tread pattern.
Concealed damage
Damage to tyres and rims is often not readily
visible. If you notice unusual vibrations or the
vehicle pulling to one side, this may indicate
that one of the tyres is damaged. They
should be checked immediately by a Techni-
cal Service.
Tyres with directional tread pattern
An arrow on the tyre sidewall indicates the di-
rection of rotation on tyres with directional
tread. Always observe the direction of rota-
tion indicated when fitting the wheel. This
guarantees optimum grip and helps to avoid
aquaplaning, excessive noise and wear.
WARNING
●
New tyre
s do not have maximum grip dur-
ing the first 500 km. Drive particularly care-
fully to avoid possible accidents.
●
Never drive with damaged tyres. This may
cause an accident.
●
If you notice unusual vibrations or if the ve-
hicle pulls to one side when driving, stop the
vehicle immediately and check the tyres for
damage.
Tyre pressure monitoring system
Fig. 176 Location of the tyre pressure sticker.
The correct tyre pressure can be seen on the
s
tic
k
er on the inside of the fuel tank flap
›››
Fig. 176.
1. Read the required tyre inflation pressure
from the sticker. The values refer to Sum-
mer tyres.
2. The tyre pressures should only be checked
when the tyres are cold. The slightly raised
pressures of warm tyres must not be re-
duced.
3. Adjust the tyre pressure to the load you
are carrying.
210
Wheels
Tyre pressure
The c
orr
ect
tyre pressure is especially impor-
tant at high speeds. The pressure should
therefore be checked at least once a month
and before starting a journey.
Depending on the vehicle, tyre pressure can
be adjusted to medium load to improve driv-
ing comfort (“comfort” tyre pressure). When
driving with comfort tyre pressure fuel con-
sumption may increase slightly.
WARNING
A tyre can easily burst if the pressure is too
low, c
ausing an accident!
●
At continuously high speeds, a tyre with in-
sufficient pressure flexes more. In this way it
becomes too hot, and this can cause tread
separation and tyre blow-out. Always observe
the recommended tyre pressures.
●
If the tyre pressure is too low or too high,
the tyres will wear prematurely and the vehi-
cle will not handle well. Risk of accident!
For the sake of the environment
Under-inflated tyres will increase fuel con-
sumption.
Tyre useful life
Fig. 177 Tyre tread wear indicators.
Fig. 178 Diagram for changing wheels
The useful life of tyres is dependent on tyre
pr
e
s
sure, driving style and fitting.
Wear indicators
The original tyres on your vehicle have
1.6 mm high “tread wear indicators”
››› Fig. 177, running across the tread. De-
pending on the make, there will be 6 to 8 of
them evenly spaced around the tyre. Mark-
ings on the tyre sidewall (for instance the let-
ters “TWI” or other symbols) indicate the po-
sitions of the tread wear indicators. The mini-
mum tread depth required by law is 1.6 mm
(measured in the tread grooves next to the
tread wear indicators). Worn tyres must be re-
placed. Different figures may apply in export
countries ›››
.
T
y
r
e pressure
Incorrect tyre pressure causes premature
wear and could cause tyre blow-out. For this
reason, the tyre pressure should be checked
at least once per month ››› page 210.
Driving style
Fast cornering, heavy acceleration and hard
braking all increase tyre wear.
Changing wheels around
If the front tyres are worn considerably more
than the rear ones it is advisable to change
them around as shown ››› Fig. 178. The use-
ful life of all the tyres will then be about the
same time.
Wheel balance
The wheels on new vehicles are balanced.
However, various factors encountered in nor-
mal driving can cause them to become unbal-
anced, which results in steering vibration.
»
211
Technical dataAdviceOperationEmergenciesSafety
Advice
Unbalanced wheels should be rebalanced, as
they
other
w
ise cause excessive wear on
steering, suspension and tyres. A wheel must
also be rebalanced when a new tyre is fitted.
Incorrect wheel alignment
Incorrect running gear alignment causes ex-
cessive tyre wear, impairing the safety of the
vehicle. If tyres show excessive wear, you
should have the wheel alignment checked by
a Technical Service.
WARNING
There is a serious danger of accidents if a tyre
burs
ts during driving!
●
The tyres must be replaced at the latest
when the tread wear indicators are worn
››› page 211. Failure to follow this instruction
could result in an accident. Worn tyres do not
grip well at high speeds on wet roads. There
is also a greater risk of “aquaplaning”.
●
At continuously high speeds, a tyre with in-
sufficient pressure flexes more. This causes it
to overheat. This can cause tread separation
and tyre blow-out. Risk of accident. Always
observe the recommended tyre pressures.
●
If tyres show excessive wear, you should
have the running gear checked by a Technical
Service.
●
Keep chemicals such as oil, fuel and brake
fluid away from tyres.
●
Damaged wheels and tyres must be re-
placed immediately!
For the sake of the environment
Under-inflated tyres will increase fuel con-
sumption.
New tyres and wheels
New tyres and wheels have to be run in.
The tyre
s and wheel rims are an essential
part of the vehicle's design. Those approved
by SEAT are specially matched to the charac-
teristics of the vehicle and make a major con-
tribution to good road-holding and safe han-
dling
›››
.
T
y
r
es should be replaced at least in pairs and
not individually (i.e. both front tyres or both
rear tyres together). A knowledge of tyre des-
ignations makes it easier to choose the cor-
rect tyres. Radial tyres have the tyre designa-
tions marked on the sidewall, for example:
195/65 R15 91T
This contains the following information:
Tyre width in mm
Height/width ratio in %
Tyre construction: Radial
Rim diameter in inches
Load rating code
Speed rating
195
65
R
15
91
T
The tyres could also have the following infor-
mation:
●
A direction of rotation symbol
●
“Reinforced” denotes heavy-duty tyres.
The manufacturing date is also indicated on
the tyre sidewall (possibly only on the inner
side of the wheel).
“DOT ... 1103 ...” means, for example, that
the tyre was produced in the 11th week of
2003.
We recommend that work on tyres and
wheels be carried out by a Technical Service.
They are familiar with the procedure and
have the necessary special tools and spare
parts as well as the proper facilities for dis-
posing of the old tyres.
Any technical service has full information on
the technical requirements when installing or
changing tyres, wheels or wheel trims.
WARNING
●
We rec
ommend that you use only wheels
and tyres which have been approved by SEAT
for your model. Failure to do so could impair
vehicle handling. Risk of accident.
●
Avoid running the vehicle on tyres that are
more than 6 years old. If you have no alterna-
tive, you should drive slowly and with extra
care at all times.
212
Wheels
●
Never use o
ld tyres or those with an un-
known “history of use”.
●
If wheel trims are retrofitted, you must en-
sure that the flow of air to the brakes is not
restricted. This could cause the brake system
to overheat.
●
All four wheels must be fitted with radial
tyres of the same type, size (rolling circumfer-
ence) and the same tread pattern.
For the sake of the environment
Old tyres must be disposed of according to
the l
aw
s in the country concerned.
Note
●
A SEA
T Service Centre should be consulted
to find out whether wheels or tyres of differ-
ent sizes to those originally fitted by SEAT
can be fitted, and to find out about the com-
binations allowed between the front axle
(axle 1) and the rear axle (axle 2).
●
For technical reasons, it is not generally
possible to use the wheels from other vehi-
cles. This can also apply to wheels of the
same model. The use of wheels or tyres
which have not been approved by SEAT for
use with your model may invalidate the vehi-
cle's type approval for use on public roads.
●
If the spare tyre is not the same as the
tyres that are mounted on the vehicle (e.g.
winter tyres) you should only use the spare
tyre for a short period of time and drive with
extra care. Refit the normal road wheel as
soon as po
ssible.
Wheel bolts
The design of wheel bolts is matched to the
rims. If differ
ent wheel rims are fitted, the
correct wheel bolts with the right length and
correctly shaped bolt heads must be used.
This ensures that wheels are fitted securely
and that the brake system functions correctly.
In certain circumstances, you should not use
wheel bolts from a different vehicle, even if it
is the same model ››› page 187.
WARNING
If the wheel bolts are not tightened correctly,
the wheel cou
ld become loose while driving.
Risk of accident.
●
The wheel bolts must be clean and turn
easily. Never apply grease or oil to them.
●
Use only wheel bolts which belong to the
wheel.
●
If the prescribed torque of the wheel bolts
is too low, they could loosen whilst the vehi-
cle is in motion. Risk of accident! If the tight-
ening torque is too high, the wheel bolts and
threads can be damaged.
CAUTION
The prescribed tightening torque for wheel
bolts
for steel and alloy wheels is 120 Nm.
Tyre pressure
Fig. 179 Centre console: tyre monitoring sys-
t
em b
utt
on.
The tyre monitoring lamp * c
omp
ar
es
wheel revolutions and with it, using the ESC,
the wheel diameter of each wheel. If the di-
ameter of a wheel changes, the tyre control
lamp lights up. The wheel diameter
changes when:
●
Tyre pressure is insufficient.
●
The tyre structure is damaged.
●
The vehicle is unbalanced because of a
load.
»
213
Technical dataAdviceOperationEmergenciesSafety
Advice
●
The wheel
s
of
one axle are under more
pressure (for example, driving with a trailer or
on steep slopes).
●
The vehicle is fitted with snow chains.
●
The temporary spare wheel is fitted.
●
The wheel on one axle is changed.
Tyre pressure adjustment
On adjusting tyre pressure or changing one
or more wheels, the ››› Fig. 179 button must
be kept pressed down, with the ignition on,
until an acoustic signal is heard.
Store the new tyre pressure in the Easy Con-
nect system with the button
and the func-
tion b
utt
on
Set
up
›
›
›
p
age 24.
If the wheels are under excessive load (for ex-
ample, driving with a trailer or heavy load),
the tyre pressure must be increased to the
recommended value for a full load (see the
sticker on the inside of the fuel flap). If the
tyre monitor system button is pressed down,
the new tyre pressures are confirmed.
The tyre pressure control lamp lights up
If the tyre pressure of a wheel is much lower
than the value set by the driver, then the tyre
pressure control lamp ›››
will light up.
WARNING
●
When the tyre pr
essure control lamp lights
up, reduce speed immediately and avoid any
sudden turning or braking manoeuvre. Stop
when poss
ible, and check the tyre pressure
and status.
●
The driver is responsible for maintaining
correct tyre pressures. For this reason, tyre
pressure must be regularly checked.
●
Under certain circumstances (e.g. when
driving in a sporty manner, in winter condi-
tions or on a dirt track) the tyre control lamp
may light up belatedly or may function incor-
rectly.
Note
If the battery is disconnected, the yellow
warning l
amp lights up after turning the
ignition on. This should turn off after a brief
journey.
Winter service
W
int
er ty
res
In winter conditions winter tyres will consid-
er
ab
ly
improve the vehicle's handling. The
design of summer tyres (width, rubber com-
pound, tread pattern) gives less grip on ice
and snow.
Winter tyres must be inflated to a pressure of
0.2 bar (2.9 psi/20 kPa) higher than the pres-
sures specified for summer tyres (see sticker
on fuel tank flap).
Winter tyres must be fitted on all four wheels.
Information on permitted winter tyre sizes
can be found in the vehicle's registration
documentation. Use only radial winter tyres.
All tyre sizes listed in the vehicle documenta-
tion also apply to winter tyres.
Winter tyres lose their effectiveness when the
tread is worn down to a depth of 4 mm.
The speed rating code ››› page 212, New
tyres and wheels determines the following
speed limits for winter tyres: ›››
max. 160 km/h (99 mph)
m
ax. 180 km/h (112 mph)
m
ax. 190 km/h (118 mph)
m
ax. 210 km/h (130 mph)
In some countries, vehicles which can exceed
the speed rating of the fitted tyre must have
an appropriate sticker in the driver's field of
view. These stickers are available from your
technical service. The legal requirements of
each country must be followed.
Do not have winter tyres fitted for unnecessa-
rily long periods. Vehicles with summer tyres
handle better when the roads are free of
snow and ice.
If you have a flat tyre, please refer to the
notes on the spare wheel ››› page 212, New
tyres and wheels.
Q
S
T
H
214
Wheels
WARNING
The maximum speed for the winter tyres must
not be ex
ceeded. Otherwise, this could lead
to damage and risk of accident.
For the sake of the environment
Fit your summer tyres again as soon as possi-
ble.
They are quieter, do not wear so quickly
and reduce fuel consumption.
215
Technical dataAdviceOperationEmergenciesSafety
Technical data
Technical data
T
ec
hnic
al specifications
Important information
Important
The information in the vehicle documentation
alway
s takes precedence over the informa-
tion in this Instruction Manual.
All technical specifications provided in this
documentation are valid for the standard
model in Spain. The vehicle data card inclu-
ded in the Maintenance Programme or the
vehicle registration documents shows which
engine is installed in the vehicle.
The figures may be different depending
whether additional equipment is fitted, for
different models, for special vehicles and for
other countries.
Abbreviations used in the technical specifi-
cations
section
kW Kilowatt, engine power measurement.
PS
Pferdestärke (horsepower), formerly
used to denote engine power.
rpm Revolutions per minute - engine speed.
Nm Newton metres, unit of engine torque.
CZ
Cetane number, indication of the diesel
combustion power.
RON
Research octane number, indication of
the knock resistance of petrol.
Vehicle identification data
Fig. 180 Vehicle data sticker (luggage com-
p
ar
tment).
Fig. 181 Chassis number.
Vehicles for certain export countries do not
h
av
e an identific
ation plate.
Chassis number
The VIN is located in the Easy Connect, on the
vehicle data sticker and under the wind-
screen, on the driver side ››› Fig. 181. Addi-
tionally, the chassis number is located in the
engine compartment, on the right-hand side.
The number is engraved on the top side rail,
and is partially covered.
Identification plate
The type plate is located on the rear pillar of
the front right door.
Vehicle data sticker
The data sticker is placed on the inside of the
spare wheel well, in the boot and on the rear
cover of the Maintenance Programme.
216
Technical specifications
The following information is provided on the
v
ehic
l
e data sticker: ››› Fig. 180
Vehicle identification number (chassis
number)
Vehicle type, model, capacity, engine
type, finish, engine power and gearbox
type
Engine code, gearbox code, external
paint code and internal equipment code
Optional extras and PR numbers
Chassis number
The vehicle identification number can be
read from outside the vehicle through a view-
er in the windscreen ››› Fig. 181. The viewer is
located near the lower corner of the wind-
screen. The chassis number is printed on the
right water drain channel. The water drain
channel is located between the suspension
turret and the fender. To access the chassis
number, open the bonnet ››› page 198.
Information on fuel consump-
tion
Fuel consumption
Approved consumption values are derived
fr
om me
a
surements performed or supervised
by certified EU laboratories, according to the
1
2
3
4
legislation in force at the time (for more infor-
m
ation, see the P
ub
lications Office of the Eu-
ropean Union on the EUR-Lex website: © Eu-
ropean Union, http://eur-lex.europa.eu/) and
apply to the specified vehicle characteristics.
The values relating to fuel consumption and
CO
2
emissions can be found in the documen-
tation provided to the purchaser of the vehi-
cle at the time of purchase.
Fuel consumption and CO
2
emissions depend
on the equipment/features of each individual
vehicle, as well as on the driving style, road
conditions, traffic conditions, environmental
conditions, load or number of passengers.
Note
In practice, and considering all the factors
mentioned here, con
sumption values can dif-
fer from those calculated in the current Euro-
pean regulations.
Weights
Kerb weight refers to the basic model with a
f
uel
t
ank filled to 90% capacity and without
optional extras. The figure quoted includes
75 kg to allow for the weight of the driver.
Special versions, optional equipment fittings
or retro-fitting accessories will increase the
weight of the vehicle
›››
.
WARNING
●
Plea
se note that the centre of gravity may
shift when transporting heavy objects; this
may affect vehicle handling and lead to an ac-
cident. Always adjust your speed and driving
style to suit road conditions and require-
ments.
●
Never exceed the gross axle weight rating
or the gross vehicle weight rating. If the per-
missible axle load or the permissible total
weight is exceeded, the driving characteris-
tics of the vehicle may change, leading to ac-
cidents, injuries and damage to the vehicle.
Trailer mode
T
r
ai
ler weights
Trailer weight
The tr
ai
l
er weights and drawbar loads ap-
proved are selected in intensive trials accord-
ing to precisely defined criteria. The ap-
proved trailer weights are valid for vehicles in
the EU for maximum speeds of 80 km/h (50
mph) (in certain circumstances up to 100
km/h (62 mph)). The figures may be different
in other countries. All data in the official vehi-
cle documentation takes precedence over
these data at all times
›››
.
»
217
Technical dataAdviceOperationEmergenciesSafety
Technical data
Drawbar loads
The maximum permitt
ed dr
a
wbar load on the
ball joint of the towing bracket must not ex-
ceed 75 kg.
In the interest of road safety, we recommend
that you always tow approaching the maxi-
mum drawbar load. The response of the trail-
er on the road will be poor, if the drawbar
load is too small.
If the maximum permissible drawbar load
cannot be met (e.g. with small, empty and
light-weight single axle trailers or tandem
axle trailers with a wheelbase of less than 1
metre), a minimum of 4% of the actual trailer
weight is legally required for the drawbar
load.
WARNING
●
For saf
ety reasons, you should not drive at
speeds above 80 km/h (50 mph) when towing
a trailer. This also applies in countries where
higher speeds are permitted.
●
Never exceed the maximum trailer weights
or the drawbar load. If the permissible axle
load or the permissible total weight is excee-
ded, the driving characteristics of the vehicle
may change, leading to accidents, injuries
and damage to the vehicle.
Wheels
T
y
r
e pressure, snow chains, wheel
bolts
Tyre pressures
The stick
er with the tyre pressure values can
be found on the inside of the fuel tank flap.
The tyre pressure values given there are for
cold tyres. Do not reduce the slightly raised
pressures of warm tyres ›››
.
The pres
sure for winter tyres is 0.2 bar higher
than that of summer tyres (2.9 psi / 20 kPa).
Snow chains
Snow chains may be fitted only to the front
wheels, and only for the following tyres:
175/70R14
185/60R15
Chains with links not exceeding 15 mm
(including the chain closure)
215/45R16 Chains with links not exceeding 9 mm
(including the chain closure)
215/40R17 Chains with links not exceeding 7 mm
(including the chain closure)
Wheel bolts
Af
t
er the wheel
s have been changed, the
tightening torque of the wheel bolts should
be checked as soon as possible with a torque
wrench
›››
. The tightening torque for steel
and al
lo
y
wheels is 120 Nm.
WARNING
●
Check the ty
re pressure at least once per
month. Checking the tyre pressure is very im-
portant. If the tyre pressure is too high or too
low, there is an increased danger of accidents
- particularly at high speeds.
●
If the tightening torque of the wheel bolts
is too low, they could loosen while the vehi-
cle is in motion. Risk of accident! If the tight-
ening torque is too high, the wheel bolts and
threads can be damaged.
Note
We recommend that you ask your Technical
Servic
e for information about appropriate
wheel, tyre and snow chain size.
218
Technical specifications
Engine data
P
etr
o
l engine 1.0 MPI 55 kW (75 PS)
Power output in kW (PS) at rpm Maximum torque (Nm at rpm) No. of cylinders/displacement (cm
3
) Fuel
55 (75)/6,200 95/3,000-4,300 3/999 Super 95 RON/Normal 91 RON
a)
a)
Slight power loss.
Outputs and weights IBIZA
IBIZA
Start-Stop
IBIZA SC
IBIZA SC
Start-Stop
Top speed (km/h) 172 172 172 172
Acceleration from 0-80 km/h (seconds) 9.5 9.5 9.5 9.5
Acceleration from 0-100 km/h (seconds) 14.3 14.3 14.3 14.3
Maximum authorised weight (kg) 1,530 1,540 1,530 1,540
Weight in running order (with driver) (kg) 1,043 1,049 1,043 1,049
Maximum authorised weight on front axle (kg) 790 800 790 800
Maximum authorised weight on rear axle (kg) 790 790 790 790
Permitted roof load (kg) 75 75 75 75
Maximum trailer weight without brakes (kg) 520 520 520 520
Weight of trailer with brakes, gradients up to 8% (kg) 1,000 1,000 1,000 1,000
Weight of trailer with brakes, gradients up to 12% (kg) 800 800 800 800
219
Technical dataAdviceOperationEmergenciesSafety
Technical data
Petrol engine 1.2 TSI 66 kW (90 PS)
Power output in kW (PS) at rpm Maximum torque (Nm at rpm) No. of cylinders/displacement (cm
3
) Fuel
66 (90)/4,400-5,400 160/1,400-3,500 4/1,197 Super 95 RON/Normal 91 RON
a)
a)
Slight power loss.
Outputs and weights IBIZA IBIZA SC
Top speed (km/h) 184 184
Acceleration from 0-80 km/h (seconds) 7.0 7.0
Acceleration from 0-100 km/h (seconds) 10.7 10.7
Maximum authorised weight (kg) 1,580 1,580
Weight in running order (with driver) (kg) 1,089 1,089
Maximum authorised weight on front axle (kg) 840 840
Maximum authorised weight on rear axle (kg) 790 790
Permitted roof load (kg) 75 75
Maximum trailer weight without brakes (kg) 540 540
Weight of trailer with brakes, gradients up to 8% (kg) 1,100 1,100
Weight of trailer with brakes, gradients up to 12% (kg) 1,000 1,000
220
Technical specifications
Petrol engine 1.6 MPI 66 kW (90 PS)
Power output in kW (PS) at rpm Maximum torque (Nm at rpm) No. of cylinders/displacement (cm
3
) Fuel
66 (90)/4,250-6,000 155/3,800-4,000 4/1,598 Super 95 RON/Normal 91 RON
a)
a)
Slight power loss.
Outputs and weights IBIZA IBIZA SC
Top speed (km/h) 185 185
Acceleration from 0-80 km/h (seconds) 7.0 7.0
Acceleration from 0-100 km/h (seconds) 10.6 10.6
Maximum authorised weight (kg) 1,570 1,570
Weight in running order (with driver) (kg) 1,079 1,079
Maximum authorised weight on front axle (kg) 830 830
Maximum authorised weight on rear axle (kg) 790 790
Permitted roof load (kg) 75 75
Maximum trailer weight without brakes (kg) 530 530
Weight of trailer with brakes, gradients up to 8% (kg) 1,000 1,000
Weight of trailer with brakes, gradients up to 12% (kg) 1,000 1,000
221
Technical dataAdviceOperationEmergenciesSafety
Technical data
Petrol engine 1.0 EcoTSI 70 kW (95 PS) Start-Stop
Power output in kW (PS) at rpm Maximum torque (Nm at rpm) No. of cylinders/displacement (cm
3
) Fuel
70 (95)/5,000-5,500 160/1,500-3,500 3/999 Super 95 RON/Normal 91 RON
a)
a)
Slight power loss.
Outputs and weights IBIZA
IBIZA
ecomotive
IBIZA SC
IBIZA SC
ecomotive
Top speed (km/h) 187 191 187 191
Acceleration from 0-80 km/h (seconds) 6.9 6.9 6.9 6.9
Acceleration from 0-100 km/h (seconds) 10.4 10.4 10.4 10.4
Maximum authorised weight (kg) 1,590 1,590 1,590 1,590
Weight in running order (with driver) (kg) 1,095 1,095 1,095 1,095
Maximum authorised weight on front axle (kg) 850 850 850 850
Maximum authorised weight on rear axle (kg) 790 790 790 790
Permitted roof load (kg) 75 75 75 75
Maximum trailer weight without brakes (kg) 540 500 540 500
Weight of trailer with brakes, gradients up to 8% (kg) 1000 500 1000 500
Weight of trailer with brakes, gradients up to 12% (kg) 900 500 900 500
222
Technical specifications
Petrol engine 1.0 EcoTSI 81 kW (110 PS) Start-Stop
Power output in kW (PS) at rpm Maximum torque (Nm at rpm) No. of cylinders/displacement (cm
3
) Fuel
81 (110)/5,000-5,500 200/2,000-3,500 3/999 Super 95 RON/Normal 91 RON
a)
a)
Slight power loss.
Outputs and weights
IBIZA
Manual
IBIZA
Automatic
IBIZA SC
Manual
IBIZA SC
Automatic
Top speed (km/h) 197 197 197 197
Acceleration from 0-80 km/h (seconds) 6.3 6.2 6.3 6.2
Acceleration from 0-100 km/h (seconds) 9.2 9.3 9.2 9.3
Maximum authorised weight (kg) 1,600 1,630 1,600 1,630
Weight in running order (with driver) (kg) 1,109 1,140 1,109 1,140
Maximum authorised weight on front axle (kg) 860 900 860 900
Maximum authorised weight on rear axle (kg) 790 780 790 780
Permitted roof load (kg) 75 75 75 75
Maximum trailer weight without brakes (kg) 550 570 550 570
Weight of trailer with brakes, gradients up to 8% (kg) 1,100 1,100 1,100 1,100
Weight of trailer with brakes, gradients up to 12% (kg) 1,000 1,000 1,000 1,000
223
Technical dataAdviceOperationEmergenciesSafety
Technical data
Petrol engine 1.2 TSI 81 kW (110 PS)
Power output in kW (PS) at rpm Maximum torque (Nm at rpm) No. of cylinders/displacement (cm
3
) Fuel
81 (110)/4,600-5,600 175/1,400-4,000 4/1197 Super 95 RON/Normal 91 RON
a)
a)
Slight power loss.
Outputs and weights IBIZA IBIZA SC
Top speed (km/h) 197 197
Acceleration from 0-80 km/h (seconds) 6.2 6.2
Acceleration from 0-100 km/h (seconds) 9.1 9.1
Maximum authorised weight (kg) 1,590 1,590
Weight in running order (with driver) (kg) 1,102 1,102
Maximum authorised weight on front axle (kg) 860 860
Maximum authorised weight on rear axle (kg) 780 780
Permitted roof load (kg) 75 75
Maximum trailer weight without brakes (kg) 550 550
Weight of trailer with brakes, gradients up to 8% (kg) 1,100 1,100
Weight of trailer with brakes, gradients up to 12% (kg) 1,100 1,100
224
Technical specifications
Petrol engine 1.6 MPI 81 kW (110 PS)
Power output in kW (PS) at rpm Maximum torque (Nm at rpm) No. of cylinders/displacement (cm
3
) Fuel
81 (110)/5,800 155/3,800-4,000 4/1,598 Super 95 RON/Normal 91 RON
a)
a)
Slight power loss.
Outputs and weights
IBIZA
Manual
IBIZA
Automatic
IBIZA SC
Manual
IBIZA SC
Automatic
Top speed (km/h) 196 197 196 197
Acceleration from 0-80 km/h (seconds) 6.4 6.6 6.4 6.6
Acceleration from 0-100 km/h (seconds) 9.8 8.7 9.8 8.7
Maximum authorised weight (kg) 1,580 1,620 1,580 1,620
Weight in running order (with driver) (kg) 1,085 1,126 1,085 1,126
Maximum authorised weight on front axle (kg) 840 890 840 890
Maximum authorised weight on rear axle (kg) 790 780 790 780
Permitted roof load (kg) 75 75 75 75
Maximum trailer weight without brakes (kg) 540 560 540 560
Weight of trailer with brakes, gradients up to 8% (kg) 1,100 1,100 1,100 1,100
Weight of trailer with brakes, gradients up to 12% (kg) 1,100 1,100 1,100 1,100
225
Technical dataAdviceOperationEmergenciesSafety
Technical data
Petrol engine 1.4 EcoTSI ACT 110 kW (150 PS) Start-Stop
Power output in kW (PS) at rpm Maximum torque (Nm at rpm) No. of cylinders/displacement (cm
3
) Fuel
110 (150)/5,000-6,000 250/1,500-3,500 4/1,395 Super 95 RON/Normal 91 RON
a)
a)
Slight power loss.
Outputs and weights IBIZA IBIZA SC
Top speed (km/h) 220 220
Acceleration from 0-80 km/h (seconds) 5.3 5.3
Acceleration from 0-100 km/h (seconds) 7.6 7.6
Maximum authorised weight (kg) 1,630 1,630
Weight in running order (with driver) (kg) 1,143 1,143
Maximum authorised weight on front axle (kg) 890 890
Maximum authorised weight on rear axle (kg) 790 790
Permitted roof load (kg) 75 75
Maximum trailer weight without brakes (kg) 570 570
Weight of trailer with brakes, gradients up to 8% (kg) 1,200 1,200
Weight of trailer with brakes, gradients up to 12% (kg) 1,200 1,200
226
Technical specifications
Petrol engine 1.8 TSI 141 kW (192 PS) Start-Stop
Power output in kW (PS) at rpm Maximum torque (Nm at rpm) No. of cylinders/displacement (cm
3
) Fuel
141 (192)/4,300-6,200 320/1,450-4,200 4/1,798 Super 95 RON/Normal 91 RON
a)
a)
Slight power loss.
Outputs and weights IBIZA SC
Top speed (km/h) 235
Acceleration from 0-80 km/h (seconds) 5.1
Acceleration from 0-100 km/h (seconds) 6.7
Maximum authorised weight (kg) 1,700
Weight in running order (with driver) (kg) 1,260
Maximum authorised weight on front axle (kg) 950
Maximum authorised weight on rear axle (kg) 800
Permitted roof load (kg) 75
Maximum trailer weight without brakes (kg) –
Weight of trailer with brakes, gradients up to 8% (kg) –
Weight of trailer with brakes, gradients up to 12% (kg) –
227
Technical dataAdviceOperationEmergenciesSafety
Technical data
Diesel engine 1.4 TDI 55 kW (75 PS)
Power output in kW (PS) at rpm Maximum torque (Nm at rpm) No. of cylinders/displacement (cm
3
) Fuel
55 (75)/3,000-3,750 210/1,500-2,000 3/1,422 Min, diesel acc. to DIN EN 590 51 CN
Outputs and weights IBIZA
IBIZA
Start-Stop
IBIZA SC
IBIZA SC
Start-Stop
Top speed (km/h) 171 173 171 173
Acceleration from 0-80 km/h (seconds) 8.6 8.5 8.6 8.5
Acceleration from 0-100 km/h (seconds) 12.9 13.0 12.9 13.0
Maximum authorised weight (kg) 1,640 1,640 1,640 1,640
Weight in running order (with driver) (kg) 1,150 1,155 1,150 1,155
Maximum authorised weight on front axle (kg) 900 910 900 910
Maximum authorised weight on rear axle (kg) 790 770 790 770
Permitted roof load (kg) 75 75 75 75
Maximum trailer weight without brakes (kg) 570 570 570 570
Weight of trailer with brakes, gradients up to 8% (kg) 1,100 1,100 1,100 1,100
Weight of trailer with brakes, gradients up to 12% (kg) 1,000 1,000 1,000 1,000
228
Technical specifications
Diesel engine 1.4 TDI 66 kW (90 PS)
Power output in kW (PS) at rpm Maximum torque (Nm at rpm) No. of cylinders/displacement (cm
3
) Fuel
66 (90)/2,750-3,500 230/1,500-2,500 3/1,422 Min, diesel acc. to DIN EN 590 51 CN
Outputs and weights IBIZA
IBIZA
Start-Stop
IBIZA
Automatic
IBIZA SC
IBIZA SC
Start-Stop
IBIZA SC
Automatic
Top speed (km/h) 182 182 182 182 182 182
Acceleration from 0-80 km/h (seconds) 7.4 7.4 7.4 7.4 7.4 7.4
Acceleration from 0-100 km/h (seconds) 10.9 10.9 10.9 10.9 10.9 10.9
Maximum authorised weight (kg) 1,640 1,640 1,670 1,640 1,640 1,670
Weight in running order (with driver) (kg) 1,150 1,155 1,165 1,150 1,155 1,165
Maximum authorised weight on front axle (kg) 900 910 940 900 910 940
Maximum authorised weight on rear axle (kg) 790 780 780 790 780 780
Permitted roof load (kg) 75 75 75 75 75 75
Maximum trailer weight without brakes (kg) 570 570 580 570 570 580
Weight of trailer with brakes, gradients up to 8% (kg) 1,200 1,200 1,200 1,200 1,200 1,200
Weight of trailer with brakes, gradients up to 12% (kg) 1,100 1,100 1,100 1,100 1,100 1,100
229
Technical dataAdviceOperationEmergenciesSafety
Technical data
Diesel engine 1.4 TDI 77 kW (105 PS)
Power output in kW (PS) at rpm Maximum torque (Nm at rpm) No. of cylinders/displacement (cm
3
) Fuel
77 (105)/3,500-3,750 250/1,750-2,500 3/1,422 Min, diesel acc. to DIN EN 590 51 CN
Outputs and weights
IBIZA
with Start-Stop
IBIZA
without Start-Stop
IBIZA SC
with Start-Stop
IBIZA SC
without Start-Stop
Top speed (km/h) 192 192 192 192
Acceleration from 0-80 km/h (seconds) 6.9 6.9 6.9 6.9
Acceleration from 0-100 km/h (seconds) 9.9 9.9 9.9 9.9
Maximum authorised weight (kg) 1,650 1,650 1,650 1,650
Weight in running order (with driver) (kg) 1,161 1,156 1,161 1,156
Maximum authorised weight on front axle (kg) 920 920 920 920
Maximum authorised weight on rear axle (kg) 780 780 780 780
Permitted roof load (kg) 75 75 75 75
Maximum trailer weight without brakes (kg) 580 570 580 570
Weight of trailer with brakes, gradients up to 8% (kg) 1,200 1,200 1,200 1,200
Weight of trailer with brakes, gradients up to 12% (kg) 1,100 1,100 1,100 1,100
230
Technical specifications
Dimensions
Fig. 182 Dimensions
Fig. 182 IBIZA IBIZA SC
A/B Front and rear projections (mm) 857/735 857/717
C Wheelbase (mm) 2,469 2,469
D Length (mm) 4,061 4,043
E/F Front/rear
a)
track width (mm) 1,465/1,457 1,465/1,457
G Width (mm) 1,693 1,693
H Height at kerb weight (mm) 1,445 1,428
Turning radius (m) 10.7 10.7
a)
This data will change depending on the type of wheel rim.
231
Technical dataAdviceOperationEmergenciesSafety
Index
Index
A
ABS
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
c
ontr
ol lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
Additional electrical appliances (efficiency pro-
gramme) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Adjusting
front head restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60, 128
lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
rear head restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Adjusting the front seats
adjusting the lumbar support . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
Adjusting the head restraints
front head restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
rear head restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Adjusting the seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
Adjustment
CAR menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
AFS headlight bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
Airbag covers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
Airbag system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14, 66
activation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
deactivation of front airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
front airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14, 69
functioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
head-protection airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
side airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Air conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39, 141
climatronic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
general notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
manual air conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
Air outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
Air recirculation
air conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
heating and fresh air . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
Alarm system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
switching off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
Alloy wheel rims . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
Alternator
warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
Ambient lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
Anti-freeze . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Anti-lock brake system . . . . . . . . . . . . 152, 154, 155
control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
Anti-puncture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46, 76
Anti-puncture kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46, 76
check after 10 minutes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Anti-puncture set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
Anti-theft alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
Anti-theft alarm system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
switching off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
Aquaplaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
Aspects to note before setting off . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
ASR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
Assistance systems
parking aid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173, 174
Assistance Systems
fatigue detection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
Assisted starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
Audible warning signal
seat belt not fastened . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
warning and control lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
Automatic car wash tunnel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
Automatic gearbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
driving programmes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
driving tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
kick-down device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
manual release of selector lever . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
selecting gears with Tiptronic . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
selector lever lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
selector lever positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
tiptronic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
Automatic lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
AUX-IN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
B
Back seat
folding down and raising the back seat back-
rest . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
Ball coupling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
Before setting off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Belt pretensioners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Biodiesel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
Bonnet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10, 198, 201
closing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
opening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
Boot hatch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
Boot lid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
Brake assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
Brake fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43, 206
changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
Brake pads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149, 164
Brakes
brake fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
new Brake pads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
Brake servo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149, 157
Brake system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
233
Index
Braking
br
ak
e a
ssist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
Braking distance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
Braking system
warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
Bulbs
changing the bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Buzzer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
C
Capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
fuel tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
Car care
exterior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
Catalytic converter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166, 167
malfunction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
CCS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Central locking
anti-theft alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
automatic speed-dependent locking . . . . . . . 108
central locking button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
electric windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
key by remote control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
selective unlocking system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
self-locking system to prevent involuntary un-
locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
unlocking system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
Central locking system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
safe security system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
Cetane number (diesel fuel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
Changing a
DRL light bulb . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
Changing a bulb
additional brake light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
luggage compartment light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
tail light bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
turn signal light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
Changing a double headlight bulb
dipped beam headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
double headlight bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
Changing an AFS headlight bulb . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
turn signal light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
xenon light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
Changing a single headlight bulb
side light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
single headlight bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
turn signal light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
Changing a wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
subsequent work . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Changing double headlight bulb
side light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
Changing settings
CAR menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Changing the blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Changing the bulbs
AFS headlight bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
fog light bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
general notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
interior light and reading light . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
number plate light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
turn signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
Changing the double headlight bulb
main beam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
Changing the single headlight bulbs
dipped/main beam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
Charging the battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
Checking levels
engine compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
Child-proof locking
electric windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
Child seat
categorisation in groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
Child seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16, 73
ISOFIX system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
safety instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16, 72
securing with the seat belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Top Tether system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18, 20
Chrome parts
cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
Cigarette lighter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
alloy wheel rims . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
chrome parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
engine compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
fabric . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
high pressure cleaners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
leather . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
plastic parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191, 194
radio and climate controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
rubber seals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
steel wheel rims . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
stickers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
upholstery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
washing the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
windows and exterior mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
windscreen wiper blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
wooden trim . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
Climatronic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
adjusting the temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
air recirculation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
automatic mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
blower selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
general notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
windscreen defrost . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
Close . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
234
Index
Closing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
bonnet
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
ti
ltin
g panoramic roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
Coming Home . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
Coming Home Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
Contact key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
Control and warning lamps
alternator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
anti-lock brake system (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
ASR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
braking system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
diesel particulate filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166, 168
EDL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
emission control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
ESC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
instrument panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
steering column lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
windscreen washer fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
Controls and displays
general instrument panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
Controls on the steering wheel
operating the audio system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
operating the telephone and audio system . . 103
Convenience closing
tilting panoramic sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
Convenience opening
windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
Coolant
checking level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
Coolant level
control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
Coolant temperature
control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
safety instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
cooling system
checking coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
Cooling system
checking coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
coolant temperature gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
topping up coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204, 205
Correct position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Correct sitting position
front passenger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
rear seat passengers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Cruise control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34, 180
adjusting the stored speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
complete deactivation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
temporary deactivation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
Current . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
D
Dangers in not using the seat belt . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Dash panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Data sticker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216
Deactivating the front passenger front airbag . . . 14
Deactivation of front airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
Diesel
diesel particulate filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
refuelling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
Diesel engine particulate filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
Diesel particulate filter
malfunction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
Digital clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231
Direction of rotation
tyres . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94, 95
Disposal
seat belt tensioners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Door handle
de-icing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
Door lock
de-icing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
Door lock cylinder
de-icing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
Door release lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
Doors
childproof locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
opening and closing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Double headlight bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
Driver
see Correct sitting position . . . . . . . . . 57, 58, 59
Driver information system
additional electrical appliances . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
assist systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
bonnet, rear lid and doors open . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
engine oil temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
gear-change indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
journey data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
outside temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
saving tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
service intervals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
speed warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
timer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
warning and information messages . . . . . . . . . 29
Driving
driving abroad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
driving through water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
economical driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
with a trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
235
Index
Driving abroad
he
a
dlights
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
petrol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
Driving assistance systems
cruise control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
Driving data
data summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Driving on flooded roads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
Driving safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Driving with a trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
DSG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
Duplicate keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
Dust and pollen filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
Dynamic headlight range control . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
E
E10
see Ethanol (fuel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
Easy Connect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24, 99
EDL
see Electronic differential lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
EDS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
Efficiency programme
additional electrical appliances . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
saving tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Electrical power socket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
Electric windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11, 114
convenience opening/closing . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
Electrolyte . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209
Electronic differential lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152, 154
control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155, 156
Electronic differential lock (XDS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
Electronic immobiliser . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
Electronic stability control (ESC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
Emergencies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
changing a wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
changing the battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209
emergency towing of the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
emergency warning triangle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
fire extinguisher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
first-aid kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
hazard warning lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
Jump leads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
panoramic/tilting sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
puncture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
replacing a blown fuse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
spare wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
vehicle tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
Emergency operation
selector lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Emergency warning triangle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
Emission control system
control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
Emissions data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216
Engine
assisted starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
running in . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
Start-Stop system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
Engine compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10, 198, 201
battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
brake fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
closing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204, 205
engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
opening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
safety notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
windscreen washer liquid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
Engine coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
checking level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
G12 plus-plus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
G13 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Engine data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
Engine fault
control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
Engine management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
Engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41, 201
changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201, 204
check oil level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
consumption . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
diesel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
engine oil dipstick . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
inspection service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
maintenance intervals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
oil properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
temperature display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
topping up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
Engine oil pressure
control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
Environment
ecological driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
environmental compatibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
Environmental tips
refuelling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
ESC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
electronic stability control . . . . . . . . . . . 152, 154
sport mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
see also Electronic Stability Control (ESC) . . . 152
Ethanol (fuel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
Exhaust gas emission control system . . . . . . . . . 167
236
Index
Exhaust gas purification system
c
at
alytic
converter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
diesel particulate filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
Extending
the luggage compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
exterior lighting
changing the bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Exterior mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
adjusting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
folding in electrically . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
folding in manually . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
Exterior view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5, 6
F
Fabric: cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
Fastening rings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
Fatigue detection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
Fault in electronic differential lock (EDL)
control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
Faulty bulbs
changing the bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Filling the fuel tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
Filling the tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
fuel gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
Fire extinguisher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
First-aid kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
Floor mats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Fluid Level control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
Fog-light bulb
FR version . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
Fog light bulb . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
Front airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14, 69
safety instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
Front ashtray . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
Front drink holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
Front passenger front airbag
control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
deactivation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Front seat
manual adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Front seat backrest
folding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
lifting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41, 196
consumption . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
diesel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
ethanol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
fuel gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
refuelling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
saving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
Fuel consumption . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
why does fuel consumption increase? . . . . . . 167
Fuel tank cap
opening and closing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Fuel tank flap
opening and closing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44, 80
fuse box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
identifying blown fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
identifying by colours . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
preparation before replacing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
replacing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
G
Gear-change indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28, 158
Gearbox lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Gear change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
changing gears (manual gearbox) . . . . . . . . . 158
manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
manual gear change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
Gear engaged . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Gear recommendation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
General instrument panel
controls and displays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
turn signal and main beam lever . . . . . . . . . . . 119
warning and indication lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
General overview of the engine compartment . . 201
Glove compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
Glow plug system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
H
Handbrake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149, 150
warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
Hazard warning lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22, 121
HBA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
Head-on collisions and the laws of physics . . . . . 63
Head-protection airbags
description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
safety instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Headlight range control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
Headlights
driving abroad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
fog lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
headlight washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
Head restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
front head restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
rear head restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Headrests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Heated rear window
heating element wires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
Heating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
defrosting the windscreen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
demisting the windscreen and side windows 140
237
Index
Heating and fresh air . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40, 139
He
atin
g and fr
esh air system
controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
Heating system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
Hill driving assistant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
Horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
How to jump start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
Hydraulic Brake Assist
automatic hazard warning lights activation . . 155
I
Identification plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216
Identifying letters on engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216
Ignition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21, 147
Ignition lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21, 147
Incorrect sitting position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Indications on the display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
assist systems submenu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
compass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
distance travelled . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
doors, bonnet and rear lid open . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
driver information system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
ECO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
journey data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
MKB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
outside temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
recommended gear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
SEAT Drive Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
second speed display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
selector lever position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
selector lever positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
service intervals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
speed warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
Start-Stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
warning and information messages . . . . . . . . . 29
Infotainment system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
Inspection service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
Instrument cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
Instrument panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94, 95
instruments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
service interval indication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
warning and control lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
Interior lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Interior mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
anti-dazzle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
Interior view
left guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
right-hand drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
ISOFIX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18, 20
ISOFIX system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
ISOFIX System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
J
Jack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
mounting points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Journey data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Jump leads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
K
Key-operated switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
Key by remote control
unlocking and locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
Keys
replacing the battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
spare key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
synchronise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
unlocking and locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
vehicle key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
Kick-down
automatic gearbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
L
Leaving Home . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
Leaving Home Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
Lifting the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Lighting of the instrument panel, . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21, 117
adaptive headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
additional brake light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
automatic lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
changing the bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
coming home . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
control and warning lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
daytime running lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
fog lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
fog lights with cornering function . . . . . . . . . . 121
headlight range control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
interior light and front reading lights . . . . . . . . 90
interior lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
leaving home . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
lighting of the instrument panel . . . . . . . . . . . 121
light switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
luggage compartment light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
main beam lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
main beams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
number plate light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
parking lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
reading lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
turn signal lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
turn signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
Light switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Load compartment in the luggage compartment
see Loading the luggage compartment . . . . . 133
Loading the luggage compartment . . . . . . . . . . . 133
238
Index
Loading the vehicle
f
a
s
tening rings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
luggage compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
roof luggage rack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
Locking and unlocking
with the central lock button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
Luggage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
Luggage compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9, 133
luggage compartment lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
store the rear shelf . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
unlocking manually . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
see also Loading the luggage compartment . 133
Luggage compartment lid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
M
Main beam lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
Maintenance and cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
maintenance intervals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
Malfunction
catalytic converter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
diesel particulate filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
gearbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
Manual gearbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
Mobile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
Mobile phones . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
Modifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
Multimedia . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
N
Noises
tyres . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Number of seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
O
Octane rating (petrol) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
reset button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
total . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
trip recorder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
Oil change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
Oil properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
One-touch opening and closing
electric windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
Open and close . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
rear lid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
Opening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
bonnet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
fuel tank flap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
tilting panoramic roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
Opening and closing
bonnet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
by remote control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
fuel tank flap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
in the lock cylinder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
rear lid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
rear lid of the luggage compartment . . . . . . . . . 9
tilting panoramic roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
with the central lock button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
Outside temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
P
Parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
Parking aid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
Parking Aid
adjusting the display and audible warnings . 177
automatic activation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
fault . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
parking system plus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
rear parking aid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
sensors and camera: cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
towing bracket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
visual indication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
Parking aid system
see Parking aid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173, 174
Parking distance warning system
see Parking aid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173, 174
Parking (automatic gearbox) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
ParkPilot
see Parking aid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173, 174
Particulate filter (diesel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
Passenger
see Correct sitting position . . . . . . . . . 57, 58, 59
Pedals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Petrol
additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
refuelling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
Plastic parts: cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191, 194
Pollution filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
Positioning seat belts
during pregnancy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Power-assisted steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
Power steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
Pre-heating system
control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
Products for vehicle maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
Puncture
action . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
R
Radio frequency remote control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
Raising the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Rear Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
instructions for use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
239
Index
screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
s
pec
i
al characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
Rear Assist system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
Rear drink holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
Rear fog light
control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
Rear lid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9, 10
Rear seat passengers
see Correct sitting position . . . . . . . . . 57, 58, 59
Rear shelf
store . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
Rear View Camera . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
Rear view mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
Rear view mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
Rear window automatic wiper-washer . . . . . . . . 124
Rear window wiper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
Rear Window wiper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
Rear window wiper blade
changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
Refuelling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
opening fuel tank flap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
Repair work . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
Replacement
parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
Replacement keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
Replacement parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
Replacing the battery
of the vehicle key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
Reset the trip recorder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
Rev counter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94, 95
Rims
changing a wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Roll-back function
tilting panoramic sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
Roof aerial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
Roof carrier system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
Roof luggage rack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
attach the cross bars . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
Roof rack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
Rubber seals
care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
Run-in . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210
brake pads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
tyres . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
Running in
engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
S
safe
driving safe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Safe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
Safe Security system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
child safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
child seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
deactivating the front passenger airbag . . . . . . 14
Safe driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Safety equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Safety instructions
coolant temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
front airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
head-protection airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
side airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
using child seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16, 72
Safety notes
seat belt tensioners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
using seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Saving tips (efficiency programme) . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Seat
heating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
Seat belt position
for pregnant women . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12, 64
control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
protective function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
purpose . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61, 66
safety notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
unfastened . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Seat belt tensioners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
SEAT Drive Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
indications on the display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
SEAT Drive Profile System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
Seat heating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
Selective opening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
Selector lever (automatic gearbox)
manual release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
Service intervals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Service notification: read . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Side airbags
description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
safety instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
Side and interior bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
Signal lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Single headlight bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
Sitting position
driver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Snow chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50, 218
Spanner symbol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Spare wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
Speed limiter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
Speed warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Speed warning device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Sport Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
240
Index
Start-Stop
activ
atin
g and de
activating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
Start-Stop System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
Starting the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
after the fuel tank has been run dry . . . . . . . . 149
diesel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
petrol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
Starting the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Steel wheel rims
cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58, 147
control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
electromechanical . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
power-assisted steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
steering column lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
Steering wheel
adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Steering wheel controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
Steering wheel height adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Storage compartment
glove compartment lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
of front door panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
on the driver side . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
on the front passenger side . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
right front seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
storage pocket in the seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
Storage compartments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
Sun visor
sliding/tilting sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
Sun visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
Switch
hazard warning lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
Switching off the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
Switching off the lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
Switching on the lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
Switching the ignition on and off . . . . . . . . 21, 147
System Easy Connect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
T
Tail light bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
Tail lights
access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
Taking care of your vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
Technical specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216
Temperature display
engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
outside temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Tightening the belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Tightening torque of wheel bolts . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
Tilting panoramic roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
closing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
opening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
Tilting panoramic sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
convenience closing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
roll-back function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
Timer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
lap times . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Tiptronic (automatic gearbox) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
Tire Mobility Set
inflating a tyre . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
Top speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Top Tether . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18, 20
Top Tether system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Top Tether System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Tow-starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52, 79
Towing bracket
ball coupling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
retrofitting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
Towing bracket device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
Towing the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51, 79
Towline anchorage
front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
Towline anchorages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51, 80
Traction control system . . . . . . . . . . . 152, 153, 154
control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
Trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183, 217
parking Aid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
Trailer turn signals
control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
Trailer weights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
Transporting children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
Transporting items
fastening rings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
Transporting objects
roof carrier system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
roof luggage rack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
Turn signal lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
Turn signals
control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
Two-way radios . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
Tyre mobility set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
sealing a tyre . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
Tyre Mobility System
see Anti-puncture kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
Tyre pressure monitoring system . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
Tyre pressures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
Tyre profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
Tyre repair . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
Tyre repair kit
see Anti-puncture kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
241
Index
Tyres . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210
c
h
an
ging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
new tyres . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210, 211, 213
useful life . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
wear indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
with directional tread . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
with directional tread pattern . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210
Tyre tread depth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
Tyre wear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
U
Unfastening the seat belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12, 64
Unlocking and locking
by remote control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
with the central lock button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
Unlocking manually
rear lid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Upholstery: cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
USB/AUX-IN input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
V
Vanity mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
Vehicle
data sticker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216
identification data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216
identification number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216
raising . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
vehicle identification number . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216
Vehicle battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43, 207
assisted starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209
charging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209
connecting and disconnecting . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
disconnect and connect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
electrolyte level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209
winter conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
Vehicle care
windscreen wipers service position . . . . . . . . . 54
Vehicle documentation compartment . . . . . . . . 130
Vehicle interior heating or cooling system . . . . . 141
Vehicle interior monitoring and anti-tow system
activation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
Vehicle paint
code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216
Vehicle paintwork
Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
polishing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
products for vehicle maintenance . . . . . . . . . . 189
Vehicle seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
vehicle tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Vehicle tools
housing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
Vehicle underbody
protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
Vehicle washing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
Ventilation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
Ventilation slits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
W
Warning and control lamp
cruise control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
Warning and control lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
audible warning signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
engine management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
engine pre-heating/fault system . . . . . . . . . . . 168
instrument panel display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Warning and indication lamps
airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
instrument panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
seat belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
tyres . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
Warning messages
red . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
yellow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
Warning symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
see also Warning and control lamps . . . . . . . . . 98
Warning triangle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
Washing
care of the vehicle exterior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
Washing the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
high pressure cleaners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
stickers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
Weights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
Wheel balance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
Wheel bolts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
anti-theft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
caps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
loosening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
tightening torque . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
Wheel cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
removing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210, 218
anti-theft bolts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
new wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
removing and fitting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
snow chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
wheel cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Windows
electric . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11, 114
removing ice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
Window wiper blade . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Windscreen and rear window wiper blades . . . . . 78
Windscreen defrosting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
Windscreen washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43, 123
Windscreen washer fluid
control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
242
Index
Windscreen washer water
c
hec
k
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
filling amounts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
topping up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
Windscreen wiper blades
cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
Windscreen wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23, 123
lifting the wiper blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
replacing the wiper blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
service position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
Winter conditions
battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
diesel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
snow chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
thawing windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
tyres . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
Winter tyres
sizes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
X
XDS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
243
SEAT S.A. is permanently concerned about continuous development of its types and models. For this reason we ask you to under-
stand, that at any given time, changes regarding shape, equipment and technique may take place on the car delivered. For this reason
no right at all may derive based on the data, drawings and descriptions in this current handbook.
All texts, illustrations and standards in this handbook are based on the status of information at the time of printing. Except for error
or omission, the information included in the current handbook is valid as of the date of closing print.
Re-printing, copying or translating, whether total or partial is not allowed unless SEAT allows it in written form.
SEAT reserves all rights in accordance with the “Copyright” Act.
All rights on changes are reserved.
❀
This paper has been manufactured using bleached non-chlorine cellulose.
© SEAT S.A. - Reprint: 15.11.16
About this manual
This manual contains a description of the
equipment supplied with the vehicle at the
time this manual was published. Some of the
units described herein will not be available
until a later date or are only available in cer-
tain markets.
Because this is a general manual for the IBIZA
range, some of the equipment and functions
that are described in this manual are not in-
cluded in all types or variants of the model;
they may vary or be modified depending on
the technical requirements and on the mar-
ket; this is in no way deceptive advertising.
The illustrations are intended as a general
guide and may vary from the equipment fitted
in your vehicle in some details.
The steering indications (left, right, forward,
reverse) appearing in this manual refer to the
normal driving movements of the vehicle ex-
cept when otherwise indicated.
The audiovisual material only is intended to
help users to understand certain car function-
alities better. It does not replace the instruc-
tion manual. Please use the instruction manu-
al to obtain more comprehensive information
and indications.
The equipment marked with an aster-
isk* is fitted as standard only in certain
versions, and is only supplied as op-
tional extras for some versions, or are
only offered in certain countries.
® All registered marks are indicated with
®. Although the copyright symbol does
not appear, it is a copyrighted mark.
>> The section is continued on the follow-
ing page.
Important warnings on a given page
Detailed contents on a given page
General information on a given page
Emergency information on a given page
Audiovisual material on a given page
WARNING
Texts preceded by this symbol contain infor-
mation on safety. They warn you about possi-
ble dangers of accident or injury.
CAUTION
Texts with this symbol draw your attention to
potential sources of damage to your vehicle.
For the sake of the environment
Texts preceded by this symbol contain rele-
vant information concerning environmental
protection.
Note
Texts preceded by this symbol contain additio-
nal information.
This manual is divided into six large parts,
which are:
1. The essentials
2. Safety
3. Emergencies
4. Operation
5. Tips
6. Technical data
At the end of this manual, there is a detailed
alphabetical index that will help you quickly
find the information you require.
OWNER’S
MANUAL
Ibiza
6P0012720BD
Inglés
6P0012720BD (11.16)
Ibiza Inglés (11.16)
SEAT recommends
SEAT GENUINE OIL
SEAT recommends
Castrol EDGE Professional
